Home

EN / ACS310 User's Manual Rev B

1. Frame size R4 IP20 cabinet installation UL open 3AUA0000051130 A Dimension drawings 343 Frame size R4 NEMA 1 LL I oF ry me A z 1817 2 Y BEJ T I x F ii c6 pi 6L x gt E Wu 1 N o A m Q Y Lait x se gt N a ol ers n or 22 D S Y Y L S 86 113 vi m TE 9 5 al 0 10 24 3AUA0000051133 A 344 Dimension drawings Further information Product and service inquiries Address any inquiries about the product to your local ABB representative quoting the type designation and serial number of the unit in question A listing of ABB sales support and service contacts can be found by navigating to www abb com drives and selecting Sales Support and Service Network Product training For information on ABB product training navigate to www abb com drives and select Training courses Providing feedback on ABB Drives manuals Your comments on our manuals are welcome Go to www abb com drives and select Document Library Manuals feedback form LV AC drives Document library on the Internet You can find manuals and other product documents in PDF format on
2. OO oC Frame size R2 IP20 cabinet installation UL open 3AUA0000051090 A Dimension drawings 339 Frame size R2 NEMA 1 Frame size R2 IP20 NEMA 1 3AUA0000051097 A 340 Dimension drawings Frame size R3 IP20 cabinet installation UL open 20 Ex AE YY Y 08 0c yo 00 gt alb 48 Lo 90 A sel 10 de A ES Se eS OS 9 98 Es E 50 o FO sO 1 pe _ Oe is O o S o DES O iy Frame size R3 IP20 cabinet installation UL open 3AUA0000051109 A Dimension drawings 341 Frame size R3 NEMA 1 Frame size R3 IP20 NEMA 1 3AUA0000051118 A 342 Dimension drawings Frame size R4 IP20 cabinet installation UL open L 41 Z 10 i oc co cn AU 00 00
3. nioe me 22 DOGND Digital output max 100 mA y No fault Fault 1 1 360 degree grounding under a clamp 2 The signal source must be powered externally See the manufacturer s instructions An example of a connection using a two wire sensor is given on page 57 Tightening torque 0 4 N m 3 5 Ibf in Application macros 109 PID control macro This macro provides parameter settings for closed loop control systems such as pressure control flow control etc Control can also be switched to speed control using a digital input To enable the macro set the value of parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO to 6 PID CONTROL For the parameter default values see section Default values with different macros on page 157 If you use other than the default connections presented below see section I O terminals on page 49 Note Parameter 2108 START INHIBIT must remain in the default setting 0 OFF E Default I O connections X1A i SCR Signal cable sioaren UUO Er ja ov Reference voltage 10 V DC max 10 mA Des ala Process actual value 4 20 mA 7 e SNS analog nput cet common A enn ascents 2a pia votage output 24 V DG max 200 mA o GND Auxiliary voltage output common m pcom Digital input common 72 DM Stop 0 Start 1 Hand Ci X1B 117 ROCOM Relay output 1 g teers EN No fault Fault 1 e RER i Digital output max 100 mA DOOUT e No fault Fault 1 22 DOGND 1
4. Actual signals and parameters 187 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq See parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 1806 DO ON DELAY Defines the operation delay for digital output DO 0 0 8600 0 E 1807 DO OFF Defines the release delay for digital output DO DELAY 0 0 3600 0s Delay time 0 1s 1808 FO CONTENT Selects a drive signal to be connected to frequency output 104 EL FO 4 Parameter index in group 01 OPERATING DATA Eg 102 0102 SPEED 1809 FO CONTENT Defines the minimum frequency output FO signal value MIN Signal is selected with parameter 1808 FO CONTENT SEL FO minimum and maximum correspond to 1811 MINIMUM FO and 1812 MAXIMUM FO settings as follows o o n x 1809 1810 FO 1809 1810 FO content content X Setting range depends on parameter 1808 FO CONTENT SEL setting 1810 FO CONTENT Defines the maximum frequency output FO signal value X Signal is selected with parameter 1808 FO CONTENT SEL See parameter 1809 FO CONTENT MIN X Setting range depends on parameter 1808 FO CONTENT SEL setting El 1811 MINIMUM FO Defines the minimum value for frequency output FO 0 Hz 10 16000 Hz Minimum frequency See parameter 1809 FO CONTENT 1 1 Hz MIN 1812 MAXIMUM FO Defines the maximum value for frequency output FO 1000 Hz 10 16000 Hz Maximum frequency See parameter 1809 FO CONTENT 1 1 Hz MIN 1813 FILTER FO Defines the filter time constant for frequency output FO ie 0 1 s the
5. FAULT Protection is active The drive trips on fault SERIAL 7 ERR 1 and coasts to stops CONST SP 7 Protection is active The drive generates alarm O COMM and sets the speed to the value defined by parameter 1208 CONST SPEED 7 WARNING Make sure that it is safe to continue operation in case of a communication break LAST SPEED Protection is active The drive generates alarm O COMM and freezes the speed to the level the drive was operating at The speed is determined by the average speed over the previous 10 seconds WARNING Make sure that it is safe to continue operation in case of a communication break 3019 COMM FAULT Defines the time delay for the fieldbus communication break 3 0 s TIME supervision See parameter 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC 0 0 600 0 s Delay time 0 1s N o o I N l Oo E N l _ n _ l Actual signals and parameters 205 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 3021 Al1 FAULT Defines a fault level for analog input Al1 If parameter 3007 0 1 LIMIT AI lt MIN FUNCTION is set to FAULT the drive trips on fault Al1 LOSS when the analog input signal falls below the set level Do not set this limit below the level defined by parameter 1301 MINIMUM AI1 0 0 100 0 Value in percent of the full signal range 3022 Al2 FAULT Defines a fault level for analog input Al2 If parameter 3007 0 1 LIMIT AI lt MIN FUNCTION is set to FAULT the drive trips on fault Al2 LO
6. Supervised parameter value falls below the supervision low limit Bit value is O until the supervised parameter value exceeds the supervision high limit See parameter group 32 SUPERVISION Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 287 ABB drives profile EFB Status word parameter 5320 EFB PAR 20 Value STATE Description Correspond to states boxes in the state diagram 1 EXT CTRL LOC External control location EXT2 selected O External control location EXT1 selected 12 EXT RUN External Run enable signal received ENABLE O No External Run enable received 288 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus The state diagram below describes the start stop function of Control word CW and Status word SW bits for the ABB drives profile From any state From any state From any state Emergency Stop Emergency Off Fault OFF3 CW Bit2 0 OFF2 CW Bit 1 0 opo OFF3 OFF2 a FAULT SW Bit3 1 SW Bit5 0 Oe active SW Bit 4 0 CW Bit7 1 n f 0 1 0 y From any state OFF1 CW Bit0 0 SWITCH ON bin OFF INPUT POWER OFF INHIBITED SW Bit6 1 ACTIVE n f 0 1 0 Power ON CW BitO 0 gt A BC D NOT READY an TO SWITCH on SW Bit0 0 CW Bit3 0 CW xxxx x1 xx xxxx x110 MER OPERATION READY TO dll INHIBITED switch on SW BitO 1 OPERATION INHIBITED CW xxxx x1 xx xxxx x111 gt B C D READY TO q OPERATE TOW BINEI CW Bit4 0 CW Bit3 1 and gt SW Bit12 1 OPERATION oe C D ENABLED SW bea A
7. To perform downloads step to the appropriate operation here dL A Download all is used as an example with keys 45 and Cv Press 7 During the transfer the display shows the transfer status as a percentage of completion E Basic Control Panel alarm codes In addition to the faults and alarms generated by the drive see chapter Fault tracing on page 293 the Basic Control Panel indicates control panel alarms with a code of form A5xxx See section Alarms generated by the Basic Control Panel on page 299 for a list of the alarm codes and descriptions 80 Control panels Assistant Control Panel E Features The Assistant Control Panel features e alphanumeric control panel with an LCD display e language selection for the display e Start up assistant to ease drive commissioning e copy function parameters can be copied to the control panel memory for later transfer to other drives or for backup of a particular system e context sensitive help e real time clock Control panels 81 E Overview The following table summarizes the key functions and displays on the Assistant Control Panel 1 Status LED Green for normal operation If LED is flashing or red see section LEDs on page 315 2 LCD display Divided into three main areas f Status line variable depending on the mode of operation see section Status line on page 82 Center variable in general shows signal and parameter va
8. When two auxiliary pumps operate increase the reference with parameter 8103 REFERENCE STEP 1 parameter 8104 REFERENCE STEP 2 When three auxiliary pumps operate increase the reference with parameter 8103 REFERENCE STEP 1 parameter 8104 REFERENCE STEP 2 parameter 8105 REFERENCE STEP 3 0 0 100 0 Value in percent 1 0 1 Actual signals and parameters 251 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 8104 REFERENCE Sets a percentage value that is added to the process 0 0 reference Applies only when atleast two auxiliary constant speed motors are running See parameter 8703 REFERENCE STEP 17 00100 Valueinpercent oon 8105 REFERENCE Sets a percentage value that is added to the process reference Applies only when at least three auxiliary constant speed motors are running See parameter 8103 REFERENCE STEP 1 00 100 9 vauenprn AO 8109 START FREQ Sets the frequency limit used to start the first auxiliary motor 1 The first auxiliary motor starts if no auxiliary motors are running drive output frequency exceeds limit 8709 1 Hz output frequency stays above a relaxed limit 8709 1 Hz for at least time 8115 AUX MOT START D After the first auxiliary motor starts output frequency decreases by value 8109 START FREQ 1 8112 LOW FREQ 7 In effect the output of the speed regulated motor drops to compensate for the input from the auxiliary motor See the figure where
9. DI3 EXIT 00 00 Application macros 101 Application macros What this chapter contains The chapter describes the application macros For each macro there is a wiring diagram showing the default control connections digital and analog I O The chapter also explains how to save a user macro and how to recall it Overview of macros Application macros are pre programmed parameter sets While starting up the drive the user typically selects one of the macros the one that is best suited for the purpose with parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO makes the essential changes and saves the result as a user macro The ACS310 has eight standard macros and two user macros The table below contains a summary of the macros and describes suitable applications Macro Suitable applications ABB standard Ordinary speed control applications where no one two or three constant speeds are used Start stop is controlled with one digital input level start and stop It is possible to switch between two acceleration and deceleration times 3 wire Ordinary speed control applications where no one two or three constant speeds are used The drive is started and stopped with push buttons Alternate Speed control applications where no one two or three constant speeds are used Start stop and direction are controlled by two digital inputs combination of the input states determines the operation Motor Speed control applications where no
10. E Diagnostics Actual signal Additional information 0134 RO Control word through fieldbus control 0134 0162 RO 1 status 0173 RO 2 4 status With option MREL 01 only Frequency input Digital input DI5 can be programmed as a frequency input Frequency input 0 16000 Hz can be used as external reference signal source The update time for the frequency input is 50 ms Update time is shorter when information is transferred to the application program 50 ms gt 2 ms E Settings Parameter Additional information Group 18 FREQ IN amp TRAN OUT Frequency input minimum and maximum values and filtering 1103 1106 External reference REF1 2 through frequency input 4010 4110 4210 Frequency input as PID reference source 126 Program features E Diagnostics Actual signal Additional information 0161 Frequency input value Transistor output The drive has one programmable transistor output The output can be used either as digital output or frequency output 0 16000 Hz The update time for the transistor frequency output is 2 ms E Settings Parameter Additional information Group 18 FREQ IN amp TRAN OUT Transistor output settings E Diagnostics Additional information Transistor output status Transistor output frequency Actual signals Several actual signals are available e Drive output frequency current voltage and power e Motor speed and torque e Intermediate circuit DC voltage e Active c
11. Sk1p EXIT 00 00 OK reverse direction direction REM UPAR EDIT 1611 PARAMETER VIEW LONG VIEW 3 an 00 00 SAVE REM PAR EDIT 9914 PHASE INVERSION 1 CANCEL 00 00 SAVE 64 Start up and control with I O After the whole set up is completed check that there are no faults or alarms shown on the display and the panel LED is green and does not blink Start up and control with I O 65 How to control the drive through the l O interface The table below instructs how to operate the drive through the digital and analog inputs when e the motor start up is performed and e the default standard parameter settings are valid Displays of the Basic Control Panel are shown as an example If you need to change the direction of rotation check that parameter 7003 DIRECTION is set to 3 REQUEST Ensure that the control connections are wired See section Default I O according to the connection diagram given for the en diagram on page ABB standard macro Ensure that the drive is in remote control Press key In remote control the panel to switch between remote and local control display shows text REM Start by switching digital input DI1 on Basic Control Panel Text FWD starts flashing fast and stops after the setpoint is reached Assistant Control Panel The arrow starts rotating It is dotted until the setpoint is reached Regulate the drive output frequency motor speed by adju
12. TIMED FUNC 2 Timed function 2 is active See parameter group 36 TIMED 38 FUNCTIONS TIMED FUNC 3 Timed function 3 is active See parameter group 36 TIMED 39 FUNCTIONS TIMED FUNC 4 Timed function 4 is active See parameter group 36 TIMED 40 FUNCTIONS M TRIG FAN Cooling fan running time counter is triggered See parameter group 29 MAINTENANCE TRIG M TRIG REV Revolutions counter is triggered See parameter group 29 MAINTENANCE TRIG M TRIG RUN Run time counter is triggered See parameter group 29 MAINTENANCE TRIG M TRIG MWH MWh counter is triggered See parameter group 29 MAINTENANCE TRIG USER LOAD C Alarm Fault from the user load curve See parameter group 47 37 USER LOAD CURVE START DELAY Start delay is active PIPE FILL Pipe fill Precharge function is active See parameters 53 4421 4426 PROFILE Actual signal 0116 APPL BLK OUTPUT 0132 PID 1 HIGH DEVIATION or 0133 PID 2 DEVIATION has stayed over limit 4479 PROFILE OUTP LIM longer than the time defined by parameter 4420 PROF LIMIT ON DLY See parameters 4418 4420 INLET PROT Pump inlet protection function is active or has caused the 5 drive to trip See parameters 4401 4408 OUTLET PROT Pump outlet protection function is active or has caused the 56 drive to trip See parameters 4409 4416 4 4 4 4 4 34 35 36 1 2 3 4 6 54 5 180 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 1402 R
13. To comply with the European EMC Directive standard IEC EN 61800 3 use the following maximum motor cable lengths for 4 kHz switching frequency All frame Maximum motor cable length 4 kHz sizes m Second environment 30 category C3 First environment category C2 First environment category C1 Second environment 30 at least 2 100 at least category C3 First environment 30 at least 2 100 at least 2 category C2 1 First environment 10 at least 30 at least category C1 1 1 See the terms in section Definitions on page 330 2 Maximum motor cable length is determined by the drive s operational factors Contact your local ABB representative for the exact maximum lengths when using external EMC filters Note The internal EMC filter must be disconnected by removing the EMC screw see the figure on page 46 while using an external EMC filter Note Radiated emissions are according to C2 with and without an external EMC filter Note In multimotor systems the calculated sum of all motor cable lengths must not exceed the maximum motor cable length given in the table Control connection data Analog inputs X1A 2 and 5 Analog output X1A 7 Auxiliary voltage X1A 9 Digital inputs X1A 12 16 frequency input X1A 16 Relay output X1B 17 19 Digital output X1B 20 21 ElA 485 interface X1C 23 26 Efficiency Voltage signal unipolar bipolar Current signal
14. c DIN rail mounting all frame sizes The drive must be installed in an upright position Check the installation site according to the requirements below Refer to chapter Dimension drawings on page 335 for frame details Requirements for the installation site Operation conditions See chapter Technical data on page 317 for the allowed operation conditions of the drive Wall The wall should be as close to vertical and even as possible of non flammable material and strong enough to carry the weight of the drive 30 Mechanical installation Floor The floor material below the installation should be non flammable Free space around the drive The required free space for cooling above and below the drive is 75 mm 3 in No free space is required on the sides of the drive so drives can be mounted immediately next to each other Required tools To install the drive you need the following tools screwdrivers as appropriate for the mounting hardware used wire stripper tape measure drill if the drive will be installed with screws bolts mounting hardware screws or bolts if the drive will be installed with screws bolts For the number of screws bolts see With screws on page 32 Mechanical installation 31 Unpacking The drive 1 is delivered in a package that also contains the following items frame size R2 shown in the figure e plastic bag 2 including clamping plate also used for I O ca
15. maximum values correspond to a speed other than the minimum and maximum speed limits E Settings Additional information Group 11 REFERENCE SELECT External reference source type and scaling Group 20 LIMITS Operating limits Group 22 ACCEL DECEL Speed reference acceleration deceleration ramps Group 32 SUPERVISION E Diagnostics Actual signal Additional information 0111 0112 REF1 REF2 reference Group 03 FB ACTUAL SIGNALS References in different stages of the reference processing chain Program features 121 Reference trimming In reference trimming the external reference is corrected depending on the measured value of a secondary application variable The block diagram below illustrates the function Select 1105 REF1 MAX 1108 REF2 MAX 2 2 DIRECT 1 PROPORTION max freq pai REF Hz rpm 0 NOT SEL REF2 4232 CORRECTION SRC REF 1 Hz rpm REF2 The drive reference before trimming REF The drive reference after trimming max freq par 2008 or 2007 if the absolute value is greater PID2 ref par 4210 PID2 act par 4214 4221 1 REF1 or REF2 depending on which is active See parameter 1102 2 When par 4232 PID2REF the maximum trimming reference is defined by parameter 1105 when REF 1 is active and by parameter 1108 when REF2 is active When par 4232 PID20UTPUT the maximum trimming reference is defined by parameter 2008 value E Settings Ad
16. 0004 SHORT CIRC Short circuit in motor Check motor and motor cable 2340 cable s or motor 0305 bit 3 0006 DC UNDERVOLT Intermediate circuit DC Check that undervoltage controller is 3220 voltage is not sufficient on parameter 2006 UNDERVOLT 0305 bit 5 due to missing input CTRL power line phase Check input power supply and fuses blown fuse rectifier bridge internal fault or too low input power 0007 Al1 LOSS Analog input Al1 signal Check fault function parameter 8110 has fallen below limit settings 0305 bit 6 defined by parameter Check for proper analog control signal 3021 Al1 FAULT programmable fault MIT levels function 3001 3021 Check connections 0008 AI2LOSS Analog input Al2 signal Check fault function parameter 8110 has fallen below limit settings 0305 bit 7 defined by parameter Check for proper analog control signal 3022 Al2 FAULT programmable fault IMIT levels function 3001 3022 Check connections Fault tracing 303 CODE FAULT CAUSE WHAT TO DO 0009 0010 0012 0014 0015 0016 MOT OVERTEMP 4310 0305 bit 8 programmable fault function 3005 3009 3504 PANEL LOSS 5300 0305 bit 9 programmable fault function 3002 MOTOR STALL 7121 0305 bit 11 programmable fault function 3010 3012 EXT FAULT 1 9000 0305 bit 13 programmable fault function 3003 EXT FAULT 2 9001 0305 bit 14 programmable fault functio
17. 5022 Parameter is write Parameter value is read only and cannot be protected changed 5023 Parameter change is not Stop drive and change parameter value allowed when drive is running 5024 Drive is executing task Wait until task is completed 5025 Software is being uploaded Wait until upload download is complete or downloaded 5026 Value is at or below Contact your local ABB representative minimum limit 5027 Value is at or above Contact your local ABB representative maximum limit 5028 Invalid value Contact your local ABB representative 300 Fault tracing ALARM CODE CAUSE WHAT TO DO 5030 Invalid request Contact your local ABB representative 5031 Drive is not ready for Check input power supply operation eg due to low DC voltage 5032 Contact your local ABB representative 5040 Parameter download error Selected parameter setis Perform upload function before download not in current parameter backup file 5041 Parameter backup file Contact your local ABB representative does not fit into memory Parameter download error Selected parameter set is Perform upload function before download not in current parameter backup file 50438 No start inhibit start inhibit E Parameter backup A a that file is compatible with drive restoring error 5050 Parameter upload aborted Retry parameter upload 5051 Contact your local ABB representative E Parameter upload has Retry parameter upload fa
18. External PID reference 2 is not requested from fieldbus Start inhibit from fieldbus No start inhibit from fieldbus Fault tracing 293 Fault tracing What this chapter contains The chapter tells how to reset faults and view fault history It also lists all alarm and fault messages including the possible cause and corrective actions Safety WARNING Only qualified electricians are allowed to maintain the drive Read the safety instructions in chapter Safety on page 15 before you work on the drive Alarm and fault indications Fault is indicated with a red LED See section LEDs on page 315 An alarm or fault message on the panel display indicates abnormal drive status Using the information given in this chapter most alarm and fault causes can be identified and corrected If not contact an ABB representative The four digit code number in parenthesis after the fault is for the fieldbus communication See chapter Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus on page 277 How to reset RESET EXIT The drive can be reset either by pressing the keypad key 7 Basic Control Panel or E Assistant Control Panel through digital input or fieldbus or by switching the supply voltage off for a while The source for the fault reset signal is selected by parameter 1604 FAULT RESET SEL When the fault has been removed the motor can be restarted 294 Fault tracing Fault history When a fault is detected it is stored in
19. What this chapter contains 0 000 eee Checking the installation SUG 166 42i0i ccebide tebe taeda t asst abetead Bide wed soaked Requirements for the installation site 0 0 00 eee Required tools s saci doe a a an ew ald ae a ak wor A oh aaa dale Unpacking 2ce 4G 2500064 PS eo BEDE EMG e ac OEE ee EA KLE DUE SoHE Checking the delivery a an ke arar A ES Rae INSTA 20020 ios ce be oe EO PUES ee ohooh dies Install the drive Fasten clamping plates 2 0 0 0 tee 5 Planning the electrical installation What this chapter contains 0 00 eee 5 6 Table of contents Implementing the AC power line connection o o oooooooooooooroooooo o Selecting the supply disconnecting device disconnecting means o o o o o oo European union 0 000 ce eee eee Other regiON Scene mainaa eia eee Ree Ae eee eet eae e Checking the compatibility of the motor and drive 0 0 0 c eee ee Selecting the power cables 00 eee eet ee Generales e xarsgara Gao id Ons ached aKa a ht AAA AAA SOE Od Oe Alternative power Cable types 000 eee eae Motor cable shield 0 0 00 ccc eee eens Additional US requirements 4s4 sd iu leys edsoesagadsuavagedd ee eie ed se Ue ea we Selecting the control cables 24 5 2 cs 2848s ee rr ave a yee se KOS General MUGS 2444502008400 a Leta he Lene eed IIA Pee A II late E a ot ce ene oerd Gontrol panel cabl
20. Y e bh o Actual signals and parameters 165 All actual signals No Name Value Description Bit 11 MOTOR STALL Bit 12 AUTORESET Bit 13 AUTOCHANGE Bit 14 PFC LOCK Bit 15 Reserved 0309 om WORD A 16 bit data word For the possible causes and remedies and fieldbus equivalents see chapter Fault tracing on page 293 An alarm can be reset by resetting the whole alarm word Write zero to the word 0310 Aone WORD A 16 bit data word For the possible causes and remedies and fieldbus equivalents see chapter Fault tracing on page 293 An alarm can be reset by resetting the whole alarm word Write zero to the word Bit 0 INLET VERY LOW Bit 1 OUTLET VERY HIGH Bit 2 15 Reserved 0401 LAST FAULT Code of the latest fault See chapter Fault tracing on page 293 for the codes 0 Fault history is clear on panel display NO RECORD 0402 FAULT TIME 1 Day on which the latest fault occurred Format Date if the real time clock is operating The number of days elapsed after the power on if the real time clock is not used or was not set 166 Actual signals and parameters All actual signals No Name Value Description F 0403 FAULT TIME 2 Time at which the latest fault occurred Format on the assistant panel Real time hh mm ss if the real time clock is operating Time elapsed after the power on hh mm ss minus the whole days stated by signal 0402 FAULT TIME 1 if real time clock is not u
21. p all currents In altitudes 1000 2000 m 3300 6600 ft above sea level the derating is 1 for every 100 m 330 ft 320 Technical data Switching frequency derating lzy and p all currents Derate according to the switching frequency used see parameter 2606 SWITCHING FREQ as follows Switching Drive voltage rating IE Uy 200 240 V Uy 380 480 V 4 kHz No derating No derating AE Derate lvy and p to 90 Derate Iy and lp to 75 for RO or to 80 for R1 R4 Derate 2y and p to 80 Derate 7y and p to 50 for RO or to 65 for R1 R4 and derate maximum ambient temperature to 30 C 86 F Derate 2y and p to 75 Derate 7y and p to 50 and derate maximum ambient temperature to 30 C 86 F Technical data 321 Power cable sizes and fuses Cable dimensioning for rated currents y is shown in the table below together with the corresponding fuse types for short circuit protection of the input power cable The rated fuse currents given in the table are the maximums for the mentioned fuse types If smaller fuse ratings are used check that the fuse rms current rating is larger than the rated l4y current given in section Ratings on page 378 If 150 output power is needed multiply current 44y by 1 5 See also section Selecting the power cables on page 36 Check that the operating time of the fuse is below 0 5 seconds The operating time depends on the fuse type the supply network i
22. 10 C 4001 1 NOT SEL Integration time If parameter value is set to zero integration 1 0 1s 3600 0 s l part of the PID controller is disabled Actual signals and parameters 223 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 4003 DERIVATION _ Defines the derivation time for the process PID controller 0 0s TIME Derivative action boosts the controller output if the error value changes The longer the derivation time the more the speed controller output is boosted during the change If the derivation time is set to zero the controller works as a Pl controller otherwise as a PID controller The derivation makes the control more responsive for disturbances The derivative is filtered with a 1 pole filter Filter time constant is defined by parameter 4004 PID DERIV FILTER Error Process error value 100 A t PID output D part of controller output 0 0 10 0s Derivation time If parameter value is set to zero the 0 1s derivative part of the PID controller is disabled 4004 PID DERIV Defines the filter time constant for the derivative part of the FILTER process PID controller Increasing the filter time smooths the derivative and reduces noise 4005 ERROR Selects the relationship between the feedback signal and N VALUE INV drive speed Normal A decrease in feedback signal increases drive speed Error Reference Feedback Inverted A decrease in feedback signal decreases drive speed
23. A 8109 START FREQ 1 8112 LOW FREQ 1 B Output frequency increase during the start delay C Diagram showing auxiliary motor s run status as frequency increases 1 On Note 8109 START FREQ 1 value must be between 8112 LOW FREQ 17 and 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ 1 f Hz MAX 8109 1 8109 8112 00 500 062 Frequeney O 252 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 8110 START FREQ Sets the frequency limit used to start the second auxiliary E 50 0 Hz motor See 8109 START FREQ 1 for a complete description U 60 0 Hz of the operation The second auxiliary motor starts if one auxiliary motor is running drive output frequency exceeds limit 8110 1 Hz output frequency stays above the relaxed limit 8110 1 Hz for at least time 8115 AUX MOT START D 00 5000H2 Frequenoy O 8111 START FREQ Sets the frequency limit used to start the third auxiliary 3 motor See 8109 START FREQ 1 for a complete description U 60 0 Hz of the operation The third auxiliary motor starts if e two auxiliary motors are running drive output frequency exceeds limit 8111 1 Hz output frequency stays above the relaxed limit 8111 1 Hz for at least time 8115 AUX MOT START D 00 500 Hz Frequeney OA 8112 LOW FREQ 1 Sets the frequency limit used to stop the first auxiliary motor E 25 0 Hz The first auxiliary motor stops if U 30 0 Hz only one th
24. Contact your local ABB representative Contact your local ABB representative Check input power line fuses Check for input power supply imbalance Check fault function parameters Check minimum maximum frequency settings Check adequacy of motor braking torque Contact your local ABB representative Contact your local ABB representative Check status of fieldbus communication See chapter Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus on page 271 Check fault function parameter settings Check connections Check if master can communicate Contact your local ABB representative See appropriate communication module manual Fault tracing 305 CODE FAULT CAUSE WHAT TO DO 0031 0032 0033 0035 0036 SW 0038 0039 0040 0041 0042 EFB 1 FF92 0307 bit O EFB 2 FF93 0307 bit 1 EFB 3 FF94 0307 bit 2 OUTP WIRING FF95 0306 bit 15 programmable fault function 3023 INCOMPATIBLE 630F 0307 bit 3 USER LOAD CURVE FF6B 0307 bit 4 UNKNOWN EXTENSION 7086 0307 bit 5 INLET VERY LOW 8A81 0307 bit 6 OUTLET VERY HIGH 8A83 0307 bit 7 INLET LOW 8A80 0307 bit 8 Error from the embedded fieldbus EFB protocol application The meaning is protocol dependent Incorrect input power and motor cable connection ie input power cable is connected to drive motor connection The fault can be erroneously declared if the drive is faulty
25. O stop along the emergency stop 1 ramp See parameter 2208 EMERG DEC TIME 1 emergency stop command reset DI2 INV See selection D 1 INV DI3 INV See selection D 1 INV DI4 INV See selection D 1 INV DI5 INV See selection D 1 INV 2110 TORQ BOOST Defines the maximum supplied current during torque boost 100 CURR See parameter 2101 START FUNCTION 15 300 Value in percent 1 1 192 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 2112 ZERO SPEED Defines the delay for the Zero speed delay function The function is useful in applications where a smooth and quick restarting is essential During the delay the drive knows accurately the rotor position No Zero speed delay With Zero speed delay Speed Speed Speed controller Speed controller switched off Motor remains live Motor is coasts to stop decelerated to true O Zero speed t No Zero speed delay The drive receives a stop command and decelerates along a ramp When the motor actual speed falls below an internal limit called Zero speed the speed controller is switched off The inverter modulation is stopped and the motor coasts to standstill With Zero speed delay The drive receives a stop command and decelerates along a ramp When the actual motor speed falls below an internal limit called Zero speed the zero speed delay function activates During the delay the functions keeps the speed controller live The inver
26. Relay controlled signals providing their voltage does not exceed 48 V can be run in the same cables as digital input signals It is recommended that the relay controlled signals are run as twisted pairs Never mix 24 V DC and 115 230 V AC signals in the same cable E Relay cable The cable type with braided metallic screen for example OLFLEX by LAPPKABEL has been tested and approved by ABB E Control panel cable In remote use the cable connecting the control panel to the drive must not exceed 3 m 10 ft The cable type tested and approved by ABB is used in control panel option kits Routing the cables Route the motor cable away from other cable routes Motor cables of several drives can be run in parallel installed next to each other It is recommended that the motor cable input power cable and control cables are installed on separate trays Avoid long parallel runs of motor cables with other cables to decrease electromagnetic interference caused by the rapid changes in the drive output voltage Where control cables must cross power cables make sure that they are arranged at an angle as near to 90 degrees as possible The cable trays must have good electrical bonding to each other and to the grounding electrodes Aluminium tray systems can be used to improve local equalizing of potential 40 Planning the electrical installation A diagram of the cable routing is shown below Motor cable Drive Powe
27. See parameter group 12 CONSTANT 2 0 ramp times according to parameters SPEEDS 2202 and 2203 DI3 DI4 Operation parameter 1 ramp times according to parameters lO O Setspeed through Al1 2205 and 2206 O peec 1 705 3 360 degree grounding under a clamp o 1 peed 2 1203 g l Tightening torque 0 4 N m 3 5 Ibf in Speed 3 1204 CA Digital output max 100 mA y No fault Fault 1 E Connection procedure 1 Remove the terminal cover by simultaneously pushing the recess and sliding the cover off the frame Digital signals Strip the outer insulation of the digital signal cable 360 degrees and ground the bare shield under the clamp Connect the conductors of the cable to the appropriate terminals Use a tightening torque of 0 4 N m 3 5 Ibf in For double shielded cables twist also the grounding conductors of each pair in Electrical installation 53 the cable together and connect the bundle to the SCR terminal terminal 1 Oooo 23 24 25 26 4 AAA A 122 3 4 5 6 7 8 17 18 19 3 Io 101112 TSS 16 20 21 22 No O V2 W2 R 5 Analog signals Strip the outer insulation of the analog signal cable 360 degrees and ground the bare shield under the clamp 6 Connect the conductors to the appropriate terminals Use a tightening torque of 0 4 N m 3 5 Ibf in 7 Twist t
28. Select the application macro according to which the control cables are connected Continue with the application set up After completing a set up task the Start up assistant suggests the next one e Press when is highlighted to continue with the suggested task Press key lt y gt to highlight and then press SI to move to the following task without doing the suggested task EXIT Press 7 to stop the Start up assistant Check the direction of the motor rotation EXIT If you are not in the Output mode press 7 repeatedly until you get there Increase the frequency reference from zero to a small value with key 45 Press to start the motor Check that the actual direction of the motor is the same as indicated on the display means forward and J reverse Press to stop the motor To change the direction of the motor rotation If parameter 9914 PHASE INVERSION is not visible first set parameter 1611 PARAMETER VIEW to 3 LONG VIEW e Invert the phases by changing the value of parameter 9974 to the opposite ie from 0 NO to 1 YES or vice versa e Verify your work by applying input power and repeating the check as described above e Set parameter 1611 back to 2 SHORT VIEW Ifthe drive is in remote control REM shown on the status line switch to local control by pressing 2 REM UPAR EDIT 9902 APPLIC MACRO ABB STANDARD 1 CEL 00 00 SAVE REM CHOICE EXT1 reference aman
29. different motors is required Application macros 103 Summary of the I O connections of the application macros The following table gives the summary of the default I O connections of all application macros Input output ABB Alternate Motor Hand Auto PID standard potentiom control Al Freq ref Freq ref Freq ref Freq ref ref ref 0 10 V Hand Ext ref 2 PID PFC Al2 Freq ref o Process 2 20 mA Auto value value Output Output Output Output Output Output Output freq freq freq freq freq freq freq Stop Start Start Start fwd Stop Start Stop Start Stop Start Stop Start pulse Hand Hand Hand Fwd Rev eae Start rev Fwd Rev Fwd Rev Hand PID Hand pulse Hand PID PFC Const Fwd Rev Const Freq ref Hand Auto Const Interlock speed up speed 1 input 1 Ramp pair Const Ramp pair Const Stop Start rib art PPG selection speed selection speed 1 Auto PID PID PFC oe ore ae Fault 1 Fault 1 eh a Const Const Freq ref Fwd Rev Run Interlock speed speed speed down Auto enable input 2 input 1 input 2 104 Application macros ABB standard macro This is the default macro It provides a general purpose I O configuration with three constant speeds Parameter values are the default values given in section A parameters on page 167 If you use other than the default connections presented below see section O terminals on page 49 E Def
30. including up to two user sets to the Assistant Control Panel The full set partial parameter set application and user sets can then be downloaded from the control panel to another drive or the same drive Uploading and downloading can be performed in local control The control panel memory is non volatile and does not depend on the panel battery In the Parameter backup mode you can Copy all parameters from the drive to the control panel UPLOAD TO PANEL This includes all defined user sets of parameters and internal not adjustable by the user parameters View the information about the backup stored to the control panel with UPLOAD TO PANEL BACKUP INFO This includes eg the type and rating of the drive where the backup was made It is useful to check this information when you are going to copy the parameters to another drive with DOWNLOAD FULL SET to ensure that the drives match Restore the full parameter set from the control panel to the drive DOWNLOAD FULL SET This writes all parameters including the internal non user adjustable motor parameters to the drive It does not include the user sets of parameters Note Only use this function to restore a drive from a backup or to transfer parameters to systems that are identical to the original system Copy a partial parameter set part of the full set from the control panel to a drive DOWNLOAD APPLICATION The partial set does not include user sets internal motor parameter
31. lt 1 y i 1 1 1 Reverse i 4607 4605 4604 4606 4604 4605 4604 1 Trigger Forward Off Reverse Off Forward Off time time time time time time time Number of steps The pump cleaning cycle can be activated at start up with a user defined period with a selectable digital input or by the Supervision function for example triggered by the motor input current E Settings Additional information Group 46 PUMP CLEANING Pump cleaning settings 2205 2206 Acceleration time 2 Deceleration time 2 Program features 149 Load analyzer The load analyzer can be used for analyzing the customer s process and sizing the drive and the motor Mi Peak value logger The user can select a signal group 07 OPERATING DATA to be monitored by the peak value logger PVL The signal is sampled at 2 ms intervals when the drive is running The logger records the peak maximum value of the signal along with the time the peak occurred as well as output current DC voltage and output frequency at the time of the peak E Amplitude loggers The drive has two amplitude loggers For amplitude logger 2 AL2 the user can select a signal group 07 OPERATING DATA to be sampled at 200 ms intervals when the drive is running and specify a value that corresponds to 100 The collected samples are sorted into 10 read only parameters according to their amplitude Each parameter represents an amplitu
32. network which supplies domestic premises Radio frequency interference is expected if the drive is used on such a network Note It is not allowed to install a drive with the internal EMC filter connected on IT ungrounded systems The supply network becomes connected to ground potential through the EMC filter capacitors which may cause danger or damage the drive 332 Technical data Note It is not allowed to install a drive with the internal EMC filter connected on a corner grounded TN system as this would damage the drive UL marking See the type designation label for the valid markings of your drive The UL mark is attached to the drive to verify that it meets UL requirements E UL checklist Input power connection See section Electric power network specification on page 325 Disconnecting device disconnecting means See Selecting the supply disconnecting device disconnecting means on page 35 Ambient conditions The drives are to be used in a heated indoor controlled environment See section Ambient conditions on page 328 for specific limits Input cable fuses For installation in the United States branch circuit protection must be provided in accordance with the National Electrical Code NEC and any applicable local codes To fulfil this requirement use the UL classified fuses given in section Power cable sizes and fuses on page 321 For installation in Canada branch circuit protection must be provided
33. process PID set 2 group 47 PROCESS PID SET 2 is used 0 0 1800 0s Acceleration time 4033 PID REF DEC Defines the time for the reference PID setpoint decrease 0 0 s TIME from 100 to 0 0 0 1800 0s Deceleration time 4034 PID REF Freezes the input reference PID setpoint of the process NOT SEL FREEZE PID controller This feature is useful when the reference is based on a process actual value connected to an analog input and the sensor must be serviced without stopping the process The input of the PI controller is frozen as long as the selected digital input is ON for parameter values D 7 D 5 or OFF for parameter values D 1 INV DI5 INV See also parameter 4035 NOT SEL Not selected i ee Reference is frozen on the rising edge of digital input DI1 232 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq DI5 INV See selection D 1 INV 4035 PID OUT Freezes the output of the process PID controller This NOT SEL FREEZE feature is useful when the reference is based on a process actual value connected to an analog input and the sensor must be serviced without stopping the process The output of the Pl controller is frozen as long as the selected digital input is ON for parameter values D 7 D 5 or OFF for parameter values D 1 INV DI5 INV See also parameter 4034 OF SEL Notselsted O 4036 INTERNAL Selects a constant value as the process PID controller SETPN
34. voltage A IR compensated B No compensation 0 0 100 0W Voltage boost 1 0 1V 2604 IR COMP Defines the frequency at which the IR compensation is 0 V 80 FREQ See the figure for parameter 2603 IR COMP VOLT Note If parameter 2605 U F RATIO is set to USER DEFINED this parameter is not active The IR compensation frequency is set by parameter 2670 USER DEFINED U1 0 100 Value in percent of the motor frequency Actual signals and parameters 197 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 2605 U F RATIO Selects the voltage to frequency U f ratio below the field SQUARE weakening point LINEAR Linear ratio for constant torque applications D SQUARED Squared ratio for centrifugal pump and fan applications 2 With squared U f ratio the noise level is lower for most operating frequencies USER Custom ratio defined by parameters 2610 2618 See 3 DEFINED section Custom U f ratio on page 130 4 kHz 2606 SWITCHING Defines the switching frequency of the drive Higher FREQ switching frequency results in lower acoustic noise See also parameter 2607 SWITCH FREQ CTRL and section Switching frequency derating 12N and ILD all currents on page 320 In multimotor systems do not change the switching frequency from the default value 1 1 kHz 2607 SWITCHFREQ Activates the switching frequency control When active the ON selection of parameter 2606 SWITCHING FREQ is limited when the drive internal temperature incr
35. ype SPEED dependent 9909 MOTOR NOM Defines the nominal motor power PN POWER 160 Actual signals and parameters All actual signals All actual signals No Name Value Description FbEq 101 SPEED 8 DIR Calculated motor speed in rpm A negative value indicates 1 1 rpm reverse direction 0102 SPEED Calculated motor speed in rpm 1 1 rpm 0103 OUTPUT Calculated drive output frequency in Hz Shown by default 1 0 1 Hz FREQ on the panel Output mode display 0104 CURRENT Measured motor current in A Shown by default on the 0 1A panel Output mode display 0105 TORQUE Calculated motor torque in percent of the motor nominal 1 0 1 torque 0106 POWER Measured motor power in kW 0107 DC BUS Measured intermediate circuit voltage in V DC VOLTAGE 0109 OUTPUT Calculated motor voltage in V AC VOLTAGE 0110 DRIVE TEMP Measured IGBT temperature in C 0111 EXTERNAL External reference REF1 in Hz 1 REF 1 0112 EXTERNAL External reference REF2 in percent Depending on the use 1 0 1 REF 2 100 equals the maximum motor speed nominal motor torque or maximum process reference 0113 CTRL Active control location 0 LOCAL 1 EXT1 2 EXT2 See 1 1 LOCATION section Local control vs external control on page 117 0114 RUN TIME R Elapsed drive running time counter hours Runs when the 1 1h drive is modulating The counter can be reset by pressing the UP and DOWN keys simultaneously when the control panel is in the Parameter
36. 0 4012 4013 PID set1 or 10000 par 1108 4112 4113 PID set2 10000 corresponds to 100 Note The settings of parameters 1104 REF1 MIN and 1107 REF2 MIN have no effect on the reference scaling 280 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus Mi Reference handling The control of rotation direction is configured for each control location EXT1 and EXT2 using the parameters in group 10 START STOP DIR Fieldbus references are bipolar ie they can be negative or positive The following diagrams illustrate how group 10 parameters and the sign of the fieldbus reference interact to produce the reference REF1 REF2 Direction determined by Direction determined by digital the sign of COMM command eg digital input control panel Par 1003 Resultant Resultant DIRECTION REF 1 2 REF 1 2 FORWARD Max ref Max ref Fieldbus Fieldbus Ref 1 2 ra Ref 1 2 163 163 Max ref Max ref Par 1003 Resultant Resultant DIRECTION REF 1 2 REF 1 2 REVERSE Max Ref Max Ref 163 163 Fieldbus 100 Fieldbus 100 ref 1 2 ref 1 2 Max Ref Max Ref Resultant Resultant REF1 2 REF1 2 Direction Command Max ref Max ref PARO Fieldbus 100 Fieldbus ref 1 2 0 ref 1 2 163 Max ref Direction Command REVERSE E Actual value scaling The scaling of the integers sent to the master as Actual values depends on the selected function See chapter Actual signals
37. 1 Time period 2 3606 START TIME 2 3607 STOP TIME 2 Timed function 1 3608 START DAY 2 3609 STOP DAY 2 3626 TIMED FUNC 1 SRC Timed function 2 Time perioda 3627 TIMED FUNC 2 SRC 3610 START TIME 3 S 3611 STOP TIME 3 3612 START DAY 3 Timed function 3 3613 STOP DAY 3 3628 TIMED FUNC 3 SRC Time period 4 Timed function 4 3614 START TIME 4 3629 TIMED FUNC 4 SRC 3615 STOP TIME 4 3616 START DAY 4 3617 STOP DAY 4 Booster 3622 BOOSTER SEL 3623 BOOSTER TIME 144 Program features A parameter which is triggered by a timed function can be connected to only one timed function at a time 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS 3626 TIMED FUNC 1 SRC 1102 EXT1 EXT2 SEL Timed function 2 1201 CONST SPEED SEL 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2 1403 RELAY OUTPUT 3 1410 RELAY OUTPUT 4 with option MREL 01 only 1805 DO SIGNAL 4027 PID 1 PARAM SET 4039 INT SETPNT SEL 4139 INT SETPNT SEL 4228 ACTIVATE 8126 TIMED AUTOCHNG You can use the Timed functions assistant for easy configuring For more information on the assistants see section Assistants mode on 91 E Examples Air conditioning is active on weekdays from 8 00 to 15 30 8 a m to 3 30 p m and on Sundays from 12 00 to 15 00 12 to 3 p m By pressing the extension time switch the air conditioning is on for an extra hour Parameter Setting If timed function is enabled in continuous mode the start date can be different from th
38. 1 6 4 8 8 11 2 14 4 Upc Intermediate circuit voltage of the drive fout Output frequency of the drive Tw Motor torque Loss of supply voltage at nominal load fout 40 Hz The intermediate circuit DC voltage drops to the minimum limit The controller keeps the voltage steady as long as the input power is switched off The drive runs the motor in generator mode The motor speed falls but the drive is operational as long as the motor has enough kinetic energy E Settings Parameter 2006 UNDERVOLT CTRL 128 Program features DC magnetizing When DC magnetizing is activated the drive automatically magnetizes the motor before starting This feature guarantees the highest possible break away torque up to 180 of the motor nominal torque The Automatic start feature and DC magnetizing cannot be activated at the same time E Settings Parameters 2101 START FUNCTION and 2103 DC MAGN TIME Maintenance trigger A maintenance trigger can be activated to show a notice on the panel display when eg drive power consumption has exceeded the defined trigger point E Settings Parameter group 29 MAINTENANCE TRIG Acceleration and deceleration ramps Two user selectable acceleration and Motor speed deceleration ramps are available It is possible to Linea adjust the acceleration deceleration times and Se the ramp shape Switching between the two ramps can be controlled through a digital input or fieldbus The available ramp shape alterna
39. 2 parameter 3412 OUTPUT2 UNIT Signal 3 parameter 3419 OUTPUT3 UNIT Select the units to be displayed for the signals This 3 PAR FWD Select the scalings for the signals by specifying the minimum and maximum display values This has no Q 0 HZ effect if parameter 3404 3411 3418 is set to 9 DIRECT For details see parameters 3406 and PAR FWD 3407 Signal 1 parameters 3406 OUTPUT1 MIN and 3407 5 0 0 0 ds OUTPUT1 MAX PAR FWD Signal 2 parameters 3413 OUTPUT2 MIN and 3414 OUTPUT2 MAX Signal 3 parameters 3420 OUTPUT3 MIN and 3421 OUTPUT3 MAX 78 Control panels E Copy mode The Basic Control Panel can store a full set of drive parameters and up to two user sets of drive parameters to the control panel The control panel memory is non volatile In the Copy mode you can do the following Copy all parameters from the drive to the control panel uL Upload This includes all defined user sets of parameters and internal not adjustable by the user parameters Restore the full parameter set from the control panel to the drive dL A Download all This writes all parameters including the internal non user adjustable motor parameters to the drive It does not include the user sets of parameters Note Only use this function to restore a drive or to transfer parameters to systems that are identical to the original system Copy a partial parameter set from the control panel to a drive dL P Download pa
40. 2 is defined by parameters 4101 4126 SET 1 PID SET 1 is active Digital input DI1 1 PID SET 2 0 PID SET 1 TIMED FUNC 1 Timed PID SET 1 2 control Timed function 1 inactive PID SET 1 timed function 1 active PID SET 2 See parameter group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS TIMED FUNC 2 See selection TIMED FUNC 1 TIMED FUNC 3 See selection TIMED FUNC 1 TIMED FUNC 4 See selection TIMED FUNC 1 DI1 INV Inverted digital input DI1 O PID SET 2 1 PID SET 1 N a amp ow rm gt v gt o m ol Y O a Mm e O C oa See selection DTW i oey See selection DN DIN See selection ory C oeny See selection DN SSCS if Actual signals and parameters 231 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 4028 PID OUT MIN Defines the minimum value of PID output 100 0 5000 500 0 4030 SLEEP BOOST Defines the boost time for the sleep boost step See 0 0s parameter 4031 SLEEP BOOST STEP Reference 4030 SLEEP 4031 SLEEP BOOST TIME BOOST STEP t 0 0 3600 0 s Sleep boost time 4031 SLEEP BOOST When the drive is entering sleep mode the reference PID 0 0 STE setpoint is increased by this percentage for the time 0 defined by parameter 4030 SLEEP BOOST TIME 0 0 100 0 Sleep boost step 1 0 1 4032 PID REF ACC Defines the time for the reference PID setpoint increase 0 0 s from 0 to 100 Note Parameters 4032 4036 are active even if the 1 0 1 0 1
41. 9802 COMM PROT SEL to STD MODBUS The communication parameters in group 53 EFB PROTOCOL must also be adjusted See the table below Parameter Alternative Setting for Function Information settings fieldbus control COMMUNICATION INITIALISATION 9802 COMM PROT NOT SEL STD MODBUS Initializes embedded fieldbus SEL STD MODBUS _ with ElA 485 communication ADAPTER MODULE CONFIGURATION 5302 EFB STATION 0 65535 Any Defines the station ID address of the EIA 485 link No two stations on line may have the same address 5304 EFB PARITY 8 NONE 1 8 NONE 2 8 EVEN 1 8 ODD 1 5305 EFB CTRL ABB DRV LIM Selects the communication PROFILE DCU PROFILE profile used by the drive See section Communication a PUEL profiles on page 284 5310 EFB PAR 10 0 65535 Any Selects an actual value to be ae cs mapped to Modbus register 5317 EFB PAR 17 400xx After the configuration parameters in group 53 EFB PROTOCOL have been set the Drive control parameters on page 274 must be checked and adjusted when necessary Selects the parity setting The same settings must be used in all on line stations 5303 EFB BAUD 1 2 kbit s Defines the communication RATE 2 4 kbit s speed of the ElA 485 link 4 8 kbit s 9 6 kbit s 19 2 kbit s 38 4 kbit s 57 6 kbit s 76 8 kbit s The new settings will take effect when the drive is next powered up or when parameter 5302 EFB STATION ID setting is cleared and reset 274 Fieldbus control with embedded fi
42. ACTUAL SIGNALS j 04 FAULT HISTORY 10 START STOP DIR 11 REFERENCE SELECT EXIT 00 00 SEL Select the appropriate parameter group with keys AS LOC UPAR GROUPS 99 and Cv 01 OPERATING DATA 03 FB ACTUAL SIGNALS 04 FAULT HISTORY 10 START STOP DIR EXIT 00 00 SEL LOC U PARAMETERS oJoTO APPLIC MACRO 9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT 9906 MOTOR NOM_CURR EXIT 00 00 EDIT Select the appropriate parameter with keys lt A gt and LOC PARAMETERS UY The current value of the parameter is shown 9901 LANGUAGE 9902 APPLIC MACRO below the selected parameter 9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR EXIT 00 00 EDIT EDIT Press 7 LOC UPAR EDIT 9902 APPLIC MACRO ABB STANDARD 1 ar 00 00 SAVE Specify a new value for the parameter with keys aS LOC OPAR EDIT and Cw e Pressing the key once increments or decrements the APPLIC MACRO value Holding the key down changes the value faster 3 WIRE 2 Pressing the keys simultaneously replaces the displayed value with the default value CANCEL 00 00 SAVE AVE To save the new value press wir Jo cancel the new value and keep the original press EZ You can select which signals are monitored in the Output mode and how they are displayed with group 34 PANEL DISPLAY parameters See page 88 for detailed instructions on changing parameter values By default the display shows three signals Signal 1 0103 OUTPUT FREQ Signal 2 0104 CURRENT Sig
43. DO max 200 mA 10 GND Auxiliary voltage output common X1B 17 ROCOM Relay output 1 a RONC EY No fault Fault 1 Se ee Digital output max 100 mA a OSes y No fault Fault 1 E d 1 If DI3 and DI4 are both active or inactive the 2 360 degree grounding under a clamp output frequency reference is unchanged Tightening torque 0 4 N m 3 5 Ibf in The existing output frequency reference is stored during stop and power down 108 Application macros Hand Auto macro This macro can be used when switching between two external control devices is needed To enable the macro set the value of parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO to 5 HAND AUTO For the parameter default values see section Default values with different macros on page 157 If you use other than the default connections presented below see section I O terminals on page 49 Note Parameter 2108 START INHIBIT must remain in the default setting O OFF E Default I O connections X1A ro 1 sor Signal cable shield screen aad 1 torna 11 3 GND Analog input crouit common oe Dee A2 Output frequency reference Auto 0 20 mA7 _ max 500 ohm ee Analog input circuit common OPT S A OO 8 GND Analog output circuit common Ms ES AAN 10 6ND Auxiliary voltage outputcommon m DCOM Digital input common mjn Stop 0 Start 1 Hand X1B 17 ROCOM Relay output 1 g A No fault Fault 1
44. Hand 0 10 V gt output freq reference 3 The signal source must be powered PID 0 10 V gt 0 100 PID setpoint externally See the manufacturer s 2 360 degree grounding under a clamp instructions An example of a connection using a two wire sensor is given on page 57 Tightening torque 0 4 N m 3 5 Ibf in 110 Application macros PFC control macro This macro provides parameter settings for pump and fan control PFC applications To enable the macro set the value of parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO to 7 PFC CONTROL For the parameter default values see section Default values with different macros on page 157 If you use other than the default connections presented below see section I O terminals on page 49 Note Parameter 2108 START INHIBIT must remain in the default setting 0 OFF E Default I O connections X1A i SOR Signal cable sie Gereen 7 a 1 toro 11 3 GND Analog input circuit common Deptt ts a2 Process actual value 4 20mA7 f eno analog input ereuteommen D 7 a0 Output frequency value 0 20mA Lt sta end Analog output circuit common 3 rea Anta voto ouput 24 V DO mar 200 mA 10 6ND Auxiliary voltage output common gt 11 COM Digital input common 12 DH Stop 0 Start 1 Hand X1B 17 ROCOM Relay output 1 g A PFC O a O 22 poGND 1 Hand 0 10 V gt 0 50 Hz 3 The signal source must be powered PID PFC 0 10 V gt 0 1
45. Hz A ar 2502 18 Hz 2 Par 2503 23 Hz 3 Par 2504 46 Hz 4 Par 2505 52 Hz freference HZ oN pe O 2502 CRIT SPEED 1 Defines the minimum limit for critical output frequency range 0 0 Hz LO H gt 1 0 0 500 0 Hz Limit in Hz The value cannot be above the maximum 0 1 Hz parameter 2503 CRIT SPEED 1 HI 2503 CRIT SPEED 1 Defines the maximum limit for critical output frequency 0 0 Hz range 1 0 0 500 0 Hz Limit in Hz The value cannot be below the minimum 1 parameter 2502 CRIT SPEED 1 LO o LL N 196 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 2504 CRIT SPEED 2 See parameter 2502 CRIT SPEED 1 LO 0 0 Hz LO 0 0 500 0 Hz See parameter 2502 1 2505 CRIT SPEED 2 See parameter 2503 CRIT SPEED 1 HI HI 0 0 500 0 Hz See parameter 2503 1 2506 CRIT SPEED 3 See parameter 2502 CRIT SPEED 1 LO LO 0 0 500 0 Hz See parameter 2502 1 2507 CRIT SPEED 3 See parameter 2503 CRIT SPEED 1 HI HI 0 0 500 0 Hz See parameter 2503 2603 IR COMP Defines the output voltage boost at zero speed IR VOLT compensation The function is useful in applications with dependent high break away torque when vector control cannot be applied To prevent overheating set IR compensation voltage as low as possible The figure below illustrates the IR compensation Typical IR compensation values 200 240 V units 380 480 V units Motor
46. INTERV gt 0 Parameter Parameter setting Relay assignment nee 8 Ios al enabled 4 1 0 1 ina beat EEES PFC PEC PFO KY X X No auxiliary motors but the autochange function is in use Working as a standard PID control Def FbEq Actual signals and parameters 257 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 8118 AUTOCHNG _ Controls operation of the Autochange function and sets the 0 0 NO INTERV interval between changes T SEL The Autochange time interval only applies to the time when the speed regulated motor is running See parameter 8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL for an overview of the Autochange function The drive always coasts to stop when autochange is performed Autochange enabled requires parameter 8120 INTERLOCKS gt 0 WARNING When enabled the Autochange function requires the interlocks 8120 INTERLOCKS gt 0 enabled During autochange the power output is interrupted and the drive coasts to stop preventing damage to the contacts PFC with Autochange mode 0 1 TEST 0 1 Test mode Forces the interval to value 36 48 s MODE 0 0 Disables the Autochange function 0 0 NOT SEL 0 1 336 h The operating time interval the time when the 0 1 336 0h start signal is on between automatic motor changes 258 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value 8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL Description Def FbEq Sets an upper limit as a percent of output capaci
47. In applications where a full break away torque is essential always ensure that the constant magnetizing time is long enough to allow generation of full magnetization and torque CAN START Frequency scanning flying start starting the drive connected to a rotating motor Based on frequency scanning interval 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ 2007 MINIMUM FREQ to identify the frequency If frequency identification fails DC magnetization is used see selection DC MAGN SCAN Combines scanning start starting the drive connected toa 7 BOOST rotating motor and torque boost See selections SCAN START and TORQ BOOST If frequency identification fails torque boost is used 2102 STOP Selects the motor stop function FUNCTION COAST Stop by cutting off the motor power supply The motor 1 coasts to stop RAMP Stop along a ramp See parameter group 22 2 ACCEL DECEL 2103 DC MAGN Defines the pre magnetizing time See parameter 2101 0 30 s TIME START FUNCTION After the start command the drive automatically pre magnetizes the motor for the defined time 0 00 10 00s Magnetizing time Set this value long enough to allow full 1 0 01s motor magnetization Too long a time heats the motor excessively 2106 DC CURR REF Defines the DC brake current If parameter 2707 DC 30 BRAKE TIME is not zero the DC brake current is injected to the motor during the stop If parameter 2102 STOP FUNCTION is set to COAST DC braking is applied after the start command is r
48. MIN 1107 REF2 MIN 278 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus Setting When COMM gt 0 When COMM lt 0 COM COMM Al 50 MAX MIN COMM Al 50 MAX MIN M Al1 MIN MIN Corrected reference Hz COMM Max limit REF 100 50 0 e Min limit 0 9 Al 50 oe Max limit REF Corrected reference Hz Corrected reference Hz COMM REF 100 50 0 Max limit Min limit Min limit Max limit 0 COMM 0 50 100 REF Corrected reference Hz Maximum limit is defined by parameter 1105 REF1 MAX 1108 REF2 MAX Minimum limit is defined by parameter 1104 REF1 MIN 1107 REF2 MIN Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 279 E Fieldbus reference scaling Fieldbus references REF1 and REF2 are scaled as shown in the following table Note Any correction of the reference see section Reference selection and correction on page 279 is applied before scaling Reference Range Reference type 32767 Frequency a par 1105 Final reference limited by 0 1104 1105 Actual motor 720000 par 1105 speed limited by 20000 corresponds to 100 2007 2008 32767 Frequency 10000 par 1108 Final reference limited by pit 0 0 1107 1108 Actual motor 10000 par 1108 speed limited by 10000 corresponds to 100 2007 2008 PID 10000 par 1108 Final reference limited by reference 0
49. MOTOR TEMP Alarm Fault by motor overtemperature protection function 2 See parameter 3005 MOT THERM PROT STALL Alarm Fault by stall protection function See parameter 3010 28 STALL FUNCTION PID SLEEP PID sleep function See parameter group 40 PROCESS PID 30 SET 1 41 PROCESS PID SET 2 PFC Start stop motor in PFC control See parameter group 87 PFC CONTROL Use this option only when PFC control is used Selection activated deactivated when the drive is not running AUTOCHANG PFC autochange operation is performed Use this option 32 E only when PFC control is used FLUX READY Motor is magnetized and able to supply nominal torque OVERCURRE Alarm Fault by overcurrent protection function NT OVERVOLTAG Alarm Fault by overvoltage protection function A alu x a peen R TI o m Lo 10 11 12 13 15 6 7 8 9 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 7 FAULT RST Fault Automatic reset after the autoreset delay See parameter group 31 AUTOMATIC RESET oO _ Actual signals and parameters 179 All parameters No Name Value Description 2 COMM Fieldbus control signal 0134 COMM RO WORD 0 de energize output 1 energize output 0000000 A COMM 1 Fieldbus control signal 0134 COMM RO WORD 0 de energize output 1 energize output 0134 value Binary DO o 000000 1 2 owo o o 000011 TIMED FUNC 1 Timed function 1 is active See parameter group 36 TIMED 37 FUNCTIONS
50. No Name Value Description Def FbEq 1201 CONST Activates the constant speeds drive output frequencies or D 3 4 SPEED SEL selects the activation signal NOT SEL No constant speed in use Oo DI1 Speed defined by parameter 1202 CONST SPEED 1 is 1 activated through digital input DI1 1 active O inactive DI2 Speed defined by parameter 1202 CONST SPEED 1 is 2 activated through digital input DI2 1 active 0 inactive DI3 Speed defined by parameter 1202 CONST SPEED 1 is 3 activated through digital input DI3 1 active 0 inactive DI4 Speed defined by parameter 1202 CONST SPEED 1 is 4 activated through digital input DI4 1 active O inactive Speed defined by parameter 1202 CONST SPEED 1 is 5 activated through digital input DI5 1 active O inactive Constant speed selection through digital inputs DI1 and 7 DI2 1 DI active O DI inactive No constant speed peed defined by par 1202 CONST SPEED 1 S Speed defined by par 1203 CONST SPEED 2 Speed defined by par 1204 CONST SPEED 3 See selection D 7 2 See selection D 7 2 See selection D 17 2 Constant speed selection through digital inputs DI1 DI2 and 12 DI3 1 DI active 0 DI inactive DI DI2 DS Operation 0 0 0 No constantspeed_ 0 0 Speed defined by par 1202 CONST SPEED 7 1 0 Speed defined by par 1203 CONST SPEED 2 1 0 Speed defined by par 1204 CONST SPEED 3 0 0 1 Speed defined by par 1205 CONST
51. RELAY OUTPUT 1 value is set to SUPRV1 OVER Relay is energized whenever the supervised signal exceeds the active limit Case B 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 value is set to SUPRV1 UNDER Relay is de energized whenever the supervised signal drops below the active limit Value of supervised parameter Active limit HI par 3203 LO par 3202 L Case A Energized 1 0 Case B Energized 1 3202 SUPERV 1 LIM Defines the low limit for the first supervised signal selected LO by parameter 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM Supervision wakes up if the value is below the limit Setting range depends on parameter 3207 setting 3203 SUPERV 1 LIM Defines the high limit for the first supervised signal selected HI by parameter 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM Supervision wakes up if the value is above the limit Setting range depends on parameter 3207 setting 3204 SUPERV 2 Selects the second supervised signal Supervision limits are PARAM defined by parameters 3205 SUPERV 2 LIM LO and 3206 SUPERV 2 LIM HI See parameter 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM 3205 SUPERV 2 LIM Defines the low limit for the second supervised signal LO selected by parameter 3204 SUPERV 2 PARAM Supervision wakes up if the value is below the limit Setting range depends on parameter 3204 setting Actual signals and parameters 209 All parameters No Name Value Description selected by parameter 3204 SUPERV 2 PARAM Supervision wakes up if the value is above the limit 3207 SUPERV 3 S
52. Second PFC relay Third PFC relay DI5 Free First PFC relay Second PFC relay Third PFC relay Fourth PFC relay Free First PFC relay Second PFC relay Third PFC relay Fourth PFC relay Fifth PFC relay 262 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq DI2 Enables the Interlock function and assigns a digital input 2 starting with DI2 to the interlock signal for each PFC relay These assignments are defined in the following table and depend on the number of PFC relays number of parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 with value 31 PFC e the Autochange function status disabled if 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 0 and otherwise enabled No of Autochange disabled Autochange enabled PFC Parameter 8118 Parameter 8118 relays DI1 Free Not allowed DI2 Speed reg motor DI3 DI5 Free Free DI1 Free Speed reg motor DI2 First PFC relay First PFC relay DI3 DI5 Free DI5 Free Free Free Speed reg motor First PFC relay First PFC relay Second PFC relay Second PFC relay DI5 Free DI5 Free Free Free Speed reg motor First PFC relay First PFC relay Second PFC relay Second PFC relay Third PFC relay Third PFC relay Free Not allowed Free First PFC relay Second PFC relay Third PFC relay Fourth PFC relay 5 Not allowed Not allowed All parameters No Name Value DI3 Actual signa
53. Stationary arrow Drive is stopped Dotted stationary arrow Start command is present but the motor is not running eg because start enable is missing Panel operation Name of the current mode mode Name of the list or menu shown e Name of the operation state eg PAR EDIT 2 3 4 Reference value or Reference value in the Output mode number of the Number of the highlighted item eg selected item mode parameter group or fault E Operation You operate the control panel with menus and keys The keys include two context sensitive soft keys whose current function is indicated by the text shown in the display above each key You select an option eg operation mode or parameter by scrolling the a and vy arrow keys until the option is highlighted in reverse video and then pressing the relevant soft key With the right soft key 53 you usually enter a mode accept an option or save the changes The left soft key 7 is used to cancel the made changes and return to the previous operation level The Assistant Control Panel has nine panel modes Output mode Parameter mode Assistants mode Changed parameters mode Fault logger mode Time and date mode Parameter backup mode I O settings mode and Fault mode The operation in the first eight modes is described in this chapter When a fault or alarm occurs the panel goes automatically to the Fault mode showing the fault or alarm You can reset it in the Output or Fault mo
54. The Basic Control Panel indicates Control Panel alarms with a code A5xxx ALARM CODE CAUSE WHAT TO DO 5001 Drive is not responding Check panel connection 5002 Incompatible Contact your local ABB representative communication profile 5010 Corrupted panel parameter Retry parameter upload backup file Retry parameter download 5011 Drive is controlled from Change drive control to local control mode another source 5012 Direction of rotation is Enable change of direction See parameter locked 1003 DIRECTION 5013 Panel control is disabled Start from the panel is not possible Reset the because start inhibit is emergency stop command or remove the 3 wire active stop command before starting from the panel See section 3 wire macro on page 105 and parameters 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS and 2109 EMERG STOP SEL 5014 Panel control is disabled Reset drive fault and retry because of drive fault 5015 Panel control is disabled Deactivate local control mode lock and retry because local control See parameter 7606 LOCAL LOCK mode lock is active 5018 Parameter default value is Contact your local ABB representative not found 5019 Writing non zero Only parameter reset is allowed parameter value is prohibited 5020 Parameter or parameter Contact your local ABB representative group does not exist or parameter value is inconsistent 5021 Parameter or parameter Contact your local ABB representative group is hidden
55. The drive generates alarm PANEL LOSS and freezes the speed to the level the drive was operating at The speed is determined by the average speed over the previous 10 seconds WARNING Make sure that it is safe to continue operation in case of a panel communication break 3003 EXTERNAL Selects an interface for an external fault 1 signal FAULT 1 NOT SEL Not selected External fault indication through digital input DI1 1 Fault 1 trip EXT FAULT 1 Motor coasts to stop 0 No external fault See selection D 7 See selection D 7 See selection D 7 See selection D 7 DI1 INV External fault indication through inverted digital input DI1 0 Fault trip EXT FAULT 1 Motor coasts to stop 1 No external fault DI2 INV See selection D 1 INV DI3 INV See selection D 1 INV DI4 INV See selection D 1 INV DI5 INV See selection D 1 INV 3004 EXTERNAL Selects an interface for an external fault 2 signal NOT SEL FAULT 2 zZ oo N O a 1 Mm r 2 Seeparameter3003 EXTERNAL FAULT 1 3005 MOT THERM Selects how the drive reacts when the motor PROT overtemperature is detected NOT SEL Protection is inactive FAULT The drive trips on fault MOT OVERTEMP when the 1 temperature exceeds 110 C and the motor coasts to stop ALARM The drive generates alarm MOTOR TEMP when the motor 2 temperature exceeds 90 C J ol amp E rm 202 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Descriptio
56. UNDERVOLT _ Activates or deactivates the undervoltage control of the ENABLE intermediate DC link TIME If the DC voltage drops due to input power cut off the undervoltage controller will automatically decrease the motor speed in order to keep the voltage above the lower limit By decreasing the motor speed the inertia of the load will cause regeneration back into the drive keeping the DC link charged and preventing an undervoltage trip until the motor coasts to stop This will act as a power loss ride through functionality in systems with a high inertia such as a centrifuge or a fan See section Power loss ride through on page 727 DISABLE Undervoltage control deactivated ENABLE TIME Undervoltage control activated The undervoltage control is 1 active for 500 ms ENABLE Undervoltage control activated No operation time limit 2 00 Nn 7 m gt ive Fe m Actual signals and parameters 189 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 2007 MINIMUM Defines the minimum limit for the drive output frequency FREQ A positive or zero minimum frequency value defines two ranges one positive and one negative A negative minimum frequency value defines one speed range Note MINIMUM FREQ lt MAXIMUM FREQ Allowed frequency range Allowed frequency range 500 0 500 0 Hz Minimum frequency 2008 MAXIMUM Defines the maximum limit for the drive output frequency FREQ 0 0 500 0 Hz Maximu
57. and parameters on page 155 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 281 Modbus mapping The following Modbus function codes are supported by the drive Code Additional information Hex dec Read Multiple 03 03 Reads the contents of registers in a slave device Holding Parameter sets control status and reference values are mapped Registers as holding registers Write Single 06 06 Writes to a single register in a slave device Holding Parameter sets control status and reference values are mapped Register as holding registers Diagnostics 0 the master and the slave devices or for checking various internal error conditions within the slave The following subcodes are supported 00 Return Query Data The data passed in the request data field is to be returned in the response The entire response message should be identical to the request 01 Restart Communications Option The slave device serial line port must be initialized and restarted and all of its communication event counters cleared If the port is currently in Listen Only Mode no response is returned If the port is not currently in Listen Only Mode a normal response is returned before the restart 04 Force Listen Only Mode Forces the addressed slave device to Listen Only Mode This isolates it from the other devices on the network allowing them to continue communicating without interruption from the addressed remote device No response is returned The o
58. box 328 Technical data Ambient conditions Environmental limits for the drive are given below The drive is to be used in a heated indoor controlled environment Operation Storage Transportation installed for in the protective in the protective stationary use package package Installation site altitude O to 2000 m 6600 ft above sea level above 1000 m 3300 ft see section Derating on page 319 Air temperature 10 to 50 C 14to 40 to 70 C 40 to 40 to 70 C 40 to 122 F No frost 158 F 158 F allowed See section Derating on page 19 Relative humidity 0 to 95 Max 95 Max 95 No condensation allowed Maximum allowed relative humidity is 60 in the presence of corrosive gases Contamination levels No conductive dust allowed o etme lage E IEC 60721 3 3 IEC 60721 3 1 IEC 60721 3 2 IEC 60721 3 1 chemical gases chemical gases chemical gases Class 3C2 Class 1C2 Class 2C2 solid particles Class solid particles Class solid particles Class 3S2 1S2 2S2 The drive must be installed in clean air according to enclosure classification Cooling air must be clean free from corrosive materials and electrically conductive dust Sinusoidal vibration Tested according to IEC 60721 3 3 IEC 60721 3 3 mechanical conditions Class 3M4 2 9 Hz 3 0 mm 0 12 in 9 200 Hz 10 m s 33 ft s Shock According to ISTA 1A According to ISTA 1A IEC 60068 2 27 Max 109 m s Max
59. dda saves da said AA AAA AO Ohad E Default I O connection diagram oooccocccccc ee Connection procedure tans science Connecting the embedded fieldbus 0 0 ccc eee Connection diagram ax contaros dd 7 Installation checklist Checking the installation sio cect eae a A Ex ded ed ee 8 Start up and control with I O What this chapter contains 0 000 t eee Table of contents 7 How to start Up the drive o o ooooccoooo eee ee 57 How to start up the drive without a control panel 0000 eee eee 58 How to perform a manual Start UP o o oooooooooor 59 How to perform a guided start up combatir Ae 62 How to control the drive through the I O interface nannan aaaea 65 9 Control panels What this chapter contains 0 0 00 eee 67 About control panelS o oo o ooooo eee eee A E Ea aa 67 Applicability siseasi iee e a a a nee ee 67 Basic Control Panel 22 2 3 5244 midia ie ha beh hee do d ee PE ada 69 Features at owe an Pee o encadena Na 69 OVEIVISW noc ee Pl a i Owe nde bw oe ae da wa ale etd 70 Operation a2 5 h5 8 G0 BiG dns tki iaa A RO ee wa 71 OUP MOJE 633 8635 59 iaa 74 Reference Mode asme nspa eke Reed ea ia ioe a Bo oa Se a a 75 Parameter mode 0 0 nanan cana a 76 C py Mode sepi ioi toda aos dd a ate 78 Basic Control Panel alarm codes ooooooooooo ee eee eens 79 Assistant Control Panel 424 32 aves ek boa ia ia ee Sh ea
60. drive The drive can be adjusted to operate the motor at speeds above and below the speed provided by connecting the motor directly to the power line Do not activate automatic fault reset functions if dangerous situations can occur When activated these functions will reset the drive and resume operation after a fault Do not control the motor with an AC contactor or disconnecting device disconnecting means use instead the control panel start and stop keys and or external commands I O or fieldbus The maximum allowed number of charging cycles of the DC capacitors ie power ups by applying power is two per minute and the maximum total number of chargings is 15 000 Note If an external source for start command is selected and it is ON the drive will start immediately after an input voltage break or fault reset unless the drive is configured for 3 wire a pulse start stop When the control location is not set to local LOC not shown on the display the stop key on the control panel will not stop the drive To stop the drive using the control panel first press the LOC REM key and then the stop key CO gt 18 Safety Introduction to the manual 19 Introduction to the manual What this chapter contains The chapter describes applicability target audience and purpose of this manual It describes the contents of this manual and refers to a list of related manuals for more information The chapter also contains a flowchar
61. external control location EXT1 DIA EXT1 an top Fieldbus selection irection See chapter Embedded fieldbus Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus on page 271 KEYPAD TIMED FUNC 1 4 Control panel Timed function E Block diagram Reference source for EXT1 The figure below shows the parameters that select the interface for the speed reference of external control location EX77 Al Al1 Al2 DI3 DI4 DI5 Al2 EXT1 DI3 Reference REF1 DI4 Fieldbus selection Hz rpm DIS See chapter Embedded fieldbus Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus on page 277 FREQ INPUT KEYPAD Frequency input Control panel 120 Program features Reference types and processing The drive can accept a variety of references in addition to the conventional analog input and control panel signals e The drive reference can be given with two digital inputs One digital input increases the speed the other decreases it e The drive can form a reference out of two analog input signals by using mathematical functions addition subtraction multiplication and division e The drive can form a reference out of an analog input signal and a signal received through a serial communication interface by using mathematical functions addition and multiplication e The drive reference can be given with frequency input It is possible to scale the external reference so that the signal minimum and
62. in Precharge The PID 0 STEP reference ramp time is specified by parameter 4032 P D REF ACC TIME The speed step is added to the reference after the time defined by parameter 4424 ACT CHANGE DELAY has elapsed and the change in feedback defined by parameter 4423 REQ ACT CHANGE has not been reached 0 0 100 0 Speed step in percent of the maximum speed output 1 0 1 4423 REQ ACT Defines the requested change in process feedback during 0 0 CHANGE the time that is set by parameter 4424 ACT CHANGE DELAY If the requested change in the feedback is not reached 4422 PIPEFILL STEP is added to the speed reference 0 0 100 0 Value in percent of the maximum speed 1 0 1 4424 ACT CHANGE Defines the time that is waited after the feedback value is compared with the old feedback value If parameter 4423 REQ ACT CHANGE is measured in the feedback value the speed reference stays as it is If REQ ACT CHANGE is not seen in the feedback value the value of parameter 4422 PIPEFILL STEP is added to the speed reference 0 4 600008 4425 PID ENABLE Defines the level when Precharge is disabled and PID is DEV enabled When the level is reached PID is enabled PID is executed as parameterized If reference ramp times are set they are used E E gt gt N N O 313 23 3 m O T T E E a 4 o l o o a DI2 DI3 2 N Q AJL i o I o o n a n 242 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No
63. in accordance with Canadian Electrical Code and any applicable provincial codes To fulfil this requirement use the UL classified fuses given in section Power cable sizes and fuses on page 321 Power cable selection See section Selecting the power cables on page 36 Power cable connections For the connection diagram and tightening torques see section Connecting the power cables on page 47 Overload protection The drive provides overload protection in accordance with the National Electrical Code US C Tick marking See the type designation label for the valid markings of your drive C Tick marking is required in Australia and New Zealand A C Tick mark is attached to the drive to verify compliance with the relevant standard IEC 61800 3 2004 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems Part 3 EMC product standard including specific test methods mandated by the Trans Tasman Electromagnetic Compatibility Scheme The Trans Tasman Electromagnetic Compatibility Scheme EMCS was introduced by the Australian Communication Authority ACA and the Radio Spectrum Management Group RSM of the New Zealand Ministry of Economic Development Technical data 333 NZMED in November 2001 The aim of the scheme is to protect the radio frequency spectrum by introducing technical limits for emission from electrical electronic products For fulfilling the requirements of the standard see section Compliance with EN 618
64. is switched off the drive will not start or coasts to stop if it is running See selection D 7 See selection D 7 D5 oo O See selection DI1 MAX LX 0 See selection D 7 DI5 182 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description COMM Fieldbus interface as the source for inverted Run enable signal Run disable ie control word 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 bit 6 with ABB drives profile 5379 EFB PAR 19 bit 3 The control word is sent by the fieldbus controller through the embedded fieldbus Modbus to the drive For the control word bits see sections DCU communication profile on page 289 and ABB drives communication profile on page 284 DI1 INV External signal required through inverted digital input DI1 0 1 Run enable If Run enable signal is switched on the drive will not start or coasts to stop if it is running DI2 INV See selection D 1 INV DI3 INV See selection D 1 INV DI4 INV See selection D 1 INV DI5 INV See selection D 1 INV 1602 PARAMETER Selects the state of the parameter lock The lock prevents LOCK parameter changing from the control panel OPEN LOCKED Parameter values cannot be changed from the control panel The lock can be opened by entering the valid code to parameter 1603 PASS CODE The lock does not prevent parameter changes made by macros or fieldbus OPEN The lock is open Parameter values can be changed NOT SAVED Parameter changes from the control panel a
65. key the panel goes to the Output mode Control panels 85 How to start stop and switch between local and remote control You can start stop and switch between local and remote control in any mode To be able to start or stop the drive the drive must be in local control step Action Sd O O ay e To switch between remote control REM shown on the Loc MESSAGE status line and local control LOC shown on the status Switching to_the line press 2 local control mode Note Switching to local control can be disabled with parameter 1606 LOCAL LOCK 00 00 The very first time the drive is powered up it is in remote control REM and controlled through the drive I O terminals To switch to local control LOC and control the drive using the control panel press 2 The result depends on how long you press the key e If you release the key immediately the display flashes Switching to the local control mode the drive stops Set the local control reference as instructed on page 87 If you press the key for about two seconds the drive continues as before The drive copies the current remote values for the run stop status and the reference and uses them as the initial local control settings e To stop the drive in local control press CO gt The arrow U or 5 on the status line stops rotating e To start the drive in local control press CH gt The arrow U or 5 on the status line starts rotating It i
66. minimum setting 0 20 mA 0 100 4 20 mA 20 100 10 10 mA 50 50 Example If Al1 is selected as the source for external reference REF 1 this value corresponds to the value of Description Def FbEq When parameter 1201 CONST SPEED SEL TIMED 2 FUNC 1 TIMED FUNC 4 this timed function selects a constant speed 1 timed function active O timed function inactive Timed function 1 4 Speed defined by parameter 1202 CONST SPEED 1 1 Speed defined by parameter 1203 CONST SPEED 2 When parameter 1201 CONST SPEED SEL TIMED FUN1 amp 2 timed functions 1 and 2 select a constant speed 1 timed function active O timed function inactive Timed Timed Operation function 1 function 2 Speed defined by parameter 1202 CONST SPEED 1 1 Speed defined by parameter 1203 CONST SPEED 2 1 Speed defined by parameter 1204 CONST SPEED 3 1 Speed defined by parameter 1205 CONST SPEED 4 parameter 1104 REF1 MIN Note MINIMUM AI7 value must not exceed MAXIMUM AI1 value Value in percent of the full signal range Example If the minimum value for analog input is 4 mA the percent value for 0 20 mA range is 4 mA 20 mA 100 20 Defines the maximum value that corresponds to maximum mA V signal for analog input Al1 When used as a reference the value corresponds to the reference maximum setting 0 20 mA 0 100 4 20 mA 20 100 10 10 mA 50 50 Example If Al1 is se
67. of the user defined time limit Motor torque Overload area Ta Torque Torque Torque Torque 1g high 5 high 1 high 2 high 3 Torque Allowed operating area P 9 low 4 low 5 Torque low 3 Torque low 1 Torque low 2 Sk Output Underload area frequency Hz Freq 1 Freq 2 Freq 3 Freq 4 Freq 5 E Settings Additional information Group 37 USER LOAD CURVE User load curve settings E Diagnostics Actual signal Additional information 0105 Motor torque USER LOAD CURVE Out of allowed area for longer than half of the defined time limit USER LOAD CURVE Out of allowed area for longer than the defined time limit PAR USER LOAD C Incorrect user load curve parameter setting 3704 gt 3707 or 3707 gt 3710 or 3710 gt 3713 or 3713 gt 3716 or 3705 gt 3706 or 3708 gt 3709 or 3711 gt 3712 or 3714 gt 3715 or 3717 gt 3718 Program features 147 Energy optimizer Energy optimizer optimizes the flux so that the total energy consumption and motor noise level are reduced when the drive operates below the nominal load The total efficiency motor and drive can be improved by 1 10 depending on the load torque and speed E Settings Additional information 4501 Energy optimizer enabling Energy saving Energy saving tools calculate energy saved in kWh and MWh energy saved in local currency as well as reduction in CO emission all compared to the situation when th
68. page 111 Drive cannot start e any motor when Autochange is used e the speed regulated motor when Autochange is not used See parameter group 81 PFC CONTROL See parameter groups 40 PROCESS PID SET 1 41 PROCESS PID SET 2 Fault tracing 297 CODE ALARM CAUSE WHAT TO DO 2021 2022 2023 2025 2026 2027 2028 START DELAY Start delay in progress See parameter 2113 START DELAY 0309 bit 11 2031 START ENABLE 1 MISSING 0309 bit 4 START ENABLE 2 MISSING 0309 bit 5 EMERGENCY STOP 0309 bit 6 FIRST START 0309 bit 8 INPUT PHASE LOSS 0306 bit 5 programmable fault function 3016 USER LOAD CURVE 0309 bit 10 INLET LOW 0309 bit 13 OUTLET HIGH 0309 bit 14 No Start enable 1 signal received No Start enable 2 signal received Drive has received emergency stop command and ramps to stop according to ramp time defined by parameter 2208 EMERG DEC TIME Motor identification magnetization is on This alarm belongs to normal start up procedure Intermediate circuit DC voltage is oscillating due to missing input power line phase or blown fuse Alarm is generated when DC voltage ripple exceeds 14 of nominal DC voltage Condition defined by 3701 USER LOAD C MODE has been valid longer than half of the time set by 3703 USER LOAD C TIME Pressure at pump fan inlet too low Pressure at pump fan outlet too high Check parameter 1608 START ENABLE 1 se
69. parameter 2617 USER DEFINED Un F4 See section Custom U f ratio on page 130 0 120 of Uy V Voltage 2617 USER Defines the fourth frequency point of the custom U f curve 40 0 Hz DEFINED F4 0 0 5000H2 Frequency SSSA Actual signals and parameters 199 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 2618 FW VOLTAGE Defines the voltage of the U f curve when frequency is equal 95 of to or exceeds the motor nominal frequency 9907 MOTOR Un NOM FREQ See section Custom Uff ratio on page 130 0 120 of Uy V Voltage 2619 DC Enables or disables the DC voltage stabilizer The DC DISABLE STABILIZER stabilizer is used to prevent possible voltage oscillations in the drive DC bus caused by motor load or weak supply network In case of voltage variation the drive tunes the frequency reference to stabilize the DC bus voltage and therefore the load torque oscillation DISABLE Disabled ENABLE Enabled 1 2901 COOLING FAN Defines the trigger point for the drive cooling fan run time TR counter Value is compared to parameter 2902 COOLING FAN ACT value 0 0 6553 5 kh Time If parameter value is set to zero the trigger is 1 0 1 kh disabled IG 2902 COOLING FAN Defines the actual value for the cooling fan run time counter ACT When parameter 2901 COOLING FAN TRIG has been set to a non zero value the counter starts When the actual value of the counter exceeds the value defined by parameter 2901 a maintenance notice
70. parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 3401 SIGNAL1 Selects the first signal to be displayed on the control panel 1103 PARAM in the Output mode Assistant panel 3404 3405 parameter 3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM Display value 3407 3402 3403 Value Note Parameter is not effective if parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM setting is DIRECT parameter 3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM See the figure for parameter 3402 SIGNAL1 MIN Note Parameter is not effective if parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM setting is DIRECT X X 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM 0 0 20 000 0 000 Actual signals and parameters 211 All parameters No Name Value Description BAR METER _ Bar graph DIRECT Direct value Decimal point location and units of measure are the same as for the source signal Note Parameters 3402 3403 and 3405 3407 are not effective 3405 OUTPUT1 Selects the unit for the for the displayed signal selected by Hz UNIT parameter 3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM Note Parameter is not effective if parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM setting is DIRECT Note Unit selection does not convert values NO UNIT No unit selected ampere pS A vo z hertz percent ps second EA O rpms revolutions per minute pounds per foot mM milliampere kWh kilowatt hour a fahrenheit Mh megawatt hour m s meters per second cubic meters per hour cubic decimeters per second N N N Wj N kilopascal allons per minute
71. parameters 247 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq RESET EFB protocol is performing a hardware reset LISTEN ONLY EFB protocol is in listen only mode 5310 EFB PAR 10 Selects an actual value to be mapped to Modbus register 40005 0 65535 Parameterindex OOOO 5311 EFB PAR 11 Selects an actual value to be mapped to Modbus register 40006 085595 Parameterindex OOOO 5312 EFB PAR 12 Selects an actual value to be mapped to Modbus register 40007 0 65535 Parameterindex O 5313 EFB PAR 13 Selects an actual value to be mapped to Modbus register 40008 065535 Parameterindex OO 5314 EFB PAR 14 Selects an actual value to be mapped to Modbus register 40009 065535 Parameterindex OOOO 5315 EFB PAR 15 Selects an actual value to be mapped to Modbus register 40010 065535 Paame OO 5316 EFB PAR 16 Selects an actual value to be mapped to Modbus register 40011 0 65535 Paame OOO 5317 EFB PAR 17 Selects an actual value to be mapped to Modbus register 40012 065535 Parameterindex CS 5318 EFB PAR 18 For Modbus Sets an additional delay before the drive begins transmitting response to the master request 0 65535 Delay in milliseconds 1 5319 EFB PAR 19 ABB drives profile ABB DRV LIM or ABB DRV FULL 0000 hex Control word Read only copy of the Fieldbus Control word 0000 FFFF Control word hex 5320 EFB PAR 20 ABB drives profile ABB DRV LIM or ABB DRV FULL 0000 hex Status word Re
72. pumping station s outlet flow is controlled by the measured inlet flow A Mains 3 3 Con tactors Outlet pipe 3 Disables Regulator by pass control The drive uses the normal PFC reference 1106 REF2 SELECT Enables Regulator by pass control 1 The process PID regulator is bypassed Actual value of PID is used as the PFC reference input Normally 1106 REF2 SELECT is used as the PFC reference The drive uses the feedback signal defined by 4014 FBK SEL or 4114 for the PFC frequency reference The first figure for parameter 8121 shows the relation between the control signal 4014 FBK SEL or 4114 and the speed regulated motor s frequency in a three motor system Sets the start delay for speed regulated motors in the system Using the delay the drive works as follows Switches on the contactor of the speed regulated motor connecting the motor to the drive power output Delays motor start for time 8122 PFC START DELAY Starts the speed regulated motor Starts auxiliary motors See parameter 8115 AUX MOT START D for delay WARNING Motors equipped with star delta starters require a PFC start delay After the drive relay output switches a motor on the star delta starter must switch to the star connection and then back to the delta connection before the drive applies power So the PFC start delay must be longer than the time setting of the star delta starter 00110005 beayime h 266 Actual signals a
73. set 2 Selecting timed autochange control 8126 Program features 117 Contents of the assistant displays There are two types of displays in the Start up assistant Main displays and information displays The main displays prompt the user to feed in information The assistant steps through the main displays The information displays contain help texts for the main displays The figure below shows a typical example of both and explanations of the contents Main display Information display REM UPAR EDIT LOC HELP Set exactly as given 9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT on the motor nameplate If connected to multiple motors CANCEL 00 00 SAVE EXIT 00 00 1 Parameter Help text 2 Feed in field help text continued Local control vs external control The drive can receive start stop and direction commands and reference values from the control panel or through digital and analog inputs Embedded fieldbus enables control over an open fieldbus link A PC equipped with the DriveWindow Light PC tool can also control the drive Local control Drive External control Control panel OF 3 AA FAR Embedded fieldbus PC tool Modbus RTU E EIA 485 Standard I O With SREA 01 Ethernet Adapter Module it is possible to use Modbus TCP IP with the Ethernet For more information see SREA 01 Ethernet Adapter Module User s Manual 83AUA0000042896 English 118 Program features
74. the Internet Go to www abb com drives and select Document Library You can browse the library or enter selection criteria for example a document code in the search field AA ED ED FPRIEDIEID ABB Oy Drives P O Box 184 FI 00381 HELSINKI FINLAND Telephone 358 10 22 11 Fax 358 10 22 22681 Internet www abb com ABB Inc Automation Technologies Drives amp Motors 16250 West Glendale Drive New Berlin WI 53151 USA Telephone 262 785 3200 800 HELP 365 Fax 262 780 5135 3 404000004420 3AUA0000044201 Rev B EN EFFECTIVE 2009 09 29 ABB Beijing Drive Systems Co Ltd No 1 Block D A 10 Jiuxiangiao Beilu Chaoyang District Beijing P R China 100015 86 10 5821 7788 86 10 5821 7618 www abb com
75. the conductivity of the cable shield is not sufficient for the purpose Symmetrical shielded cable three phase conductors a concentric or otherwise symmetrically constructed PE conductor and a shield PE Shield i conductor Shield and shield PE ePE Allowed as input cables Shield A four conductor system three phase conductors and a protective conductor PE PE E Motor cable shield To function as a protective conductor the shield must have the same cross sectional area as the phase conductors when they are made of the same metal To effectively suppress radiated and conducted radio frequency emissions the shield conductivity must be at least 1 10 of the phase conductor conductivity The requirements are easily met with a copper or aluminium shield The minimum requirement of the motor cable shield of the drive is shown below It consists of a concentric layer of copper wires The better and tighter the shield the lower the emission level and bearing currents Insulation jacket Copper wire screen Cable core 38 Planning the electrical installation E Additional US requirements Type MC continuous corrugated aluminium armor cable with symmetrical grounds or shielded power cable is recommended for the motor cables if metallic conduit is not used The power cables must be rated for 75 C 167 F Conduit Where conduits must be coupled together bridge the joint with a ground conductor bonded
76. the fault history The latest faults are stored together with the time stamp Parameters 0401 LAST FAULT 0412 PREVIOUS FAULT 1 and 0413 PREVIOUS FAULT 2 store the most recent faults Parameters 0404 0409 show drive operation data at the time the latest fault occurred The Assistant Control Panel provides additional information about the fault history See section Fault logger mode on page 94 for more information Fault tracing 295 Alarm messages generated by the drive CODE ALARM CAUSE WHAT TO DO 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 OVERCURRENT 0308 bit O programmable fault function 1610 OVERVOLTAGE 0308 bit 1 programmable fault function 1610 UNDERVOLTAGE 0308 bit 2 programmable fault function 1610 DIR LOCK 0308 bit 3 IO COMM 0308 bit 4 programmable fault function 3018 3019 Al LOSS 0308 bit 5 programmable fault function 3001 3021 Al2 LOSS 0308 bit 6 programmable fault function 3001 3022 Output current limit controller is active DC overvoltage controller is active DC undervoltage controller is active Change of direction is not allowed Fieldbus communication break Analog input Al1 signal has fallen below limit defined by parameter 3021 Al1 FAULT LIMIT Analog input Al2 signal has fallen below limit defined by parameter 3022 Al2 FAULT LIMIT Check motor load Check acceleration time 2202 and 2205 Check motor and motor cable
77. the settings correspond to the motor used Hint The user can for example switch the drive between two motors without having to adjust the motor parameters every time the motor is changed The user needs only to adjust the settings once for each motor and then to save the data as two user macros When the motor is changed only the corresponding user macro needs to be loaded and the drive is ready to operate Program features 113 Program features What this chapter contains The chapter describes program features For each feature there is a list of related user settings actual signals and fault and alarm messages Start up assistant E Introduction The Start up assistant requires the Assistant Control Panel guides the user through the start up procedure helping to enter the requested data parameter values to the drive The Start up assistant also checks that the entered values are valid ie within the allowed range The Start up assistant calls other assistants each of which guides the user through the task of specifying a related parameter set At the first start the drive suggests entering the first task Language select automatically The user may activate the tasks either one after the other as the Start up assistant suggests or independently The user may also adjust the drive parameters in the conventional way without using the assistant at all See section Assistants mode on page 91 on how to start the Start
78. to the conduit on each side of the joint Bond the conduits also to the drive enclosure Use separate conduits for input power motor and control wiring Do not run motor wiring from more than one drive in the same conduit Armored cable shielded power cable Six conductor three phases and three ground type MC continuous corrugated aluminium armor cable with symmetrical grounds is available from the following suppliers trade names in parentheses e Anixter Wire amp Cable Philsheath e BICC General Corp Philsheath e Rockbestos Co Gardex e Oaknite CLX Shielded power cable is available from the following suppliers e Belden e LAPPKABEL LFLEX e Pirelli Selecting the control cables E General rules All analog control cables and the cable used for the frequency input must be shielded Use a double shielded twisted pair cable Figure a for example JAMAK by Draka NK Cables for analog signals Employ one individually shielded pair for each signal Do not use common return for different analog signals Planning the electrical installation 39 A double shielded cable is the best alternative for low voltage digital signals but a single shielded or unshielded twisted multipair cable Figure b is also usable However for frequency input always use a shielded cable Double shielded twisted Single shielded twisted multipair cable multipair cable Run analog and digital signals in separate cables
79. with parameter 6404 TO60 50 60 distribution 1 1 1 1 00 70 y 6430 AL2ZRANGE60 Amplitude logger 2 selection with parameter 6404 TO70 60 70 distribution IA SSCS 6432 AL2RANGE80 Amplitude logger 2 selection with parameter 6404 TO90 80 90 distribution E A DELAT 6431 AL2RANGE70 Amplitude logger 2 selection with parameter 6404 TO80 70 80 distribution 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 IA y 6433 AL2RANGE9O Amplitude logger 2 selection with parameter 6404 over O 0 distribution 0 0 100 0 1 0 1 8103 REFERENCE Setsa percentage value that is added to the process 0 0 reference Applies only when at least one auxiliary constant speed motor is running Example The drive operates three parallel pumps that maintain water pressure in a pipe Parameter 4011 INTERNAL SETPNT sets a constant pressure reference that controls the pressure in the pipe The speed regulated pump operates alone at low water consumption levels As water consumption increases first one constant speed pump operates then the second As flow increases the pressure at the output end of the pipe drops relative to the pressure measured at the input end As auxiliary motors step in to increase the flow the adjustments below correct the reference to more closely match the output pressure When the first auxiliary pump operates increase the reference with parameter 8103 REFERENCE STEP 1
80. your local ABB representative because of CRC error 5090 Download has failed Contact your local ABB representative because of data processing error 5091 Operation has failed Contact your local ABB representative because of parameter error 5092 Parameter download from Check that source and destination drive source to destination drive information are same See parameters in group has failed because 33 INFORMATION parameter sets are incompatible 302 Fault tracing Fault messages generated by the drive CODE FAULT CAUSE WHAT TO DO 0001 OVERCURRENT Output current has Check motor load 2310 exceeded trip level Check acceleration time 2202 and 0305 bit O 2205 Check motor and motor cable including phasing Check ambient conditions Load capacity decreases if installation site ambient temperature exceeds 40 C See section Derating on page 319 0002 DC OVERVOLT Excessive Check that overvoltage controller is on 3210 intermediate circuit DC parameter 2005 OVERVOLT CTRL 0305 bit 1 voltage DC Check input power line for static or overvoltage trip limit is transient overvoltage 420 V for 200 V drives and 840 V for 400 V drives 0003 DEV OVERTEMP Drive IGBT Check ambient conditions See also 4210 temperature is section Derating on page 319 Check deceleration time 2203 2206 0305 bit 2 arava a trip Check air flow and fan operation els f Check motor power against drive power
81. 0 0307 bit 15 PAR Al SCALE 6320 0307 bit 15 Pressure at pump fan outlet too high Drive internal error Incorrect frequency limit parameter setting Incorrect PFC parameters Incorrect analog input Al signal scaling Check piping for blocks See parameter group 44 PUMP PROTECTION Write down fault code and contact your local ABB representative Check parameter settings Check that following applies 2007 MINIMUM FREQ lt 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ e 2007 MINIMUM FREQ 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ and 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ are within range Check parameter group 87 PFC CONTROL settings Check that following applies 2007 MINIMUM FREQ gt 0 when 8123 is ACTIVE or SPFC ACTIVE Check parameter group 13 ANALOG INPUTS settings Check that following applies 1301 MINIMUM Al1 lt 1302 MAXIMUM Al1 e 1304 MINIMUM Al2 lt 1305 MAXIMUM Al2 Fault tracing 307 CODE FAULT CAUSE WHAT TO DO Incorrect analog output Check parameter group 15 ANALOG 1004 PARAO SCALE 6320 0307 bit 15 1006 PAR EXT RO 6320 0307 bit 15 1012 PARPFCIO 1 6320 0307 bit 15 1013 PARPFC IO 2 6320 0307 bit 15 1014 PARPFCIO 3 6320 0307 bit 15 1015 PAR CUSTOM U F 6320 0307 bit 15 1017 PAR SETUP 1 6320 0307 bit 15 AO signal scaling Incorrect extension relay output parameters I O configuration for PFC not complete I O configuration for PFC not complete I O confi
82. 0 SET POINT See parameter 4010 SET POINT SEL SEL 4111 INTERNAL See parameter 4011 INTERNAL SETPNT SETPNT 4112 SETPOINT See parameter 4012 SETPOINT MIN MIN 4113 SETPOINT See parameter 4013 SETPOINT MAX a MAX 4114 FBK SEL See parameter 4014 FBK SEL ES 4115 FBK See parameter 4015 FBK MULTIPLIER MULTIPLIER 4116 ACT1 INPUT See parameter 4016 ACT1 INPUT 4117 ACT2 INPUT See parameter 4017 ACT2 INPUT 4118 ACT1 See parameter 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM MINIMUM 4119 ACT1 See parameter 4019 ACT1 MAXIMUM MAXIMUM 4120 ACT2 See parameter 4020 ACT2 MINIMUM MINIMUM 4121 ACT2 See parameter 4021 ACT2 MAXIMUM MAXIMUM 4122 SLEEP See parameter 4022 SLEEP SELECTION SELECTION 4123 PID SLEEP See parameter 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL LEVEL 4124 PID SLEEP See parameter 4024 PID SLEEP DELAY DELAY 4125 WAKE UP DEV See parameter 4025 WAKE UP DEV 4126 WAKE UP See parameter 4026 WAKE UP DELAY DELAY 4128 PID OUT MIN See parameter 4028 PID OUT MIN o 4129 PID OUT MAX See parameter 4029 PID OUT MAX O 4130 SLEEPBOOST See parameter 4030 SLEEP BOOST TIME aa TIME 4131 SLEEPBOOST See parameter 4037 SLEEP BOOST STEP STEP 4136 INTERNAL See parameter 4036 INTERNAL SETPNT2 SETPNT2 4137 INTERNAL See parameter 4037 INTERNAL SETPNT3 SETPNT3 4138 INTERNAL See parameter 4038 INTERNAL SETPNT4 SETPNT4 4139 INT SETPNT See parameter 4039 INT SETPNT SEL NO SEL Actual signals and parameters 235 All parameters No Name Value Des
83. 00 PID setpoint externally See the manufacturer s instructions An example of a connection using a two wire sensor is given on page 51 Tightening torque 0 4 N m 3 5 Ibf in Digital output max 100 mA y No fault Fault 1 2 360 degree grounding under a clamp Application macros 111 SPFC control macro This macro provides parameter settings for pump and fan control SPFC applications with a soft start function To enable the macro set the value of parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO to 15 SPFC CONTROL For the parameter default values see section Default values with different macros on page 157 If you use other than the default connections presented below see section I O terminals on page 49 Note Parameter 2108 START INHIBIT must remain in the default setting 0 OFF E Default I O connections X1A i SOR Signal cabe sie lsr o a tokom 11 3 GND Analog input circuit common Dres a2 process actual value 4 20 MA 7 T ono analog input ereuteommen D 7 ao Output frequency value 0 20mA Lt 1st enD Analog output circuit common e f2 Autan votege output 24 VDO max mA 10 6ND Auiiary voltage output common 11 DCOM Digital input common SS 2 DM Stop 0 Start 1 Hand X1B 17 ROCOM Relay output 1 e PFC os Fee 22 DOGND Digital output max 100 mA y PFC 4 Hand 0 10 V gt 0 50 Hz 6 The signal source must be powered PID PFC 0
84. 00 3 2004 on page 330 RoHS marking The RoHS mark is attached to the drive to verify that drive follows the provisions of the European RoHS Directive ROHS the restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment Patent protection in the USA This product is protected by one or more of the following US patents 4 920 306 5 654 624 6 175 256 6 313 599 6 552 510 6 859 374 6 972 976 7 034 510 7 084 604 7 215 099 7 274 573 7 372 696 7 515 447 D512 026 D548 183S Other patents pending 5 301 085 5 799 805 6 184 740 6 316 896 6 597 148 6 922 883 6 977 449 7 036 223 7 098 623 7 221 152 7 279 802 7 388 765 7 560 894 D512 696 D573 090S 5 463 302 5 940 286 6 195 274 6 335 607 6 600 290 6 940 253 6 984 958 7 045 987 7 102 325 7 227 325 7 280 938 7 408 791 D503 931 D521 466 5 521 483 5 942 874 6 229 356 6 370 049 6 741 059 6 934 169 6 985 371 7 057 908 7 109 780 7 245 197 7 330 095 7 417 408 D510 319 D541 743S 9 932 568 5 952 613 6 252 436 6 396 236 6 774 758 6 956 352 6 992 908 7 059 390 7 164 562 7 250 739 7 349 814 7 446 268 D510 320 D541 744S 5 589 754 6 094 364 6 265 724 6 448 735 6 844 794 6 958 923 6 999 329 7 067 997 7 176 779 7 262 577 7 352 220 7 456 615 D511 137 D541 745S 5 612 604 6 147 887 6 305 464 6 498 452 6 856 502 6 967 453 7 023 160 7 082 374 7 190 599 7 271 505 7 365 622 7 508 688 D511 150 D548 182
85. 008 MAXIMUM FREQ If the speed reference increases faster than the set acceleration rate the motor speed will follow the acceleration rate If the speed reference increases slower than the set acceleration rate the motor speed will follow the reference signal If the acceleration time is set too short the drive will automatically prolong the acceleration in order not to exceed the drive operating limits Actual acceleration time depends on parameter 2204 RAMP SHAPE 1 setting 00180005 2203 DECELER Defines the deceleration time 1 ie the time required for the 5 0 s TIME 1 speed to change from the value defined by parameter 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ to zero If the speed reference decreases slower than the set deceleration rate the motor speed will follow the reference signal If the reference changes faster than the set deceleration rate the motor speed will follow the deceleration rate If the deceleration time is set too short the drive will automatically prolong the deceleration in order not to exceed drive operating limits If a short deceleration time is needed for a high inertia application note that the ACS310 cannot be equipped with a brake resistor Actual deceleration time depends on parameter 2204 RAMP SHAPE 1 setting 00180005 194 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 2204 RAMP SHAPE Selects the shape of the acceleration deceleration ramp 1 0 0 1 Th
86. 1 Actual signals and parameters 255 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq PFC with Autochange mode 256 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description The table below shows the PFC motor assignments for some typical settings in the relay output parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 where the settings are either 31 PFC or X anything but 31 and where the Autochange function is disabled 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 caramelo Parameter setting Relay assignment a disabled AHHH a e Xx Sapo oo One additional relay output for the PFC that is in use One motor is in sleep when the other is rotating If five auxiliary motors are needed use the transistor output parameter 1805 DO SIGNAL as an additional relay output In relay order TO is set between RO 1 and RO 2 The table below shows the PFC motor assignments for some typical settings when TO is in use Parameter Parameter setting Relay assignment E e disabled 31 HARD led Lx 31 31 X xX x 2 Aux Aux X X X One additional relay output for the PFC that is in use One motor is in sleep when the other is rotating The table below shows the PFC motor assignments for some typical settings in the relay output parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 where the settings are either 31 PFC or X anything but 31 and where the Autochange function is enabled 8118 AUTOCHNG
87. 1 DI2 Free DI2 Free Speed reg motor First PFC relay First PFC relay DI5 Free DI5 Free 2 DI2 Free DI2 Free Speed reg motor First PFC relay First PFC relay Second PFC relay Second PFC relay Free 264 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq DI5 Enables the Interlock function and assigns a digital input 5 starting with DI5 to the interlock signal for each PFC relay These assignments are defined in the following table and depend on the number of PFC relays number of parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 with value 31 PFC e the Autochange function status disabled if 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 0 and otherwise enabled No Autochange disabled Autochange enabled PFC Parameter 8118 Parameter 8118 relays MAS DI4 Free A allowed ME Speed reg motor 1 Not allowed pc DI4 Free DI5 First PFC relay 8121 REG BYPASS Selects Regulator by pass control When enabled NO CTRL Regulator by pass control provides a simple control mechanism without a PID regulator Use Regulator by pass control only in special applications fout 4014 y a A gt ja B gt C A No auxiliary motors running B One auxiliary motor running C Two auxiliary motors running All parameters No Name Value 8122 PFC START DELAY Actual signals and parameters 265 Description Def FbEq Example In the diagram below the
88. 1 current in percent of nominal current TO60 Ion 50 60 distribution 0 0 100 0 6420 AL1RANGE60 TO70 0 0 100 0 6421 AL1RANGE70 Amplitude logger 1 current in percent of nominal current TO80 l2n 70 80 distribution 0 0 100 0 6422 AL1RANGE80 Amplitude logger 1 current in percent of nominal current TO90 l n 80 90 distribution 0 0 100 0 6423 AL1RANGE90 Amplitude logger 1 current in percent of nominal current TO lon over 90 distribution 0 0 100 0 6424 AL2RANGEOT Amplitude logger 2 selection with parameter 6404 0 10 distribution hours minutes seconds w m O 7 Amplitude logger 1 current in percent of nominal current l n 30 40 distribution A 0 1 Amplitude logger 1 current in percent of nominal current Ion 60 70 distribution 1 0 1 0 0 100 0 6425 AL2RANGE10 Amplitude logger 2 selection with parameter 6404 TO20 10 20 distribution 0 0 100 0 6426 AL2RANGE20 Amplitude logger 2 selection with parameter 6404 TO30 20 30 distribution e o 250 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 00 1000 t ON 6427 AL2RANGE30 Amplitude logger 2 selection with parameter 6404 TO40 30 40 distribution 0 0 1000 0 6428 AL2RANGE40 Amplitude logger 2 selection with parameter 6404 TO50 40 50 distribution IA OSOSCS SCSCSCS 6429 AL2ZRANGES5O Amplitude logger 2 selection
89. 1 0 1 4603 REV STEP Defines the reverse step frequency for the pump cleaning 0 0 sequence in percent of the nominal motor frequency parameter 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ 0 0 100 0 Reverse step frequency 1 0 1 4604 OFF TIME Defines the length of the interval between forward and 0 0 s reverse steps in the pump cleaning sequence in seconds 0 0 1000 0s Off time step interval 1 0 1s 4605 FWD TIME Defines the duration of each forward step in the pump 0 0s cleaning sequence in seconds 0 0 1000 0s Forward step duration 1 0 1s 4606 REV TIME Defines the duration of each reverse step in the pump 0 0s cleaning sequence in seconds 0 0 1000 0s Reverse step duration 1 0 1s 4607 TRIG TIME Defines the time for setting TIMER TRIG of parameter 4607 0 0 h PUMP CLEAN TRIG 0 0 200 0h Trigger time in hours 1 0 1h 4608 COUNT Number of steps to be performed in the pump cleaning sequence O Number of steps 1 AT M om E J gs i 5 C 1 5201 STATION ID Defines the address of the drive Two units with the same 1 address are not allowed on line Actual signals and parameters 245 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 5202 BAUD RATE Defines the transfer rate ofthelink ee 9 6 kbit s 9 6 kbit s 19 2 kbit s 19 2 kbit s 38 4 kbit s 38 4 kbit s 57 6 kbit s 57 6 kbit s 115 2 kbit s 115 2 kbit s must be used in all on line stations BNONE1 8 data bits no parity bit one stop bit b T ses a MESSAGES
90. 1 is active To control the direction parameter 1003 DIRECTION setting must be REQUEST DI1F 2R Start stop and direction commands through digital inputs DI1 and DI2 B Da DIZ Operation 0 0 ftp AO Stattoward O O O o Co f 1 Stamreverse Parameter 1003 DIRECTION setting must be REQUEST DI1P 2P 3 Pulse start through digital input DI1 0 gt 1 Start In order to start the drive digital input DI2 must be activated prior to the pulse fed to DI Pulse stop through digital input DI2 1 gt 0 Stop Direction through digital input DI3 O forward 1 reverse To control direction parameter 1003 DIRECTION setting must be REQUEST Note When the stop input DI2 is deactivated no input the control panel start and stop keys are disabled 168 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq COMM Fieldbus interface as the source for the start and stop commands ie control word 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 bits 0 1 The control word is sent by the fieldbus controller through the embedded fieldbus Modbus to the drive For the control word bits see section DCU communication profile on page 289 TIMED FUNC 1 Timed start stop control Timed function 1 active start timed function 1 inactive stop See parameter group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS TIMED FUNC 2 See selection TIMED FUNC 1 M2 2 2 2 2 TIMED FUNC 3 See selection T MED FUNC 1 TIMED FUNC 4 See selection TIMED FUNC 1 DI5 S
91. 10 Supervision status through RO 2 4 With option MREL 01 only 1805 Supervision status through DO 4022 4122 Sleep start according to supervision functions 4601 Pump clean trigger according to supervision functions Program features 135 Parameter lock The user can prevent parameter adjustment by activating the parameter lock E Settings Parameters 1602 PARAMETER LOCK and 1603 PASS CODE PID control There are two built in PID controllers in the drive e Process PID PID1 and e External Trim PID PID2 The PID controller can be used when the motor speed needs to be controlled based on process variables such as pressure flow or temperature When the PID control is activated a process reference setpoint is connected to the drive instead of a speed reference An actual value process feedback is also brought back to the drive The drive compares the reference and the actual values and automatically adjusts the drive speed in order to keep the measured process quantity actual value at the desired level reference The control operates on a 2 ms time level E Process controller PID1 PID1 has two separate sets of parameters 40 PROCESS PID SET 1 41 PROCESS PID SET 2 Selection between parameter sets 1 and 2 is defined by a parameter In most cases when there is only one transducer signal wired to the drive only parameter set 1 is needed Two different parameter sets 1 and 2 are used eg when the load of the mot
92. 10 V gt 0 100 PID setpoint externally See the manufacturer s 5 360 degree grounding under a clamp instructions An example of a connection using a two wire sensor is given on page 51 Tightening torque 0 4 N m 3 5 Ibf in 112 Application macros User macros In addition to the standard application macros it is possible to create two user macros The user macro allows the user to save the parameter settings including group 99 START UP DATA into the permanent memory and recall the data at a later time The panel reference is also saved if the macro is saved and loaded in local control The remote control setting is saved into the user macro but the local control setting is not The steps below show how to create and recall User macro 1 The procedure for the User macro 2 is identical only the parameter 9902 values are different To create User macro 1 e Adjust the parameters e Save the parameter settings to the permanent memory by changing parameter 9902 to 1 USER S1 SAVE SAVE ENTER MENU e Press ws Assistant Control Panel or ws Basic Control Panel to save To recall User macro 1 e Change parameter 9902 to 0 USER S1 LOAD SAVE ENTER MENU e Press ws Assistant Control Panel or ws Basic Control Panel to load The user macro can also be switched through digital inputs see parameter 7605 Note User macro load restores the parameter settings including group 99 START UP DATA Check that
93. 10 mA Not in use by default 0 10 V max 500 pe 6 GND Analog input circuit common 7 AO Output mequeney value 0 20 mA O O O 28 ii voltage output 24 V DC max 200 mA 10 6ND Auxiliary voltage output common m pcom Digital input common 12 pH Start forward If D11 DIZ the dive stops X1B 17 ROCOM Relay output 1 g E No fault Fault 1 ae U a Digital output max 100 mA A DOGND 1 See parameter group 12 CONSTANT 2 0 ramp times according to parameters SPEEDS 2202 and 2203 DI3 DI4 Operation parameter 1 ramp times according to parameters O O Set speed through Al1 2205 and 2206 1 JO Speed 1 1202 3 360 degree grounding under a clamp jo 1 Speed 2 1203 _ t t 0 4N 5 Ibf in Speed 3 7204 Tightening torque 0 4 N m 3 5 Ibf in Application macros 107 Motor potentiometer macro This macro provides a cost effective interface for PLCs that vary the speed output frequency of the motor using only digital signals To enable the macro set the value of parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO to 4 MOTOR POT For the parameter default values see section Default values with different macros on page 157 If you use other than the default connections presented below see section I O terminals on page 49 E Default I O connections X1A an e END Analog input cuit common 7 ao Output frequency value 0 20 mA A A 9 24V Auxiliary voltage output 24 V
94. 109 m s ISTA 1A 330 ft s 11 ms 330 ft s 11 ms Not allowed 76 cm 30 in 76 cm 30 in Materials Drive enclosure Package Disposal Technical data 329 PC ABS 2 mm PC 10 GF 2 5 3 mm and PA66 25 GF 1 5 mm all in color NCS 1502 Y RAL 9002 PMS 420 C hot dip zinc coated steel sheet 1 5 mm thickness of coating 20 micrometers extruded aluminium AlSi Corrugated cardboard The drive contains raw materials that should be recycled to preserve energy and natural resources The package materials are environmentally compatible and recyclable All metal parts can be recycled The plastic parts can either be recycled or burned under controlled circumstances according to local regulations Most recyclable parts are marked with recycling marks If recycling is not feasible all parts excluding electrolytic capacitors and printed circuit boards can be landfilled The DC capacitors contain electrolyte which is classified as hazardous waste within the EU They must be removed and handled according to local regulations For further information on environmental aspects and more detailed recycling instructions please contact your local ABB distributor Applicable standards IEC EN 61800 5 1 2003 IEC EN 60204 1 2006 IEC EN 61800 3 2004 e UL508C The drive complies with the following standards Electrical thermal and functional safety requirements for adjustable frequency a c power driv
95. 2201 ACC DEC COMM Acceleration deceleration ramp 40031 bit 1 2 SEL pair selection through 0301 FB 10 CMD WORD 1 bit 10 2209 RAMP COMM Ramp input to zero through 0301 40001 bit 6 40031 bit INPUT 0 FB CMD WORD 1 bit 13 with ABB 13 drives profile 5319 EFB PAR 19 bit 6 COMMUNICATION FAULT FUNCTIONS ABB DRV DCU 3018 COMM Determines drive action in case 43018 FAULT FUNC FAULT fieldbus communication is lost 3019 COMM 0 1 60 0 s Defines the time between 43019 FAULT TIME communication loss detection and the action selected with parameter 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC PID CONTROLLER REFERENCE SIGNAL SOURCE SELECTION ABBDRV DCU PID control reference REF2 40003 for REF2 COMM Al1 COMM Al1 276 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus Fieldbus control interface The communication between a fieldbus system and the drive consists of 16 bit input and output data words with ABB drives profile and 32 bit input and output words with DCU profile E Control word and Status word The Control word CW is the principal means of controlling the drive from a fieldbus system The Control word is sent by the fieldbus controller to the drive The drive switches between its states according to the bit coded instructions of the Control word The Status word SW is a word containing status information sent by the drive to the fieldbus controller E References References REF are 16 bit signed integers A negative reference eg reverse
96. 3 283 n 28 2 12 IO OM E E RED SE E 03x19A4 2 162 5t9 n 36 2 52 31 AAA EA A 03x34A1 2 270 922 33 1o 58 200 06 sr AA 03x 01A3 4 AN 03x 02A1 4 16 55 03x 02A6 4 21 72 03x 03A6 4 31 106 03x 04A5 4 40 137 03x 06A2 4 03 08A0 4 03x13A84 o3w34Ara aso mos 33 mo se 20 o sr roscatasa 440 1508 338 mo se 20 o 57 oswasada 530 1810 38 mo se 20 96 sr 00578903 xls D 324 Technical data E Noise Frame Noise level size dBA ro a lt 62 00578903 xls D Terminal and lead through data for the power cables Frame Max cable U1 V1 W1 U2 V2 W2 PE size diameter for NEMA 1 U1 V1 W1 Max terminal size Tightening Max clamp size Tightening U2 V2 W2 flexible rigid torque solid or stranded torque mm AWG Nm Ibfin mm AWG Nm Ibfin ma e 063 amo f 19 08 7 25 03 i2 10 Ri e os 4060 10 os 7 28 3 12 1 R is 06s 4060 10 os 7 28 3 12 1 es os im oomo 6 17 2 3 12 1 00578903 xls D Terminal and lead through data for the control cables Conductor size Tightening Solid or stranded Stranded with ferrule Stranded with ferrule raue without plastic sleeve with plastic sleeve Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max m2 AWG m AWG m AWG N m_ Ibf in Technical data 325 Electric power network specification Voltage Us Short circui
97. 305 EFB CTRL PROFILE setting is DCU PROFILE 40034 ACS310 STATUS 0304 FB STS WORD 2 ie the most significant word of the DCU profile 32 bit Status word Supported only by DCU profile ie when 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE setting is DCU PROFILE Note Parameter writes through standard Modbus are always volatile ie modified values are not automatically stored to permanent memory Use parameter 1607 PARAM SAVE to save all changed values Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 283 E Function codes Supported function codes for the holding 4xxxx register are Code Function name Additional information Hex dec 03 Read 4X Register Reads the binary contents of registers 4X references in a slave 03 device 06 Preset single 4X _ Presets a value into a single register 4X reference When 06 register broadcast the function presets the same register reference in all attached slaves 10 Preset multiple 4X Presets values into a sequence of registers 4X references When 16 registers broadcast the function presets the same register references in all attached slaves 17 Read Write 4X Performs a combination of one read operation and one write 23 registers operation function codes 03 and 10 in a single Modbus transaction Write operation is performed before the read operation Note In the Modbus data message register 4xxxx is addressed as xxxx 1 For example register 40002 is addressed as 0001 E Excep
98. 4 See selection TIMED FUNC 1 8127 MOTORS Sets the actual number of PFC controlled motors maximum 2 7 motors 1 speed regulated 3 connected direct on line and 3 spare motors This value includes also the speed regulated motor This value must be compatible with the number of relays allocated to PFC if the Autochange function is used If Autochange function is not used the speed regulated motor does not need to have a relay output allocated to PFC but it needs to be included in this value Number of PFC motors 1 1 8128 AUX START Sets the start order of the auxiliary motors EVEN ORDER RUNTIME EVEN Time sharing is active Evens out the cumulative run time of 1 RUNTIME the auxiliary motors The start order depends on the run times The auxiliary motor whose cumulative run time is shortest is started first then the motor whose cumulative run time is the second shortest etc When the demand drops the first motor to be stopped is the one whose cumulative run time is longest RELAY The start order is fixed to be the order of the relays ORDER 9802 COMM PROT Activates the external serial communication and selects the NOT SEL SEL interface NOT SEL STD MODBUS Embedded fieldbus ElA 485 interface I O terminals 1 23 26 See chapter Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus on page 277 268 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Oo 7 T a m Q 9901 LANGUAGE Selects the displ
99. 4025 WAKE UP DEV are not effective The sleep start and stop delay parameters 4024 PID SLEEP DELAY and 4026 WAKE UP DELAY are effective ON See selection DN OOO OOO o oey See selection DTN o INV See selection onan oeny See selection Dnon SUPRV1 The function is activated when parameter 3201 SUPERV 1 UNDER PARAM stays below the low limit defined by parameter 3202 SUPERV 1 LIM LO The internal sleep criteria set by parameters 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL and 4025 WAKE UP DEV are not effective The sleep start and stop delay parameters 4024 PID SLEEP DELAY and 4026 WAKE UP DELAY are effective SUPRV2 See selection SUPRV1 UNDER 10 UNDER SUPRV3 See selection SUPRV1 UNDER 11 UNDER i Actual signals and parameters 229 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 4023 PID SLEEP Defines the start limit for the sleep function If the motor 0 0 Hz LEVEL speed is below a set level 4023 longer than the sleep delay 4024 the drive shifts to the sleeping mode The motor is stopped and the control panel shows alarm message PID SLEEP Parameter 4022 SLEEP SELECTION must be set to INTERNAL Reference Sleep boost time 4030 t gt Sleep boost step 4031 1 Selected process actual Wake up delay value 4026 Wake up level deviation 4025 Output frequency t q Sleep delay peta 402 4 panel ES sg gt PID SLEEP 0 0 500 0 Hz Sleep start level 1 0 1 Hz 4024 PID SLEEP Define
100. 60 0 s DLY 4401 INLET PROT CTRL is taken on detection of low inlet pressure 0 1 1800 0 s Delay time 4408 INLET This reference is used after detection of low inlet pressure 0 0 FORCED REF See parameter 4401 INLET PROT CTRL WARNING Make sure that it is safe to continue operation using this reference 010 100 0 Forcedreference IO 4409 OUTLET PROT Enables and selects the mode of the primary supervision NOT SEL of pump fan outlet pressure Note Outlet protection is active only when the active reference is PID NOT SEL Primary outlet pressure supervision not used o ALARM Detection of high outlet pressure produces an alarm on the 1 control panel display Actual signals and parameters 239 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq PROTECT Detection of high outlet pressure produces an alarm on the control panel display The output of the PI controller is ramped down according to parameter 4417 PID OUT DEC TIME to the forced reference set by parameter 4476 OUTLET FORCED REF The drive will revert to the original reference if the pressure subsequently falls below the supervision level The following diagram describes the outlet pressure supervision function Measured outlet EXT2 reference from PID1OUT 2 2 4410 Al MEAS Selects the analog input for pump fan outlet pressure NOT SEL OUTLET supervision NOT SEL No analog input selected Pump fan outlet pressure monitored through analo
101. 7 50 SPEED 7 Constant speed 7 is used also with fault functions 3001 AI lt MIN FUNCTION and 3002 PANEL COMM ERR 0 0 500 0 Hz Output frequency in Hz 1 0 1209 TIMED MODE Selects timed function activated speed Timed function can CS1 2 3 4 EL be used to change between the external reference and constant speeds when parameter 1201 CONST SPEED SEL selection is TIMED FUNC 1 TIMED FUNC 4 or TIMED FUN1 amp 2 EXT CS1 2 3 When parameter 1201 CONST SPEED SEL TIMED FUNC 1 TIMED FUNC 4 this timed function selects an external speed reference or constant speed 1 timed function active 0 timed function inactive Timed function 1 4 0 External reference 1 Speed defined by par 7202 CONST SPEED 7 When parameter 1201 CONST SPEED SEL TIMED FUN1 amp 2 timed functions 1 and 2 select an external speed reference or constant speed 1 timed function active 0 timed function inactive Timed Timed Operation function 1 function 2 External reference 0 0 1 Speed defined by par 1202 CONST SPEED 1 1 Speed defined by par 1203 CONST SPEED 2 1 1 Speed defined by par 1204 CONST SPEED 3 al o 85 T TL N NN 176 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value CS1 2 3 4 1301 MINIMUM Al1 100 0 100 0 1302 MAXIMUM AI Defines the minimum value that corresponds to minimum 114 0 mA V signal for analog input Al1 When used as a reference the value corresponds to the reference
102. 78903 xls D Symbols IP20 cabinet UL open H1 height without fastenings and clamping plate H2 height with fastenings without clamping plate H3 height with fastenings and clamping plate IP20 NEMA 1 H4 height with fastenings and connection box H5 height with fastenings connection box and hood E Free space requirements Frame Free space required size Above Below On the sides mm in mm in mm in Ro Ra 75 3 7 3 o 0 00578903 xls D Technical data 323 Losses cooling data and noise E Losses and cooling data Frame size RO has natural convection cooling Frame sizes R1 R4 are provided with an internal fan The air flow direction is from bottom to top The table below specifies the heat dissipation in the main circuit at nominal load and in the control circuit with minimum load I O and panel not in use and maximum load all digital inputs in the on state and the panel fieldbus and fan in use The total heat dissipation is the sum of the heat dissipation in the main and control circuits Type Heat dissipation Air flow ACS310 Main circuit Control circuit x EJU Rated Ip Min Max W BTUHr W BTUHr W BTU Hr m h f min phase U LUi 24 20 208 o3x o2as 2 19 e 61 21 23 78 03x 03A9 2 31 1 61 21 23 78 03x05A2 2 38 130 95 32 26 00 03x 07A4 2 60 205 95 32 9 24 4 03x08A3 2 62 212 95 32 9 21 12 03x10A8 2 8
103. 800 0 s 2209 RAMP INPUT 0 Defines the source for forcing the ramp input to zero NOT SEL anal SEL Not selected CANE Digital input DI1 1 ramp input is forced to zero Ramp output will ramp to zero according to the used ramp time Actual signals and parameters 195 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq DI3 See selection DI1 DI4 See selection DI1 DI5 See selection DI1 COMM Fieldbus interface as the source for forcing ramp input to zero ie control word 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 bit 13 with ABB drives profile 5319 EFB PAR 19 bit 6 The control word is sent by the fieldbus controller through the embedded fieldbus Modbus to the drive For the control word bits see sections DCU communication profile on page 289 and ABB drives communication profile on page 284 DI1 INV Inverted digital input DI1 O ramp input is forced to zero Ramp output will ramp to zero according to the used ramp time DIZINV See section DHINV DISINV See selection DNN DISINV See selection DNV DISINV See selection DHINV i 2501 CRIT SPEED _ Activates deactivates the critical speeds function The SEL critical speed function avoids specific output frequency ranges Example A fan has vibrations in the range of 18 to 23 Hz and 46 to 52 Hz To make the drive to jump over the vibration frequency ranges Activate the critical speeds function Set the critical frequency ranges as in the figure below foutput
104. A 2 You cannot however set the value of parameter 1106 REF2 SELECT to Al1 e start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control How to edit and change parameter settings related to I O terminals Go to the Main menu by pressing Sul if you are in the LOC UMAIN MENU 1 Output mode otherwise by pressing repeatedly EP until you get to the Main menu Go the I O settings mode by selecting I O SETTINGS on the menu with keys CA and SY 7 and pressing wl Select the I O group eg DIGITAL INPUTS with keys CA and SY 7 and press After a brief pause the display shows the current settings for the selection Select the setting line with a parameter number with keys AS and SY 7 and press T Specify a new value for the setting with keys 45 and A Pressing the key once increments or decrements the value Holding the key down changes the value faster Pressing the keys simultaneously replaces the displayed value with the default value SAVE e To save the new value press wk e To cancel the new value and keep the original press rr PARAMETERS ASSISTANTS CHANGED PAR EXIT 1 00 00 ENTER LOC I O SETTINGS 1 DIGITAL INPUTS DI et UI O SETTINGS 1001 START STOP CEL EXIT 00 00 LOC UPAR EDIT 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS 7 1 CANCEL 00 00 SAVE LOC UPAR EDIT 1001 EXTL COMMANDS DI1P 2P 2 CANCEL 00 00 SAVE LOC UT O SETTINGS TOUT START STOP E1 DI 1001 DIR El
105. ACS310 User s Manual ACS310 Drives List of related manuals DRIVE MANUALS Code EN ACS310 Short Form User s Manual 3AUA0000044200 ACS310 User s Manual 3AUA0000044201 OPTION MANUALS Code EN MFDT 01 FlashDrop User s Manual 3AFE68591074 MREL 01 Relay Output Extension Module User s Manual for ACS310 3AUA0000035974 ACS350 2 2 2 MUL1 R1 Installation Instructions for ACS150 ACS310 ACS350 and 3AFE68642868 1 2 ACS355 MUL1 R3 Installation Instructions for ACS310 ACS350 and ACS355 3AFE68643147 1 2 MUL1 R4 Installation Instructions for ACS310 and ACS350 3AUA0000025916 1 2 SREA 01 Ethernet Adapter Module Quick Start up Guide 3AUA0000042902 2 SREA 01 Ethernet Adapter Module User s Manual 3AUA0000042896 3 MAINTENANCE MANUALS Code EN Guide for Capacitor Reforming in ACS50 ACS55 ACS150 ACS310 3AFE68735190 ACS350 ACS355 ACS550 and ACH550 1 Multilingual 2 Delivered as a printed copy with the drive optional equipment 3 Delivered in PDF format with the drive optional equipment All manuals are available in PDF format on the Internet See section Document library on the Internet on page 345 User s Manual ACS310 Table of contents TA 1 Safety UNE 4 Mechanical installation IR 6 Electrical installation Al 8 Start up and control with D gt I O 3AUA0000044201 Rev B EN 2009 ABB Oy All Rights Reserved EFFECTIVE 2009 09 29 Table of contents Table of contents List of
106. AN OUT This enables very simple program sequences by connecting several functions with the same physical wire eg to remove branches and leaves from a pipe by running the fan in reverse before normal operation One digital input DI5 can be programmed as a frequency input See section Frequency input on page 125 E Settings Group 16 SYSTEM CONTROLS DI as external Run enable fault reset or user macro change signal Group 18 FREQ IN amp TRAN OUT Delays in DI state changes 2109 DI as external emergency stop command source 2201 DI as acceleration and deceleration ramp selection signal 403914139 4228 4039 4139 4226 pressure switch Program features 125 E Diagnostics Actual signal Additional information 0160 DI status 0414 DI status at the time the latest fault occurred Programmable relay output The drive has one programmable relay output It is possible to add three additional relay outputs with the optional Relay Output Extension Module MREL 01 For more information see MREL 01 Relay Output Extension Module User s Manual 3AUA0000035974 English With a parameter setting it is possible to choose what information to indicate through the relay output Ready running fault alarm etc The update time for the relay output is 2 ms A value can be written to a relay output through a serial communication link E Settings Additional information Group 14 RELAY OUTPUTS RO value selections and operation times
107. CONTROL alternation applications where lower pressure peaks are desirable when a new auxiliary motor is started LOAD FD SET FlashDrop parameter values as defined by the FlashDrop 31 file Parameter view is selected by parameter 1611 PARAMETER VIEW FlashDrop is an optional device for fast copying of parameters to unpowered drives FlashDrop allows easy customization of the parameter list eg selected parameters can be hidden For more information see MFDT 01 FlashDrop User s Manual 3AFE68591074 English 3 USER S1 User 1 macro loaded into use Before loading check that LOAD the saved parameter settings and the motor model are suitable for the application USER S1 Save User 1 macro Stores the current parameter settings SAVE and the motor model USER S2 User 2 macro loaded into use Before loading check that 2 LOAD the saved parameter settings and the motor model are suitable for the application USER S2 Save User 2 macro Stores the current parameter settings SAVE and the motor model 9905 MOTOR NOM Defines the nominal motor voltage Must be equal to the value on the motor rating plate The drive cannot supply the motor with a voltage greater than the input power voltage Note that the output voltage is not limited by the nominal motor voltage but increased linearly up to the value of the input voltage Output voltage Input voltage 9905 Output frequency 9907 WARNING Never connect a motor to a drive which is c
108. E 36 62 97 es 7 7 4 5 5 6 4 0 5 6 7 7 4 4 ie T T 5 2 9 4 3 1 6 3 8 1 8 4 R 125 138 55 0 25 R 4 1 E EMC filter connected metal EMC filter screw installed 00578903 xIs D U EMC filter disconnected plastic EMC filter screw installed US parametrization E Definitions hin continuous rms input current for dimensioning cables and fuses at ambient temperature of 40 C lip continuous output current at max ambient temperature of 50 C 10 overloadability for one minute every ten minutes lon maximum continuous output current at ambient temperature of 40 C No overloadability derating 1 for every additional 1 C up to 50 C lomax maximum instantaneous output current Available for two seconds every ten minutes at start up or as long as allowed by the drive temperature Technical data 319 PN typical motor power The kilowatt ratings apply to most IEC 4 pole motors The horsepower ratings apply to most NEMA 4 pole motors RO R4 ACS310 is manufactured in frame sizes RO R4 Some instructions and other information that only concern certain frame sizes are marked with the symbol of the frame size RO R4 E Sizing Drive sizing is based on the rated motor current and power To achieve the rated motor power given in the table the rated current of the drive must be higher than or equal to the rated motor current Also the rated power of the drive must be higher tha
109. E Local control The control commands are given from the control panel keypad when the drive is in local control LOC indicates local control on the panel display Assistant panel Basic panel DIR 00 00 MENU The control panel always overrides the external control signal sources when used in local control E External control When the drive is in external remote control the commands are given through the standard I O terminals digital and analog inputs and or the fieldbus interface In addition it is also possible to set the control panel as the source for the external control External control is indicated with REM on the panel display Assistant panel Basic panel 0 5 A 10 7 DIR 00 00 MENU The user can connect the control signals to two external control locations EXT1 or EXT2 Depending on the user selection either one is active at a time This function operates on a 2 ms time level E Settings Panel key Additional information LOC REM Selection between local and external remote control Parameter 1102 Selection between EXT1 and EXT2 1001 1002 Start stop direction source for EXT1 EXT2 1103 1106 Reference source for EXT1 EXT2 Program features 119 E Diagnostics Actual signals Additional information 0111 0112 EXT1 EXT2 reference E Block diagram Start stop direction source for EXT1 The figure below shows the parameters that select the interface for start stop and direction for
110. EFERENCE SELECT 40 PROCESS PID SET 1 41 PROCESS PID SET 2 and 42 EXT TRIM PID 308 Fault tracing CODE FAULT CAUSE WHAT TO DO PAR USER LOAD C Incorrect user load Check parameter settings Following 6320 curve parameter must apply 0307 bit 15 setting 3704 LOAD FREQ 1 3707 LOAD FREQ 2 3710 LOAD FREQ 3 3713 LOAD FREQ 4 3716 LOAD FREQ 5 3705 LOAD TORQ LOW 7 lt IAIAIAIA 3706 LOAD TORQ HIGH 1 3708 LOAD TORQ LOW 2 lt 3709 LOAD TORQ HIGH 2 3711 LOAD TORQ LOW 3 lt 3712 LOAD TORQ HIGH 3 3714 LOAD TORQ LOW 4 lt 3715 LOAD TORQ HIGH 4 3717 LOAD TORQ LOW 5 lt 3718 LOAD TORQ HIGH 5 Fault tracing 309 Embedded fieldbus faults Embedded fieldbus faults can be traced by monitoring group 53 EFB PROTOCOL parameters See also fault alarm SERIAL 1 ERR E No master device If there is no master device on line parameter 5306 EFB OK MESSAGES and 5307 EFB CRC ERRORS values remain unchanged What to do e Check that the network master is connected and properly configured e Check the cable connection E Same device address If two or more devices have the same address parameter 5307 EFB CRC ERRORS value increases with every read write command What to do e Check the device addresses No two devices on line may have the same address E Incorrect wiring If the communication wires are swapped terminal A on one device is connected to terminal B on another device parameter 5306 EFB OK MESSAGE
111. EL 00 00 SAVE LOC UPAR EDIT 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM DIRECT 9 CANCEL 00 00 SAVE LOC UPAR EDIT 3405 OUTPUT1 UNIT HZ 3 CANCEL 00 00 SAVE 90 Control panels EXILIO AN Select the scalings for the signals by specifying the LOC UPAR EDIT minimum and maximum display values This has no effect if parameter 3404 3411 3418 is set to 9 DIRECT 3406 OUTPUTI MIN For details see parameters 3406 and 3407 0 2 0 HZ Signal 1 parameters 3406 OUTPUT1 MIN and 3407 OUTPUT1 MAX CANCEL 00 00 SAVE Signal 2 parameters 3413 OUTPUT2 MIN and 3414 LOC UPAR EDIT OUTPUT2 MAX 3407 OUTPUT1 MAX Signal 3 parameters 3420 OUTPUTS MIN and 3421 500 0 HZ OUTPUT3 MAX CANCEL 00 00 SAVE Control panels 91 E Assistants mode When the drive is first powered up the Start up assistant guides you through the setup of the basic parameters The Start up assistant is divided into assistants each of which is responsible for the specification of a related parameter set for example Motor set up or PID control The Start up assistant activates the assistants one after the other You may also use the assistants independently For more information on the tasks of the assistants see section Start up assistant on page 113 In the Assistants mode you can e use assistants to guide you through the specification of a set of basic parameters e start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control H
112. ELAY See parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 Available only if NOT SEL OUTPUT 2 the Relay Output Extension Module MREL 01 is connected to the drive 1403 RELAY See parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 Available only if NOT SEL OUTPUT 3 the Relay Output Extension Module MREL 01 is connected to the drive 1404 RO 1 ON Defines the operation delay for relay output RO 1 0 0s DELAY 0 0 3600 0s Delay time The figure below illustrates the operation on and release off delays for relay output RO Control event y ES eer Relay status XT o Ll l lt gt lt gt 1404 On delay 1405 Off delay 1405 RO 1 OFF Defines the release delay for relay output RO 1 0 0s DELAY 0 0 3600 0s Delay time See the figure for parameter 1404 RO 1 ON 1 0 1s DELAY 1406 RO2 ON See parameter 1404 RO 1 ON DELAY 0 0s DELAY 1407 RO 2 OFF See parameter 1405 RO 1 OFF DELAY 0 0s DELAY 1408 RO 3 ON See parameter 1404 RO 1 ON DELAY 0 0s DELAY 1409 RO 3 OFF See parameter 1405 RO 1 OFF DELAY 0 0s DELAY 1410 RELAY See parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 Available only if NOT SEL OUTPUT 4 the Relay Output Extension Module MREL 01 is connected to the drive 1413 RO 4 ON See parameter 1404 RO 1 ON DELAY 0 0s DELAY 1414 RO 4 OFF See parameter 1405 RO 1 OFF DELAY 0 0s DELAY N hed r C f AQT 1501 AO1 Connects a drive signal to analog output AO 103 CONTENT SEL X X Parameter index in group 07 OPERATING DATA Eg 102 0102 SPEED Actual s
113. EXT2 control selection Timed function 1 active EXT2 timed function 1 inactive EXT1 See parameter group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS D D 7 DI4 INV See selection D 1 INV DI5 INV See selection D 1 INV 1103 REF1 SELECT Selects the signal source for external reference REF1 See A 7 section Block diagram Reference source for EXT1 on page 119 KEYPAD Control panel 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 4 5 1 170 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq Al1 JOYST Analog input Al1 as joystick The minimum input signal runs 3 the motor at the maximum reference in the reverse direction the maximum input at the maximum reference in the forward direction Minimum and maximum references are defined by parameters 1104 REF1 MIN and 1105 REF1 MAX Note Parameter 1003 DIRECTION must be set to REQUEST Speed ref Par 1301 20 par 1302 100 REF1 1105 1104 1104 0 A 1 1104 ki 1105 Hysteresis 4 2V 4mA 6 10V 20mA Or duletale WARNING If parameter 1301 MINIMUM Al1 is set to O V and analog input signal is lost ie O V the rotation of the motor is reversed to the maximum reference Set the following parameters to activate a fault when analog input signal is lost Set parameter 1301 MINIMUM AI1 to 20 2 V or 4 mA Set parameter 3021 Al1 FAULT LIMIT to 5 or higher Set parameter 3001 Al lt MIN FUNCTION to FAULT UD See selection A 1 JOYST DI3U 4D R Digital input DI3
114. Error Feedback Reference 4006 UNITS Selects the unit for PID controller actual values See parameter 3405 OUTPUT1 UNIT selections 4007 UNIT SCALE _ Defines the decimal point location for PID controller actual values 1 0 1 0s 0 0 10 0s Filter time constant If parameter value is set to zero the 1 0 1s derivative filter is disabled O o 0 224 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 0 4 Example PI 3 141593 0 0000s 3 gt 4008 0 VALUE Defines together with parameter 4009 100 VALUE the scaling applied to the PID controller s actual values Units 4006 Scale 4007 1000 Internal scale X X Unit and range depend on the unit and scale defined by parameters 4006 UNITS and 4007 UNIT SCALE 4009 100 VALUE Defines together with parameter 4008 0 VALUE the scaling applied to the PID controller s actual values X X Unit and range depend on the unit and scale defined by parameters 4006 UNITS and 4007 UNIT SCALE 4010 SET POINT Selects the source for the process PID controller reference A 1 SEL signal 1 2 10 11 COMM AI1 Multiplication of fieldbus reference REF2 and analog input Al1 See section Reference selection and correction on page 277 DI3U 4D RNC Digital input DI3 Reference increase Digital input D14 Reference decrease Stop command resets the reference to zero The reference is not saved if the control source is cha
115. FbEq 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM Selects the first supervised signal Supervision limits are 103 defined by parameters 3202 SUPERV 1 LIM LO and 3203 SUPERV 1 LIM HI Example 1 If 3202 SUPERV 1 LIM LO lt 3203 SUPERV 1 LIM HI Case A 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 value is set to SUPRV1 OVER Relay energizes when value of the signal selected with 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM exceeds the supervision limit defined by 3203 SUPERV 1 LIM HI The relay remains active until the supervised value drops below the low limit defined by 3202 SUPERV 1 LIM LO Case B 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 value is set to SUPRV1 UNDER Relay energizes when value of the signal selected with 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM drops below the supervision limit defined by 3202 SUPERV 1 LIM LO The relay remains active until the supervised value rises above the high limit defined by 3203 SUPERV 1 LIM HI Value of supervised parameter HI par 3203 LO par 3202 Case A Energized 1 0 t Case B Energized 1 C C 0 t 208 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq Example 2 If 3202 SUPERV 1 LIM LO gt 3203 SUPERV 1 LIM HI The lower limit 3203 SUPERV 1 LIM HI remains active until the supervised signal exceeds the higher limit 3202 SUPERV 1 LIM LO making it the active limit The new limit remains active until the supervised signal drops below the lower limit 3203 SUPERV 1 LIM HI making it the active limit Case A 1401
116. Fieldbus reference Sain sa 0 66 410 249530eeen4 oe040en8 le eeid e e BE 279 Reference handling 23652 4s ek boo dS Ghee ebS ESR ee A e 280 Acllal Valle saling eiei SEL eh beter eile d eke w etek etek Paes Ree Ee ee eee 280 Modbus mapping 0 0 cc eee eee 281 R gister mapping sico ta corriendo ae Rees 281 Function codeS 0 ee ee eee ee eens 283 12 Table of contents Exception COdeS o 283 Communication profiles vurvocarac a A OEE EAS 8 284 ABB drives communication profile o oooooooooooooooooooooooooo 284 DCU Communication profile sine oie eee ewe Japo De Dw 289 14 Fault tracing What this chapter contains 0 000 eee 293 Safely Surdsa eda aadee Sooo sn dn SERS He DS ADS s bee ee eee eee se eee Seas SESS wes 293 Alarm and fault indications 5 sic 6se i oie 640d C9 EdS YOST V eS ova d ere dowd eee ee Dees 293 How to Meseta 293 Fault NISO Stanek esate sehen datan yee Mem danos nae ne ee ape eee elas 294 Alarm messages generated by the drive 0 0 0 eee 295 Alarms generated by the Basic Control Panel o ooooooooooooooooooooooo 299 Fault messages generated by the drive 00 0 cee 302 Embedded fieldbus faults sour ridad 309 No master device 0 0 0 0 cc eee eens 309 Same device addreSS 1 enn eet eee eee ens 309 ICON CC An onde e eee eee Bee eee ane Asan oan cee 309 15 Maintenance and hardware diagnostics What this chapter co
117. ILE OUTP LIM Monitoring the deviation between the reference and the actual value gives an indication of the general condition of the pump piping and valves CONTROL Signal 0127 PID 2 OUTPUT is monitored and compared to DEV2 parameter 4419 PROFILE OUTP LIM Monitoring the deviation between the reference and the actual value gives an indication of the general condition of the pump piping and valves APPL OUTPUT Signal 0116 APPL BLK OUTPUT is monitored and compared to parameter 4419 PROFILE OUTP LIM The signal constantly remaining at 100 may indicate a leak in the output piping 4419 PROFILE Supervision limit for the Application profile protection 100 0 OUTP LIM w N z2 O a r Actual signals and parameters 241 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 5000 500 0 Supenisiontimt poon Delay time for the Application profile protection ON DLY 0 00 100 00 h Delay time 0 01h Enables the Precharge function which calculates reference NOT SEL ENABLE steps NOT SEL Not enabled DI1 When DI1 is active 1 Precharge is active when the drive is 1 started If DI1 becomes inactive 0 before Precharge is finished normal PID control is enabled DIS ACTIVE DI1 INV When DI1 is inactive 0 Precharge is active when the drive is started If DI1 becomes active 1 before Precharge is finished normal PID control is enabled m ww ED DISINV 4422 PIPEFILL Defines the speed step used
118. L CW Bit5 0 CW xxxx x1 xx xxx1 1111 C State ie Bit4 1 mam State change ds ee Path described in example D CW Control word it6 BY lt ad a evr IGS CW xxxx x1 xx xx11 1111 Status wor gt ie Bit5 1 RFG Ramp function generator RFG ACCELERATOR f Par 0103 OUTPUT FREQ c A n Speed CW xxxx x1 xx x111 1111 Supported only by ABB DRV FULL ie Bit6 1 profile OPERATING SW Bit8 1 State transition also occurs if the fault is reset from any other source eg digital D lt input Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 289 E DCU communication profile Because the DCU profile extends the control and status interface to 32 bits two different signals are needed for both the control 0301 and 0302 and status 0303 and 0304 words The following tables describe the Control word content for the DCU profile DCU profile Control word parameter 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 Bit Name Value Information ooo S STOP 1 Stop according to either the stop mode parameter 2702 or the stop mode requests bits 7 and 8 Note Simultaneous STOP and START commands result in a stop command i AAA START Start Note Simultaneous STOP and START commands result in a stop command o No operation OSS REVERSE no Reverse direction The direction is defined by using the XOR operation on bit 2 and 31 sign of the reference E 0 Forward dresion SSS Dn a A 0 Enter external contol mode SSS 4 RESET 7 5 ExT a 0 Switc
119. MED FUNC 1 SRC 3629 TIMED FUNC 4 See parameter 3626 TIMED FUNC 1 SRC SRC ss See parameter 3626 TIMED FUNC 1 SRC 220 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 3701 USERLOAD C Defines supervision mode for the user adjustable load curve Motor torque Overload area 3706 3709 3712 3715 3718 3714 3717 Allowed operating area Underload area 3704 3707 3710 3713 3716 Output frequency Hz NOT SEL Supervision not active UNDERLOAD Supervision for the torque dropping below the underload 1 curve OVERLOAD Supervision for the torque exceeding the overload curve BOTH Supervision for the torque dropping below the underload curve or exceeding the overload curve 3702 USER LOAD C Defines the action wanted during load supervision FUNC FAULT A fault is generated when the condition defined by 3701 1 USER LOAD C MODE has been valid longer than the time set by 3703 USER LOAD C TIME ALARM An alarm is generated when the condition defined by 3701 2 USER LOAD C MODE has been valid longer than half of the time set by 3703 USER LOAD C TIME 3703 USER LOAD C Defines the time limit for generating a fault Half of this time 20 s TIME is used as the limit for generating an alarm 10 4005 3704 LOAD FREQ 1 Defines the frequency value of the first load curve definition 5 Hz point Must be smaller than 3707 LOAD FREQ 2 0 500 Hz Frequency dT 3705 LOAD TORQ Defines the torque v
120. N Drive control board power on time in days Counter cannot TIME HI be reset 0144 DRIVE ON Drive control board power on time in 2 second ticks 30 TIME LO ticks 60 seconds Counter cannot be reset 145 MOTOR TEMP Measured motor temperature Unit depends on the sensor type selected by group 35 MOTOR TEMP MEAS parameters 0158 PID COMM Data received from fieldbus for PID control PID1 and PID2 1 1 VALUE 1 0159 PID COMM Data received from fieldbus for PID control PID1 and PID2 1 1 VALUE 2 0160 DI 1 5 STATUS Status of digital inputs Example 10000 DI1 is on DI2 DI5 are off 4 1 1 FbEq l oh z l lt EN Q Il ted lt I 2s 1 1 162 Actual signals and parameters All actual signals No Name Value Description FbEq 0161 PULSE INPUT Value of frequency input in Hz 1 1 Hz FREQ 0162 RO STATUS Status of relay output 1 1 RO is energized 0 RO is de 1 1 energized 0163 TO STATUS Status of transistor output when transistor output is used as 1 1 a digital output 0164 TO Transistor output frequency when transistor output is used 1 1 Hz FREQUENCY Jas a frequency output 0173 RO 2 4 Status of the relays in the Relay Output Extension Module STATUS MREL 01 See MREL 01 Relay Output Extension Module User s Manual 3AUA0000035974 English Example 100 RO 2 is on RO 3 and RO 4 are off 0174 SAVED KWH Energy saved in kWh compared to the energy used when th
121. Name Value Description Def FbEq 0 0 100 0 Value in percent of the maximum feedback 1 0 1 4426 PIPEFILL Defines the maximum time Precharge is allowed to operate 0 NOT TIMEOUT If this time elapses PID is preset and PID is allowed to run SEL as it is parameterized with or without reference ramps O NOT SEL 0 NOT SEL 1 60000 s 1 60000 s Max Precharge operating time 4501 ENERGY Enables or disables the energy optimizer which optimizes OPTIMIZER the flux so that the total energy consumption and motor noise level are reduced when the drive operates below the nominal load The total efficiency motor and drive can be improved by 1 10 depending on load torque and speed e O A on IO A 4502 ENERGY Price of energy per kWh Used for reference when energy 0 00 PRICE savings are calculated See parameters 0174 SAVED KWH Currency 0175 SAVED MWH 0176 SAVED AMOUNT 1 0177 SAVED AMOUNT 2 and 0178 SAVED CO2 reduction in carbon dioxide emissions in tn 0 00 655 35 Price of energy per kWh 1 0 1 Currency 4507 CO2 CONV Conversion factor for converting energy into CO2 emissions 0 5 FACTOR kg kWh or tn MWh Used for multiplying the saved energy tn MWh in MWh to calculate the value of parameter 0178 SAVED CO2 reduction in carbon dioxide emissions in tn 0 0 10 0 Conversion factor 1 0 1 tn MWh tn MWh 4508 PUMP POWER Pump power when connected directly to supply DOL 100 0 Used for reference when ene
122. O If you have an Assistant Control Panel select the language the Basic Control Panel does not support languages See parameter 9907 for the values of the available language alternatives For instructions on how to set parameters with the Assistant Control Panel see section Assistant Control Panel on page 80 O Enter the motor data from the motor nameplate ABB Motors M2AA 200 MLA 4 IEC 200 MIL 55 continue with manual start up in a similar manner 380 V supply voltage 6210 C3 6312 03 le IEC 34 1 e motor nominal voltage parameter 9905 Setting of parameter 9905 is shown below as an example of parameter setting with the Basic Control Panel You find more detailed instructions in section Basic Control Panel on page 69 REM CHOICE Do you want to use the start up assistant Yes No EXIT 00 00 OK REM UPAR EDIT 9901 LANGUAGE ENGLISH CANCEL 00 00 SAVE _ 0 Note Set the motor data to exactly the same value as on the motor nameplate For example if the motor nominal speed is 1440 rpm on the nameplate setting the value of parameter 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED to 1500 rpm results in the wrong operation of the drive 60 Start up and control with I O To go to the Main menu press S if the bottom line shows OUTPUT otherwise press 777 repeatedly until you see MENU at the bottom 2 Press keys CANS Y until you see PAr and pr
123. O on the Par backup menu with keys CAS and SY 7 and press The display shows the following information about the drive where the backup was made DRIVE TYPE DRIVE RATING FIRMWARE You can scroll the information with keys 45 and Cv EXIT type of the drive rating of the drive in format XXXYZ where XXX Nominal current rating If present an A indicates a decimal point eg 9A7 means 9 7 A Y 2 200 V 4 400 V Z i European loading package n US loading package firmware version of the drive Press wa to return to the Par backup menu Control panels 99 LOC UMAIN MENU 1 PARAMETERS ASSISTANTS CHANGED PAR EXIT 00 00 ENTER LOC UPAR BACKUP 1 BACKUP INFO DOWNLOAD FULL SET DOWNLOAD APPLICATION DOWNLOAD USER SET1 EXIT 00 00 SEL LOC U BACKUP INFO DRIVE TYPE ACS310 3304 DRIVE RATING 9A741 3301 FIRMWARE EXIT 00 00 LOC UBACKUP INFO ACS310 3304 DRIVE RATING 9A74 F 3301 FIRMWARE 241A hex EXIT 00 00 LOC UPAR BACKUP 1 BACKUP INFO DOWNLOAD FULL SET DOWNLOAD APPLICATION DOWNLOAD USER SET1 EXIT 00 00 SEL 100 Control panels E I O settings mode In the I O settings mode you can e check the parameter settings related to any I O terminal e edit the parameter setting For example if 1103 REF1 is listed under Ain1 Analog input 1 that is parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT has value A 1 you can change its value to eg
124. PUMP PROTECTION Al as pump protection measurement source Program features 123 E Diagnostics Actual signal Additional information 0120 0121 Analog input values 1401 Al1 A2 signal loss Al1 LOSS Al2 LOSS AI1 Al2 signal below A 1 FAULT LIMIT I Al2 FAULT LIMIT 3021 3022 Al1 LOSS Al2 LOSS Al1 Al2 signal below limit A11 FAULT LIMIT Al2 FAULT LIMIT 3021 3022 PAR Al SCALE Incorrect Al signal scaling 7302 lt 1301 or 1305 lt 1304 Programmable analog output One programmable current output 0 20 mA is available Analog output signal can be inverted filtered and the maximum and minimum values can be adjusted The analog output signals can be proportional to motor speed output frequency output current motor torque motor power etc The update cycle for the analog output is 2 ms It is also possible to write a value to an analog output through a serial communication link E Settings Additional information Group 15 ANALOG OUTPUTS AO value selection and processing Group 35 MOTOR TEMP MEAS AO in motor temperature measurement E Diagnostics Actual signal Additional information 0124 PAR AO SCALE Incorrect AO signal scaling 1503 lt 1502 124 Program features Programmable digital inputs The drive has five programmable digital inputs The update time for the digital inputs is 2 ms It is possible to delay the state change of digital inputs with delays defined in group 18 FREQ IN amp TR
125. PUT1 MIN Sets the minimum display value for the signal selected by parameter 3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM See parameter 3402 SIGNAL1 MIN Note Parameter is not effective if parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM setting is DIRECT Setting range depends on parameter 3401 setting E 3407 OUTPUT1 Sets the maximum display value for the signal selected by MAX parameter 3401 SIGNAL 1 PARAM See parameter 3402 SIGNAL1 MIN Note Parameter is not effective if parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM setting is DIRECT Setting range depends on parameter 3407 setting Ll 3408 SIGNAL2 Selects the second signal to be displayed on the control 104 PARAM panel in the Output mode See parameter 3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM 0 101 178 Parameter index in group 07 OPERATING DATA Eg 102 1 1 0102 SPEED If value is set to 0 no signal is selected 3409 SIGNAL2 MIN Defines the minimum value for the signal selected by parameter 3408 SIGNAL2 PARAM See parameter 3402 SIGNAL1 MIN Setting range depends on parameter 3408 setting 3410 SIGNAL2 MAX Defines the maximum value for the signal selected by parameter 3408 SIGNAL2 PARAM See parameter 3402 SIGNAL1 MIN Setting range depends on parameter 3408 setting E 3411 OUTPUT2DSP Defines the format for the displayed signal selected by DIRECT FORM parameter 3408 SIGNAL2 PARAM ss See parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM 3412 OUTPUT2 Selects the unit for the for the displayed signal selected by UNIT parameter 3408 SIGNAL2 PARAM
126. Press to stop the motor To change the direction of the motor rotation If parameter 9914 PHASE INVERSION is not visible first set parameter 1611 PARAMETER VIEW to 3 LONG VIEW Invert the phases by changing the value of parameter 9914 to the opposite ie from 0 NO to 1 YES or vice versa Verify your work by applying input power and repeating the check as described above Set parameter 1611 back to 2 SHORT VIEW Check that the drive state is OK Basic Control Panel Check that there are no faults or alarms shown on the display If you want to check the LEDs on the front of the drive switch first to remote control otherwise a fault is generated before removing the panel and verifying that the red LED is not lit and the green LED is lit but not blinking Assistant Control Panel Check that there are no faults or alarms shown on the display and that the panel LED is green and does not blink LOC XXX FWD reverse direction direction 1611 PAR FWD 9914 PAR FWD 62 Start up and control with I O E How to perform a guided start up To be able to perform the guided start up you need the Assistant Control Panel Before you start ensure that you have the motor nameplate data on hand Apply input power The control panel first asks if you REM CHOICE want to use the Start up assistant e Press when is highlighted to run the Start up assistant No EXIT 00 00 OK EXIT Press 7
127. Ps pounds per square inch N N N DO on amp cubic feet per minute oot millions of gallons per day inHg inches of mercury C FPM feet per minute kilobytes per second O Q o gt lt Q e s N N NIN PhP a ay ay aj a a aj aj N OI BIO PO iw GO O 0O o0 J Oj OI 2 O0O N _ O TI e m Lo A V Hz h rpm kh C mA mV kW W kWh F hp MWh m s bar kPa GPM PSI CFM ft MGD FPM 212 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq ohm 33 pulses per minute a pulses per second liters per seconds liters per minute dT 8 cubic meters per second cubic meters per minute fo kiogramspersecon O a kiogramsperminte fe Kiograms per hour miar ooo a pascal gallons per second gallons per second gallons per minute e gallons per hour cubic feet per second cubic feet per minute f cubic feet per hour pounds par second Pounds per minute fa pomndsperhr o f feet per seconds feet per second inches ofwater inches of water gauge O e pounds per squared nel mison e milions ofrevolutions O days SS SCSSCSCSCSC inches ofwatercoumn dS Newton meter reference in percentage hr actual value in percentage fre deviation in percente Te Actual signals and parameters 213 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 3406 OUT
128. Reference increase Digital input DI4 Reference decrease Stop command resets the reference to zero Parameter 2205 ACCELER TIME 2 defines the rate of the reference change DI3U 4D Digital input DI3 Reference increase Digital input DI4 Reference decrease The program stores the active speed reference not reset by a stop command When the drive is restarted the motor ramps up at the selected acceleration rate to the stored reference Parameter 2205 ACCELER TIME 2 defines the rate of the reference change COMM Fieldbus FieldbusreferenceREF1 sid REF 1 COMM Al1 A ean of fieldbus reference REF1 and analog input Al See section Reference selection and correction on page 277 COMM AI1 Multiplication of fieldbus reference REF1 and analog input Al1 See section Reference selection and correction on page 277 DI3U 4D RNC Digital input DI3 Reference increase Digital input DI4 Reference decrease Stop command resets the reference to zero The reference is not saved if the control source is changed from EXT1 to EXT2 from EXT2 to EXT1 or from LOC to REM Parameter 2205 ACCELER TIME 2 defines the rate of the reference change Actual signals and parameters 171 All parameters No Name Value Description DI3U 4D NC Digital input DI3 Reference increase Digital input DI4 Reference decrease The program stores the active speed reference not reset by a stop command The reference is not saved if the control source is change
129. S 334 Technical data Dimension drawings 335 Dimension drawings Dimension drawings of the ACS310 are shown below The dimensions are given in millimeters and inches 336 Dimension drawings Frame sizes RO and R1 IP20 cabinet installation UL open R1 and RO are identical except for the fan at the top of R1 6 6 6 d 69 91 OL e a e a da o lt o OS Y ig y T 26 1 161 96 1 Frame sizes RO and R1 IP20 cabinet installation UL open 3AUA0000050967 A Dimension drawings 337 Frame sizes RO and R1 IP20 NEMA 1 R1 and RO are identical except for the fan at the top of R1 L YWEN 0Zdl LY PUE OY S ZIS auely FOF CBG Cll it V 9801LS00000VNVE 338 Dimension drawings Frame size R2 IP20 cabinet installation UL open Da 1 21 f 0 39 al B 000 LD JOIN rail 33 mm ESTA lt E FOR S i 07 6 6 E a cor O el 699 0L LO E Da MA i Er on a Lege 19 ETF AAA As DO DD D Caro nar se Oo
130. S CP A Assistant Control Panel 1 R700 ACS310 User s Manual in English 3AUA0000044201 EN R701 ACS310 User s Manual in German 83AUA0000048396 DE R702 ACS310 User s Manual in Italian 3AUA0000048398 IT R707 ACS310 User s Manual in French 3AUA0000048400 FR R708 ACS310 User s Manual in Spanish 3AUA0000048401 ES 1 The ACS310 is compatible with panels that have the following panel revisions and panel firmware versions To find out the revision and firmware version of your panel see page 68 Panel type Type code Panel revision Panel firmware version Basic Control Panel ACS CP C 1 13 or later Assistant Control Panel ACS CP A 2 04 or later Assistant Control Panel Asia ACS CP D 2 04 or later Note that unlike the other panels the ACS CP D is ordered with a separate material code 28 Operation principle and hardware description Mechanical installation 29 Mechanical installation What this chapter contains The chapter tells how to check the installation site unpack check the delivery and install the drive mechanically Checking the installation site The drive may be installed on the wall or in a cabinet Check the enclosure requirements for the need to use the NEMA 1 option in wall installations see chapter Technical data on page 317 The drive can be installed in three different ways depending on the frame size a back mounting all frame sizes b side mounting frame sizes RO R2
131. S s 12032 sorda 158 21 START STOP A dicated RAR A A A one nied Be ded 158 22 ACCEUDECEL 20d des 159 99 START UP DATA o css nr a a A Rae A Oe O 159 All actual signals caccudccrkde A Reed eR ER RR AAA ESSERE Es 160 U1TOPERATING DATA usos rro Adra 160 Oo FB ACTUAL SIGNALS 2x0 AAA 163 04 FAULT HISTORY ceca a a e a e e a a a a A RDA 165 All parameters 0c ccc eee eee eee 167 10 START STOP OUR cba Bie heen Bale a eae SS eb 167 11 REFERENCE SELEC P cris irradia or e AE i 169 Table of contents 11 12 CONSTANT SPEEDS 23cricrertra bra S808 AE SRR ES 173 TIANALOG INPUTS aura es bee 176 T AREL AY OUTPUTS aer aa ds ii ie dee 177 15 ANALES OUTPUTS sais acta di rd Seen es 180 16 SYSTEM CONTROLS dsc cisirts iDEN e E 181 18 FREQ IN amp TRAN OUT aos ora RS 186 20 LIMITS i g ss o tdo der rre nni Da tnia ig E n Die dae Ded I ORS O 188 21 START STOP pra ninata a a Ree ae and ag Bes bette E Ep Ea s 189 22 AGCELDEGCEL s civnied snesna teda paie he a a a Saw a ia 192 25 CRITICAL SPEEDS 003 990000080 INEA EDS OR ed E ea a ox 195 26 MOTOR CONTROL 05 EE A EY De eee 196 29 MAINTENANCE TRIG asigna e e ae da a 199 30 FAULT FONSTONS 2 0gorntarsar ito dees paws OS E 200 SLAUTOMANIG RESET aiiai eti croata riada rie 205 32 SUPERVISION ut Vale eid dit a 5 85d ee bh hee aes 207 33 INFORMATION 2 oscars RRA aa PekOR eee RRE 209 34 PANEL DISPLAY css condo od ad a ds A 210 35 MOTOR TEMP MEAS s a6562s56e84ee06 Ei eee eee 214 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS
132. SPEED 4 1 0 1 Speed defined by par 1206 CONST SPEED 5 0 1 1 Speed defined by par 1207 CONST SPEED 6 1 Speed defined by par 1208 CONST SPEED DI3 4 5 See selection D 1 2 3 TIMED FUNC 1 External speed reference speed defined by parameter 1202 CONST SPEED 1 or speed defined by parameter 1203 CONST SPEED 2 is used depending on the selection of parameter 1209 TIMED MODE SEL and the state of timed function 1 See parameter group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS TIMED FUNC 2 See selection TIMED FUNC 1 TIMED FUNC 3 See selection TIMED FUNC 1 TIMED FUNC 4 See selection TIMED FUNC 1 18 174 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq TIMED External speed reference or speed defined by parameter FUN1 amp 2 1202 CONST SPEED 1 1205 CONST SPEED 4 is used depending on the selection of parameter 1209 TIMED MODE SEL and the state of timed functions 1 and 2 See parameter group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS DI1 INV Speed defined by parameter 1202 CONST SPEED 1 is activated through inverted digital input DI1 0 active 1 inactive DI2 INV Speed defined by parameter 1202 CONST SPEED 1 is activated through inverted digital input DI2 0 active 1 inactive DI3 INV Speed defined by parameter 1202 CONST SPEED 1 is activated through inverted digital input DI3 O active 1 inactive DI4 INV Speed defined by parameter 1202 CONST SPEED 1 is activated through inverted digital input DI4 O a
133. SS when the analog input signal falls below the set level Do not set this limit below the level defined by parameter 1304 MINIMUM Al2 0 0 100 0 Value in percent of the full signal range 1 0 1 3023 WIRING FAULT Selects how the drive reacts when incorrect input power and ENABLE motor cable connection is detected ie the input power cable is connected to the motor connection of the drive Note Disabling wiring fault ground fault may void the warranty DISABLE Noan O ENABLE The drive trips on fault OUTP WIRING 3101 NR OF TRIALS Defines the number of automatic fault resets the drive performs within the time defined by parameter 3102 TRIAL TIME If the number of automatic resets exceeds the set number within the trial time the drive prevents additional automatic resets and remains stopped The drive must be reset from control panel or from a source selected by parameter 1604 FAULT RESET SEL Example Three faults have occurred during the trial time defined by parameter 3102 Last fault is reset only if the number defined by parameter 3707 is 3 or more Trial time X Automatic reset Number of the automatic resets 3102 TRIAL TIME Defines the time for the automatic fault reset function See 30 0 s parameter 3101 NR OF TRIALS 10 60005 3103 DELAY TIME Defines the time that the drive will wait after a fault before attempting an automatic reset See parameter 3101 NR OF TRIALS lf delay time is set to zero the
134. SS value remains unchanged and parameter 5307 EFB CRC ERRORS increases What to do e Check the ElA 485 interface connection 310 Fault tracing Maintenance and hardware diagnostics 311 Maintenance and hardware diagnostics What this chapter contains The chapter contains preventive maintenance instructions and LED indicator descriptions Maintenance intervals If installed in an appropriate environment the drive requires very little maintenance The table lists the routine maintenance intervals recommended ee ABB Maintenance Interval nenes of capacitors Every year when a Capacitors on page 313 stored Check of dustiness corrosion Every year and temperature Replacement of ue oe fan Every three years See Cooling fan on page 312 frame sizes R1 Check and of the Every six years See Power connections on page 314 power terminals Replacement of the battery in Every ten years See Changing the battery in the the Assistant Control Panel Assistant Control Panel on page 314 Consult your local ABB Service representative for more details on the maintenance On the Internet go to http www abb com drives and select Drive Services Maintenance and Field Services 312 Maintenance and hardware diagnostics Cooling fan The drive s cooling fan has a life span of minimum 25 000 operating hours The actual life span depends on the drive usage and ambient temperature When the Assistant Co
135. See parameter 4019 ACT1 MAXIMUM 100 MAXIMUM 1000 1000 See parameter 4019 4022 SLEEP Activates the sleep function and selects the source for the NOT SEL SELECTION activation input See section S eep function for the process PID PID1 control on page 139 NOT SEL No sleep function selected DI1 The function is activated deactivated through digital input 1 DI1 1 activation O deactivation The internal sleep criteria set by parameters 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL and 4025 WAKE UP DEV are not effective The sleep start and stop delay parameters 4024 PID SLEEP DELAY and 4026 WAKE UP DELAY are effective 228 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq INTERNAL Activated and deactivated automatically as defined by parameters 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL and 4025 WAKE UP DEV SUPRV1 The function is activated when parameter 3201 SUPERV 1 OVER PARAM stays over the high limit defined by parameter 3203 SUPERV 1 LIM HI The internal sleep criteria set by parameters 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL and 4025 WAKE UP DEV are not effective The sleep start and stop delay parameters 4024 PID SLEEP DELAY and 4026 WAKE UP DELAY are effective SUPRV2 See selection SUPRV1 OVER 10 OVER SUPRV3 See selection SUPRV1 OVER 11 OVER DI1 INV The function is activated deactivated through inverted digital 1 input DI1 1 deactivation O activation The internal sleep criteria set by parameters 4023 P D SLEEP LEVEL and
136. T1 DSP FORM Selects the unit for the for the displayed signal selected by parameter 3415 SIGNAL3 PARAM See parameter 3405 OUTPUT1 UNIT Sets the minimum display value for the signal selected by parameter 3415 SIGNAL3 PARAM See parameter 3402 SIGNAL1 MIN Setting range depends on parameter 3415 SIGNAL3 PARAM setting Sets the maximum display value for the signal selected by parameter 3415 SIGNAL3 PARAM See parameter 3402 SIGNAL1 MIN Setting range depends on parameter 3415 setting Activates the motor temperature measurement function and NONE selects the sensor type See also parameter group 15 ANALOG OUTPUTS The function is inactive The function is active The temperature is measured with one Pt 100 sensor Analog output AO feeds constant current through the sensor The sensor resistance increases as the motor temperature rises as does the voltage over the sensor The temperature measurement function reads the voltage through analog input Al1 2 and converts it to degrees centigrade The function is active Temperature is measured using two Pt 100 sensors See selection 7 x PT100 a C 1 2 The function is active Temperature is measured using three 3 Pt 100 sensors See selection 7 x PT100 Actual signals and parameters 215 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq PTC The function is active The temperature is supervised using 4 one PTC sensor Analog output AO feeds constant cu
137. T2 reference which becomes active when parameter 4010 SET POINT SEL value is set to INTERNAL and setpoint 2 is selected with the input defined by parameter 4039 INT SETPNT SEL 100 0 100 0 Value in percent 1 0 1 4037 INTERNAL Selects a constant value as the process PID controller SETPNT3 reference which becomes active when parameter 4010 SET POINT SEL value is set to INTERNAL and setpoint 3 is selected with the input defined by parameter 4039 INT SETPNT SEL 100 0 100 0 Value in percent 1 0 1 4038 INTERNAL Selects a constant value as the process PID controller SETPNT4 reference which becomes active when parameter 4010 SET POINT SEL value is set to INTERNAL and setpoint 4 is selected with the input defined by parameter 4039 INT SETPNT SEL 100 0 100 0 Value in percent 1 0 1 4039 INT SETPNT Selects the source for the selection of the internal setpoint NOT SEL SEL used as the process PID controller reference when parameter 4010 SET POINT SEL value is set to INTERNAL Example 4010 SET POINT SEL INTERNAL 4039 INT SETPNT SEL DI2 Digital input DI2 1 gt 4036 INTERNAL SETPNT2 is used as the reference NOT SEL 4011 INTERNAL SETPNT is used as the reference Oo Actual signals and parameters 233 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 0 4011 INTERNAL SETPNT is used 1 4036 INTERNAL 1 SETPNT2 is used DI1 2 Selects with digital inputs DI1 and DI2 which internal setpoint is u
138. TOP D motor See 8112 LOW FREQ 1 for a complete description of the operation The second auxiliary motor stops if e three auxiliary motors are running drive output frequency drops below limit 8114 1 Hz output frequency stays below the relaxed limit 8774 1 Hz for at least time 8116 AUX MOT STOP D 8115 AUX MOT Sets the start delay for the auxiliary motors START D The output frequency must remain above the start frequency limit parameter 8109 8110 or 8111 for this time period before the auxiliary motor starts See 8109 START FREQ 1 for a complete description of the operation 254 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 0 0 3600 0s Delay time 8116 AUX MOT Sets the stop delay for the auxiliary motors 3 0s STOP D The output frequency must remain below the low frequency limit parameter 8112 8113 or 8114 for this time period before the auxiliary motor stops See 8112 LOW FREQ 1 for a complete description of the operation 0 0 3600 0s Delay time 1 8117 NR OF AUX Sets the number of auxiliary motors Each auxiliary motor requires a relay output which the drive uses to send start stop signals The Autochange function if used requires an additional relay output for the speed regulated motor The following describes the set up of the required relay outputs Relay outputs As noted above each auxiliary motor requires a relay output which the drive u
139. Time of the peak value detection 00 00 00 hours minutes seconds 23 59 58 alal A at 1 2 3 4 5 x l 6409 CURRENT AT Current at the moment of the peak value PEAK 0 0 6553 5 A 0 1A 6410 UDC AT PEAK DC voltage at the moment of the peak value A TES 6411 FREQ AT Output frequency at the moment of the peak value PEAK 00 85888H2 o 6412 TIME OF Last reset date of the peak logger and amplitude logger 2 RESET 1 l N n Actual signals and parameters 249 All parameters o Name Value Description 0 65535 d Day of the last reset Format Date if the real time clock is operating The number of days elapsed after the power on if the real time clock is not used or was not set Last reset time of the peak logger and amplitude logger 2 z U o Ti le m 2 Il Q RESET 2 00 00 00 23 59 58 6414 AL1RANGEOT Amplitude logger 1 current in percent of nominal current 010 lon 0 10 distribution 0 0 100 0 6415 AL1RANGE10 Amplitude logger 1 current in percent of nominal current TO20 l2n 10 20 distribution 0 0 100 0 6416 AL1RANGE20 Amplitude logger 1 current in percent of nominal current TO30 l2n 20 30 distribution 0 0 100 0 6417 AL1RANGE30 TO40 0 0 100 0 6418 AL1RANGE40 Amplitude logger 1 current in percent of nominal current TO50 lon 40 50 distribution 0 0 100 0 6419 ALIRANGE5O Amplitude logger
140. V FULL REMOTE_CMD Fieldbus control enabled 1 10 11 286 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus ABB drives profile Control word parameter 5319 EFB PAR 19 Bit Name Value Comments SSS 12 Reserved 15 The table below and the state diagram on page 288 describe the Status word content for the ABB drives profile The upper case boldface text refers to the states shown in the diagram ABB drives profile EFB Status word parameter 5320 EFB PAR 20 fer est eo Correspond to states boxes in the state diagram RDY_ON 0 NOTREADYTO SWITCHON RDY_RUN o jorFiacTve o OPERATION INHIBITED CS oO No fade OFF_2_STA o oFFZACTVE OFF_3_STA o oFFS ACTIVE SWC_ON_INHIB de a oO No alarm AT_SETPOINT 1 OPERATING Actual value equals reference value is within tolerance limits ie the difference between the output frequency and the frequency reference is less than or equal to 4 1 of the nominal motor frequency Asymmetric hysteresis 4 when frequency enters the reference area 1 when frequency exits the reference area Actual value differs from reference value is outside tolerance limits REMOTE Drive control location REMOTE EXT1 or EXT2 O Drive control location LOCAL 10 ABOVE_LIMIT 1 Supervised parameter value exceeds the supervision high limit Bit value is 1 until the supervised parameter value falls below the supervision low limit See parameter group 32 SUPERVISION
141. Value Description Def FbEq 5303 EFB BAUD Defines the transfer rate of the link RATE 1 192 384 575 763 The same setting must be used in all on line stations 8 NONE 1 8 NONE 2 i 8 ODD 1 Odd parity indication bit one stop bit 8 data bits 8 EVEN 1 Even parity indication bit one stop bit 8 data bits 2 5305 EFB CTRL Selects the communication profile See section ABB DRV PROFILE Communication profiles on page 284 DCU PROFILE DCU profile ABB DRV LIM _ ABB drive limited profile ABB DRV ABB drive profile FULL 5306 EFB OK Number of valid messages received by the drive During MESSAGES normal operation this number increases constantly 0 65535 Number of messages 1 5307 EFB CRC Number of messages with an CRC cyclic redundancy ERRORS check error received by the drive If the number is high check CRC calculation for possible errors Note High electromagnetic noise levels generate errors 0 65535 Number of messages 1 1 5308 EFB UART Number of messages with a character error received by the ERRORS drive 0 65535 Number ofmessags m 5308 EFB STATUS EXECUT INT TIME OUT time out has occurred in the communication between the 2 network master and the EFB protocol CONFIG EFB protocol has a configuration error 3 ERROR OFF LINE EFB protocol is receiving messages that are NOT 4 addressed to this drive ON LINE EFB protocol is receiving messages that are addressed to 5 this drive Actual signals and
142. Warning Ensure motor and driven machine can be stopped using this stop mode Enter OPERATION ENABLED Note The Run enable signal must be active see parameter 1601 If par 1601 is set to COMM this bit also activates the Run enable signal Inhibit operation Enter OPERATION INHIBITED Note Bit 4 is supported only by ABB DRV FULL profile RAMP_OUT_ Enter RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR OUTPUT ZERO ABB DRV ENABLED FULL Force Ramp function generator output to zero Drive ramps to stop current and DC voltage limits in force RAMP_HOLD Enable ramp function RAMP_IN S c o OFF1 CONTROL 1 OFF2 CONTROL 1 T CONTROL 1 3 INHIBIT OPERATION Enter RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR ACCELERATOR ENABLED Halt ramping Ramp function generator output held Normal operation Enter OPERATING Force Ramp function generator input to zero Fault reset if an active fault exists Enter SWITCH ON INHIBITED Effective if par 1604 is set to COMM Continue normal operation ZERO 1 7 RESET 0 gt 1 Not in use ABB DRV FULL Control word 0 or Reference 0 Retain last Control word and Reference Control word 0 and Reference 0 Fieldbus control enabled Reference and deceleration acceleration ramp are locked EXT CTRL LOC 1 Select external control location EXT2 Effective if par 1102 is set to COMM Select external control location EXT1 Effective if par 1102 is set to COMM Note Bit 10 is supported only by ABB DR
143. ad only copy of the Fieldbus Status word 0000 FFFF Status word hex 6401 PVL SIGNAL Defines the signal logged for peak value 103 X X Parameter index in group 07 OPERATING DATA Eg 102 1 1 0102 SPEED 6402 PVL FILTER Defines the filter time for peak value logging 0 1s TIME 0 0 120 0s Filter time 248 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq Defines the source for the reset of the peak value logger NOT SEL RESET and amplitude logger 2 Resetting always resets both loggers DI1 INV Reset loggers on the falling edge of DI1 DI2 INV See selection D 1 INV DI3 INV See selection D 1 INV i 1 2 3 4 2 DI4 INV See selection D11 INV DI5 INV See selection D 1 INV 6404 AL2 SIGNAL Defines the signal logged for amplitude logger 2 X Parameter index in group 01 OPERATING DATA Eg 102 0102 SPEED 6405 AL2 SIGNAL Defines the base value from which the percentage BASE distribution is calculated Representation and default value depends on the signal selected with parameter 6404 AL2 SIGNAL 6406 PEAK VALUE Detected peak value of the signal selected with parameter 6401 PVL SIGNAL 6407 PEAK TIME 1 Date of the peak value detection 0 65535 d Day on which the peak value was detected Format Date if the real time clock is operating The number of days elapsed after the power on if the real time clock is not used or was not set 6408 PEAK TIME 2
144. al joue C494 d Ldld xOLLV OLOV pares ZJ9J joUed 391 Ld poro E ai EL VLLY LOY NINO JOMOd enbo I1ZOv vYLOv uonoajas joajas 391 21X3 iv co o ba Jou joueY joajas 391 11X3 Y ZJ9J J 9ued emg ELY Loly Izor vior LOV NNOO J MOd enbJo juang IV u01 99 S pe did 138 Program features E Settings fom wo ooo ee 1107 REF2 minimum limit 1501 PID2 output external controller connection to AO 9902 PID control macro selection Group 40 PROCESS PID SET PID1 settings 1 41 PROCESS PID SET 2 Group 42 EXT TRIM PID PID2 settings E Diagnostics Actual signal Additional information 0126 0127 PID 1 2 output value 0130 0131 PID 1 2 feedback value 0132 0133 PID 1 2 deviation 0128 0129 PID 1 2 setpoint value Program features 139 Sleep function for the process PID PID1 control The sleep function operates on a 2 ms time level The block diagram below illustrates the sleep function enable disable logic The sleep function can be put into use only when the PID control is active refActive PIDCtrlActive modulating 1 1 Activate sleeping 0 Deactivate sleeping 2 1 Activate sleep boost 0 Deactivate sleep boost Mot speed Actual speed of the motor refActive The reference EXT REF2 is in use See parameter 1102 PIDCtriActive 9902 is PID CONTROL modulating The inverter IGBT control i
145. als If more than one signals have been selected to be monitored see page 77 you can browse them in the Output mode To browse the signals forward press key 4 gt repeatedly To browse them backward press key Cv repeatedly Control panels 75 E Reference mode In the Reference mode you can e set the frequency reference e start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control How to set the frequency reference Go to the Main menu by pressing 7 if you are in the Output mode otherwise by pressing U7 repeatedly until you see MENU at the bottom If the drive is in remote control REM shown on the left switch to local control by pressing 2 The display briefly shows LoC before switching to local control Note With group 11 REFERENCE SELECT you can allow the reference modification in remote control REM If the panel is not in the Reference mode rEF not visible press key CAD or SY until you see rEF and then press 537 Now the display shows the current reference value with under the value 4911 FWD e To increase the reference value press Aa e To decrease the reference value press Cv 5 Q 0 HZ The value changes immediately when you press the FWD key It is stored in the drive permanent memory and restored automatically after power switch off 76 Control panels E Parameter mode In the Parameter mode you can e view and change paramete
146. alue of the first underload curve 10 LOW 1 definition point Must be smaller than 3706 LOAD TORQ HIGH 1 oeo one SSS S e 3706 LOAD TORQ Defines the torque value of the first overload curve definition 300 HIGH 1 point Actual signals and parameters 221 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 0 600 Torus ELY 3707 LOAD FREQ 2 Defines the frequency value of the second load curve 25 Hz definition point Must be smaller than 3710 LOAD FREQ 3 0500 Hz Frequency OOOO y ST 3708 LOAD TORQ Defines the torque value of the second underload curve 15 LOW 2 definition point Must be smaller than 3709 LOAD TORQ HIGH 2 0 600 O VEL 3709 LOAD TORQ Defines the torque value of the second overload curve 300 HIGH 2 definition point 0 600 one SSCS 3710 LOAD FREQ 3 Defines the frequency value of the third load curve definition 43 Hz point Must be smaller than 3713 LOAD FREQ 4 0 500 Hz Frequency fr 3711 LOAD TORQ Defines the torque value of the third underload curve 25 LOW 3 definition point Must be smaller than 3712 LOAD TORQ HIGH 3 0 600 O ELY 3712 LOAD TORQ Defines the torque value of the third overload curve 300 HIGH 3 definition point 0 600 fome SS ea 3713 LOAD FREQ 4 Defines the frequency value of the fourth load curve 50 Hz definition point Must be smaller than 3716 LOAD FREQ 5 0 500 Hz Frequency O o e 3714 LOAD TORQ Defines the torque value of the fourth
147. ameter 4210 ie signal 0129 PID 2 SETPNT value O Z N e sistas Q LIN i Sl Q z PID2OUTPUT PID2 output ie signal 0127 PID 2 OUTPUT value 2 4229 OFFSET 4230 TRIM MODE 4231 TRIM SCALE UM 4401 INLET PROT Enables and selects the mode of the primary supervision CTRL of pump fan inlet pressure Note Inlet protection is active only when the active reference is PID NOT SEL Primary inlet pressure supervision not used ALARM Detection of low inlet pressure generates an alarm on the 1 control panel display Actual signals and parameters 237 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq PROTECT Detection of low inlet pressure generates an alarm onthe 2 control panel display The output of the PI controller is ramped down according to parameter 4417 PID OUT DEC TIME to the forced reference set by parameter 4408 INLET FORCED REF The drive will revert to the original reference if the pressure subsequently exceeds the supervision level The following diagram describes the inlet pressure supervision function Measured inlet pressure EXT2 reference from PID1OUT FAULT Detection of low inlet pressure trips the drive on a fault 3 INLET supervision an Pumplfan inlet pressure monitored through analog input AH 1 Ag o seseina OOOO p Sets the supervision limit for the primary inlet pressure measurement If the value of the selected input falls below this limit the action define
148. ameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO The change is only allowed when the drive is stopped During the change the drive will not start Note Always save the User parameter set with parameter 9902 after changing any parameter setting or reperforming the motor identification The last settings saved by the user are loaded into use whenever the power is switched off and on again or the parameter 9902 setting is changed Any unsaved changes will be lost Note The value of this parameter is not included in the User parameter sets A setting once made remains despite User parameter set change Note Selection of User parameter set 2 can be supervised through relay outputs RO 1 4 and digital output DO See parameters 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 1403 RELAY OUTPUT 3 1410 RELAY OUTPUT 4 and 1805 DO SIGNAL NOT SEL User parameter set change is not possible through a digital input Parameter sets can be changed only from the control panel User parameter set control through digital input DI1 Falling 1 edge of digital input DI1 User parameter set 1 is loaded into use Rising edge of digital input DI1 User parameter set 2 is loaded into use See selection D 1 2 i See selection DI1 See selection DI1 See selection DI1 DI DI1 INV User parameter set control through inverted digital input DI1 Falling edge of inverted digital input DI1 User parameter set 2 is loaded into use Rising edge of inverted digital input DI1 User parameter set 1
149. and control interfaces Operation principle The ACS310 is a wall or cabinet mountable drive for controlling AC induction motors The figure below shows the simplified main circuit diagram of the drive The rectifier converts three phase AC voltage to DC voltage The capacitor bank of the intermediate circuit stabilizes the DC voltage The inverter converts the DC voltage back to AC voltage for the AC motor Rectifier Intermediate Inverter circuit 24 Operation principle and hardware description Product overview E Layout The layout of the drive is presented below The figure shows a frame size R2 drive The construction of the different frame sizes RO R4 varies to some extent Covers on R2 ABB 0 Power 0 Faut ES Covers off R2 FO N 8 AIO TN aS x M o Sy Sse o 12 11 el 14 13 A Poo OT EMC filter grounding screw EMC Note The screw is on the front in frame size R4 Varistor grounding screw VAR ElA 485 connection Jumper J701 for connecting ElA 485 termination resistor O connections Switch S1 for selecting voltage or current for analog inputs Input power connection U1 V1 W1 and motor connection U2 V2 W2 Braking chopper connection is disabled I O clamping plate Clamping plate Operatio
150. and parameters Fieldbus equivalent Example If 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ see page 189 is set from an external control system an integer value of 1 corresponds to 0 1 Hz All the read and sent values are limited to 16 bits 32768 32767 Actual signals and parameters 157 Default values with different macros When application macro is changed 9902 APPLIC MACRO the software updates the parameter values to their default values The table below shows the parameter default values for different macros For other parameters the default values are the same for all macros See the parameter list starting on page 167 Name ABB ALTERNA MOTOR HAND PID PFC SPFC Selection A TE POT AUTO o CONTROL CONTROL 9902 APPLIC 2 3 4 5 jis MACRO ABB 3 WIRE E MOTOR aa PID en POT CONTROL CONTROL CONTROL 1001 EXT1 oe 2 R a pa 2 m 2 A 1002 EXT2 NOT SEL ii SEL e SEL call SEL sai 4 cc eae COMMANDS 1102 EXT1 EXT2 EXT1 EXT1 EXT1 EXT1 ppp pe SEL 1103 REF1 NC 4D Al1 SELECT 1106 REF2 PID1OUT PID10UT PID1OUT SELECT 1201 CONST DI3 4 DI4 5 DI3 4 DI5 NOT SEL DI3 NOT SEL NOT SEL sa SEL 1304 MINIMUM Al2 10 10 10 il FAULT 1 FAULT 1 a 1 ITE 1 FAULTC 1 FAULT 1 E 2008lMAXIMUM 500Hz 50 0Hz 50 0Hz 50 0Hz 50 0Hz 50 0Hz 520Hz 52 0 Hz FREQ 2201 ACC DEC 1 2 NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL SEL 2202 ACCELER 50s 50s 50s 50s 50s 50s 50s 30 0s TIME 1 2203 DECELER 5 0s 30 0 s TIME 1
151. aoan E LEC O po LC I II 2 RS 7002 INTEGRATIO 60 0s 60 0s 60 0s 3 0s 3 0s N TIME 4101 GAIN no 10 ttf 7105 INTEGRATIO 60 0 s 60 0 s 60 0 s 3 0s 3 0s N TIME 8116 AUX MOT 20 0s STOP D m NOT SEL NOT SEL NOTSEL NOTSEL NOTSEL NOTSEL NOT SEL INTERV 8123 PFC ENABLE NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL ACTIVE SPFC ACTIVE 158 Actual signals and parameters Actual signals in the short parameter view Actual signals in the short parameter view No Name Value Description FbEq 04 FAULT HISTORY Fault history read only See group 04 FAULT HISTORY in the list of all parameters 0401 LAST FAULT Code of the latest fault 1 1 Parameters in the short parameter view Parameters in the short parameter view No Name Value Description Def FbEq 11 REFERENCE Panel reference type external control location selection and SELECT external reference sources and limits See group 77 REFERENCE SELECT in the list of all parameters en REF1 MAX Defines the maximum value for external reference REF 1 indica CONSTANT Constant speed drive output frequency selection and SPEEDS values See group 12 CONSTANT SPEEDS in the list of all parameters 1202 CONST Defines constant drive output frequency 1 E RRA OH SPEED 1 RRA 6 0 H 1203 CONST Defines constant drive output frequency 2 E 10 0 H SPEED 2 U 12 0 H 1204 CONST Defines constant drive output frequency 3 5 0 H SPEED 3 8 0 H 13 ANALOG INPUTS Analog input signal p
152. arameter and signal values menus or lists Shows also fault and alarm codes d Lower left and center Panel operation state OUTPUT Output mode PAR Parameter mode MENU Main menu ENEJ Fault mode e Lower right Indicators FWD forward REV reverse direction of the motor rotation Flashing slowly stopped Flashing rapidly running not at setpoint Steady running at setpoint SH Displayed value can be modified in the Parameter and Reference modes 2 RESET EXIT Exits to the next higher menu level without saving changed values Resets faults in the Output and Fault modes 3 MENU ENTER Enters deeper into menu level In the Parameter mode saves the displayed value as the new setting 4 Up Scrolls up through a menu or list Increases a value if a parameter is selected Increases the reference value in the Reference mode Holding the key down changes the value faster 5 Down e Scrolls down through a menu or list Decreases a value if a parameter is selected Decreases the reference value in the Reference mode Holding the key down changes the value faster 6 LOC REM Changes between local and remote control of the drive DIR Changes the direction of the motor rotation 28 STOP Stops the drive in local control START Starts the drive in local control Control panels 71 E Operation You operate the co
153. arately powered sensor is used The figure below gives an example of a connection using a two wire sensor Process actual value measurement or reference 4 20 mA Rin 100 ohm Auxiliary voltage output non isolated 24 V DC max 200 mA Note The sensor is supplied through its current output Thus the output signal must be 4 20 mA a pav 52 Electrical installation E Default I O connection diagram The default connection of the control signals depends on the application macro in use which is selected with parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO The default macro is the ABB standard macro It provides a general purpose I O configuration with three constant speeds Parameter values are the default values given in section Default values with different macros on page 157 For information on other macros see chapter Application macros on page 107 The default I O connections for the ABB standard macro are given in the figure below X1A a GND Analog input circuit common ft tov Reference voltage 10 V DC max 10 mA Not in use by default 0 10 V max 500 m 6 GND Analog input circuit common 17 AO Output mequeney value 0 20 mA 27 a 2 zav ain volage output 24 V DC max 200 mA T0 GND Auxiliary voltage output common 11 BCom Digital input common azon Stop 0 Start 1 SSS X1B 17 ROCOM Relay output 1 ON No fault Fault 1 O ra 821 pour 22 DOGND 1
154. ation entails a clearance and creeping distance of 8 mm 400 500 V AC equipment If the thermistor assembly does not fulfill the requirement the other I O terminals of the drive must be protected against contact or a thermistor relay must be used to isolate the thermistor from the digital input E Settings Parameter Additional information 13 ANALOG INPUTS Analog input settings 15 ANALOG OUTPUTS Analog output settings 35 MOTOR TEMP MEAS Motor temperature measurement settings At the motor end the cable shield should be earthed through eg a 3 3 nF capacitor If this is not possible the shield is to be left unconnected E Diagnostics Actual value Additional information 0145 Motor temperature Alarm Fault Additional information MOTOR TEMP MOT OVERTEMP Excessive motor temp Program features 143 Timed functions A variety of drive functions can be time controlled eg start stop and EXT1 EXT2 control The drive offers four start and stop times START TIME 1 START TIME 4 STOP TIME 1 STOP TIME 4 e four start and stop days START DAY 1 START DAY 4 STOP DAY 1 STOP DAY 4 e four timed functions for collecting the selected time periods 1 4 together TIMED FUNC 1 SRC TIMED FUNC 4 SRC e booster time an additional booster time connected to timed functions A timed function can be connected to multiple time periods Time period 1 3602 START TIME 1 3603 STOP TIME 1 3604 START DAY 1 3605 STOP DAY
155. ault I O connections X1A 1 sor Sianal able sted sree 2 Jan eth fa Reference voltage 10 V DC max 10 mA Not in use by default 0 10 V max 500 on 6 GND Analog input circuit common 7 AO Output frequency value 0 20 mA ATEH a E p o free osito volage output 24 V DC max 200 mA 10 eno Auxiliary voltage output common m pcom Digital inputcommon 12 pm Stop 0 Start 1 OOS X1B 17 ROON Ea Q e re a Digital output max 100 mA ARE poouTL_ e No fault Fault 1 Relay output 1 No fault Fault 1 22 DOGND 1 See parameter group 12 CONSTANT 2 0 ramp times according to parameters SPEEDS 2202 and 2203 DI3 DI4 Operation parameter 1 ramp times according to parameters lO O Setspeed through Al1 2205 and 2206 O peec 1 ee 3 360 degree grounding under a clamp o 1 peed 2 1203 _ Tightening torque 0 4 N m 3 5 Ibf in Speed 3 1204 Application macros 105 3 wire macro This macro is used when the drive is controlled using momentary push buttons It provides three constant speeds To enable the macro set the value of parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO to 2 3 WIRE For the parameter default values see section Default values with different macros on page 157 If you use other than the default connections presented below see section I O terminals on page 49 Note When the stop input DI2 is deactivated no input the control panel star
156. ay language used on the Assistant Control Panel Note With the ACS CP D Assistant Control Panel the following languages are available English 0 Chinese 1 Korean 2 and Japanese 3 e A 5 9902 APPLIC Selects the application macro See chapter Application ABB MACRO macros on page 101 STANDA RD ABB Standard macro for constant speed applications 1 STANDARD 3 WIRE 3 wire macro for constant speed applications 2 ALTERNATE Alternate macro for start forward and start reverse 3 applications OTOR POT Motor potentiometer macro for digital signal speed control applications HAND AUTO Hand Auto macro to be used when two control devices are 5 connected to the drive Device 1 communicates through the interface defined by external control location EXT1 e Device 2 communicates through the interface defined by external control location EXT2 EXT1 or EXT2 is active ata time Switching between EXT1 2 through digital input PID CONTROL PID control For applications in which the drive controls a process value eg pressure control by the drive running the pressure boost pump Measured pressure and the pressure reference are connected to the drive PFC PFC Pump and fan control macro for pump alternation CONTROL applications a a or BI OG PO Bl 0 N 0 Actual signals and parameters 269 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq SPFC SPFC Soft pump and fan control macro for pump
157. bles in frame sizes R3 and R4 I O clamping plate for frame sizes RO R2 clamps and screws e panel cover 3 e mounting template integrated into the package 4 e short form user s manual 5 e possible options Basic Control Panel Assistant Control Panel or complete User s Manual Checking the delivery Check that there are no signs of damage Notify the shipper immediately if damaged components are found Before attempting installation and operation check the information on the type designation label of the drive to verify that the drive is of the correct type See section Type designation label on page 26 32 Mechanical installation Installing The instructions in this manual cover drives with the IP20 degree of protection To comply with NEMA 1 use the MUL1 R1 MUL1 R3 or MUL1 R4 option kit which is delivered with multilingual installation instructions 3AFE68642868 3AFE68643147 or 3AUA0000025916 respectively E Install the drive Install the drive with screws or on a DIN rail as appropriate Note Make sure that dust from drilling does not enter the drive during the installation With screws 1 Mark the hole locations using for example the mounting template cut out from the package The locations of the holes are also shown in the drawings in chapter Dimension drawings on page 335 The number and location of the holes used depend on how the drive is installed a back mounting frame si
158. bly E Drive Do not make any voltage tolerance or insulation resistance tests for example hi pot or megger on any part of the drive as testing can damage the drive Every drive has been tested for insulation between the main circuit and the chassis at the factory Also there are voltage limiting circuits inside the drive which cut down the testing voltage automatically E Input power cable Check the insulation of the input power cable according to local regulations before connecting to the drive 46 Electrical installation E Motor and motor cable Check the insulation of the motor and motor cable as follows 1 Check that the motor cable is connected to the motor and disconnected from the drive output terminals U2 V2 and W2 2 Measure the insulation resistance between each phase conductor and the Protective Earth conductor using a measuring voltage of 500 V DC The insulation resistance of an ABB motor must exceed 100 Mohm reference value at 25 C or 77 F For the insulation resistance of other motors please consult the manufacturer s instructions Note Moisture inside the motor casing will reduce the insulation resistance If moisture is suspected dry the motor and repeat the measurement Checking the compatibility with IT ungrounded and corner grounded TN systems WARNING Disconnect the internal EMC filter when installing the drive on an IT system an ungrounded power system or a high res
159. cation of the fan cable connector in frame size R2 The inside views in different frame sizes are not identical but the fan cable connector is always on the control board that is against the front of the drive 7 Free the fan cable from the clip in the fan holder 8 Remove the fan from the holder 9 Install the new fan in reverse order 10 Restore power Capacitors E Reforming the capacitors The capacitors must be reformed if the drive has been stored for a year See section Type designation label on page 26 for how to find out the manufacturing time from the serial number For information on reforming the capacitors refer to Guide for Capacitor Reforming in ACS50 ACS55 ACS150 ACS310 ACS350 ACS355 314 Maintenance and hardware diagnostics ACS550 and ACH550 3AFE68735190 English available on the Internet go to http www abb com and enter the code in the Search field Power connections WARNING Read and follow the instructions in chapter Safety on page 15 Ignoring the instructions can cause physical injury or death or damage to the equipment 1 Stop the drive and disconnect it from the power line Wait for five minutes to let the drive DC capacitors discharge Ensure by measuring with a multimeter impedance at least 1 Mohm that there is no voltage present 2 Check the tightness of the power cable connections Use the tightening torques give
160. cetveteueceeehaetuuade dug tetatecstedetesehedun es 147 A 147 Energy SAVING vos siria a A E A A AA AA 147 SEIMOS spore ds Libera ke EN LI Ao pa 147 a A eee ae eee ee eee ee ear eae Ny Ae eam ee TN Pee eee ae eee 147 Pump cleaning irae e eee Renee nee ee ante ate eee eee 148 RUN Se torso a eae ee ace ae e g y Td aie pa a Pe ae ee eee ees 148 Load analyZer 2 2 ckke canes hie AREA AER AAA 149 Peak value logger v 16 ancee hase sdne DIES A ed dees 149 Amplitude loggers oia Ade oe Melee 149 SOCIOS paa nai a desnatada ie dd 150 A A IR A 150 PFC andi SPFCO COnNtrOl ensaian i a E idad tipo 151 PEC COMWO socs aas ned kapo a al ao ro o we Epa 151 SPPOCONUO css da 151 SOIINOS ap rme De e a Y ie 154 SONOS CS oscar ios Aad oth od aoe salgo aro ado ect Re bh ee ee 154 12 Actual signals and parameters What this chapter contains 0 0 00 c eee 155 Terms and abbreviations 0 0 0 ce eee 155 Fieldbus equivalent 0 000 eee eens 156 Default values with different Macros 0 000s 157 Actual signals in the short parameter view 0 0000 eee 158 04 FAULT HISTORY corra ro ANA ba webs ted 158 Parameters in the short parameter vieW 000 eee 158 11 REFERENCE SELECT gt dera ee ian a lb a Oe Sohne as 158 12 CONSTANT SPEEDS si n a a a aaa a ca 158 13SANALOG INPUTS 2er iS AR ados 158 TA RELAY OUTPUTS 450520700 0990 Eens ENARE ic a a a Ea 158 16 SYSTEM CONTROLS a ERASE AE AS A as 158 20 OMIT
161. circuit breakers independent of the manufacturer hot ionized gases may escape from the breaker enclosure in case of a short circuit To ensure safe use special attention must be paid to the installation and placement of the breakers Follow the manufacturer s instructions E Protecting the motor and motor cable in short circuit situations The drive protects the motor and motor cable in a short circuit situation when the motor cable is dimensioned according to the nominal current of the drive No additional protection devices are needed 42 Planning the electrical installation E Protecting the drive motor cable and input power cable against thermal overload The drive protects itself and the input and motor cables against thermal overload when the cables are dimensioned according to the nominal current of the drive No additional thermal protection devices are needed WARNING If the drive is connected to multiple motors a separate thermal overload switch or a circuit breaker must be used for protecting each cable and motor These devices may require a separate fuse to cut off the short circuit current E Protecting the motor against thermal overload According to regulations the motor must be protected against thermal overload and the current must be switched off when overload is detected The drive includes a motor thermal protection function that protects the motor and switches off the current when necessary It is also possib
162. cording to the rating table in section Ratings on page 378 The table lists the typical motor power for each drive type Selecting the power cables E General rules Dimension the input power and motor cables according to local regulations e The input power and the motor cables must be able to carry the corresponding load currents See section Ratings on page 378 for the rated currents e The cable must be rated for at least 70 C maximum permissible temperature of the conductor in continuous use For US see section Additional US requirements on page 38 e The conductivity of the PE conductor must be equal to that of the phase conductor same cross sectional area e 600 VAC cable is accepted for up to 500 V AC e Refer to chapter Technical data on page 317 for the EMC requirements A symmetrical shielded motor cable see the figure below must be used to meet the EMC requirements of the CE and C Tick marks A four conductor system is allowed for input cabling but a shielded symmetrical cable is recommended Compared to a four conductor system the use of a symmetrical shielded cable reduces electromagnetic emission of the whole drive system as well as motor bearing currents and wear Planning the electrical installation 37 E Alternative power cable types Power cable types that can be used with the drive are presented below Motor cables Note A separate PE conductor is required recommended for input cables also if
163. cription Def FbEq See parameter 4001 GAIN 4202 INTEGRATION See parameter 4002 INTEGRATION TIME ME See parameter 4003 DERIVATION TIME TIME See parameter 4004 PID DERIV FILTER FILTER See parameter 4005 ERROR VALUE INV VALUE INV VALUE 0 VALUE See parameter 4070 SET POINT SEL SEL See parameter 4011 INTERNAL SETPNT SETPNT See parameter 4012 SETPOINT MIN MIN See parameter 4013 SETPOINT MAX MAX See parameter 4014 FBK SEL See parameter 4015 FBK MULTIPLIER MULTIPLIER See parameter 4016 ACT1 INPUT See parameter 4017 ACT2 INPUT See parameter 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM MINIMUM See parameter 4019 ACT1 MAXIMUM MAXIMUM See parameter 4020 ACT2 MINIMUM MINIMUM See parameter 4021 ACT2 MAXIMUM MAXIMUM Selects the source for the external PID function activation NOT SEL signal Parameter 4230 TRIM MODE must be set to NOT SEL NOT SEL DI1 Digital input DI1 1 active 0 inactive D2 Dr DIS A A E E E A MIM Ml N N N OI QO O o o oO NIO al gt ow s 5 s3 23 29 22 9 lt U Z 414 c8 mol m2 Z n m Ss O as ll NE E lt m Z h N O 00 Q of B NIN Q o j u ale 4 U Q Z 3 4211 INTERNAL 4212 SETPOINT 4213 SETPOINT 4214 FBK SEL 4215 FBK 4216 ACT1 INPUT 4217 ACT2 INPUT 4218 ACT1 4219 ACT1 4220 ACT2 4221 ACT2 4228 ACTIVATE 236 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description DRIVE RUN Activation at drive start Start dri
164. ctive 1 inactive DI5 INV Speed defined by parameter 1202 CONST SPEED 1 is activated through inverted digital input DI5 O active 1 inactive DI1 2 INV Constant speed selection through inverted digital inputs DI1 and DI2 1 DI active O DI inactive DI2 3 INV See selection D 7 2 INV DI3 4 INV See selection D 7 2 INV DI4 5 INV See selection D 1 2 INV DI1 2 3 INV Constant speed selection through inverted digital inputs D11 DI2 and DI3 1 DI active O DI inactive i SPEED 1 0 0 500 0 Hz Output frequency in Hz 1203 CONST Defines constant speed drive output frequency 2 SPEED 2 Actual signals and parameters 175 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 0 0 500 0 Hz Output frequency in Hz 1 0 1 Hz 1204 CONST Defines constant speed drive output frequency 3 E 15 0 Hz SPEED 3 U 18 0 Hz 0 0 500 0 Hz Output frequency in Hz 1 0 1 Hz 1205 CONST Defines constant speed drive output frequency 4 E 20 0 Hz SPEED 4 Cc N O T N o L N 0 0 500 0 Hz Output frequency in Hz 1 1206 CONST Defines constant speed drive output frequency 5 SPEED 5 cm N SA oo II N N 0 0 500 0 Hz Output frequency in Hz 1207 CONST Defines constant speed drive output frequency 6 SPEED 6 II o E N lI o gt c m IN 53 oo Sl LE N N L N 0 0 500 0 Hz Output frequency in Hz 1208 CONST Defines constant speed drive output frequency
165. ctrical installation Voltage and current connection for analog inputs Bipolar voltage 10 10 V and current 20 20 mA are also possible If a bipolar connection is used instead of a unipolar one see section Programmable analog inputs on page 122 for how to set parameters accordingly Unipolar voltage Bipolar voltage Unipolar Bipolar current T ISCR Al AAA gt Use external power supply 10 V GND 10 V PNP and NPN configuration for digital inputs You can wire the digital input terminals in either a PNP or NPN configuration PNP connection source NPN connection sink X1 X1 GZA GZA eon 13 DI2 14 DIS pa 16 Dis External power supply for digital inputs For using an external 24 V supply for the digital inputs see the figure below PNP connection source NPN connection sink X1 9 24V_ 9 24V_ 0 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC Li pcom ovoce CoN lt 412 01 13 D2 14 DIS 15 pa 16 DIS Frequency input If DI5 is used as a frequency input see section Frequency input on page 125 for how to set parameters accordingly Electrical installation 51 Connection example of a two wire sensor Hand Auto PID control PFC control and SPFC control macros see section Application macros on page 107 use analog input 2 Al2 The macro wiring diagrams for these macros show the connection when a sep
166. d from EXT1 to EXT2 from EXT2 to EXT1 or from LOC to REM When the drive is restarted the motor ramps up at the selected acceleration rate to the stored reference Parameter 2205 ACCELER TIME 2 defines the rate of the reference change Al1 Al2 Reference is calculated with the following equation REF Al1 Al2 50 Al1 Al2 Reference is calculated with the following equation REF Al1 Al2 50 Al1 Al2 Reference is calculated with the following equation REF Al1 50 Al2 AI1 Al2 Reference is calculated with the following equation REF Al1 50 Al2 KEYPAD RNC Defines the control panel as the reference source Stop command resets the reference to zero the R stands for reset The reference is not saved if the control source is changed from EXT1 to EXT2 from EXT2 to EXT1 KEYPAD NC Defines the control panel as the reference source Stop command does not reset the reference to zero The reference is stored The reference is not saved if the control source is changed from EXT1 to EXT2 from EXT2 to EXT 1 DI4U 5D See selection D 3U 4D DI4U 5D NC See selection D 3U 4D NC FREQ INPUT Frequency input 1104 REF1 MIN Defines the minimum value for external reference REF 0 Hz Corresponds to the minimum setting of the used source signal 0 0 500 0 Hz Minimum value in Hz Example Analog input Al1 is selected as the reference source value of parameter 1103 is A 1 The refere
167. d by parameter 4401 INLET PROT CTRL is taken after the delay set by parameter 4407 INLET CTRL DLY expires 0 00 100 00 The range corresponds to 0 10 V or 0 20 mA on the 1 0 01 analog input With a bipolar input the absolute input value is considered 4404 VERY LOW Enables and selects the mode of the secondary inlet NOT SEL CTRL pressure supervision function The function uses the analog input selected by parameter 4402 AI MEASURE INLET NOT SEL Secondary inlet pressure supervision not used Oo STOP Detection of very low inlet pressure stops the drive The 1 drive will start again if the pressure exceeds the supervision level FAULT Detection of very low inlet pressure trips the drive on a fault 4405 Al IN VERY Supervision level for the secondary inlet pressure 0 00 LOW monitoring function See parameter 4401 INLET PROT CTRL 0 00 100 00 Supervision level 1 0 01 238 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 4406 DI STATUS Selects the digital input for connection of a pressure switch NOT SEL INLET at the pump fan inlet The normal state is 1 active If the selected input switches to 0 inactive the action defined by parameter 4401 INLET PROT CTRL is executed after the delay set by parameter 4407 INLET CTRL DLY expires NOTSEL No digitalinput selected O on 012 013 DI 4407 INLET CTRL Sets the delay after which the action defined by parameter
168. dden For more information see MFDT 01 FlashDrop User s Manual 3AFE68591074 English FlashDrop parameter values are activated by setting parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO to 31 LOAD FD SET SHORT VIEW Shows only a subset of all signals and parameters See section Actual signals in the short parameter view on page 158 and Parameters in the short parameter view on page 158 LONG VIEW Shows all signals section All actual signals on page 160 3 and parameters this table starting on page 167 16000 Hz Minimum frequency 1801 FREQ INPUT Defines the minimum input value when DI5 is used as a lo Hz frequency input See section Frequency input on page 125 16000 Hz Maximum frequency 1803 FILTER FREQ Defines the filter time constant for frequency input ie the time within which 63 of a step change is reached See section Frequency input on page 125 0 10 0 s Filter time constant 0 1s 1804 TO MODE Selects the operation mode for the transistor output TO DIGITAL See section Transistor output on page 126 DIGITAL Transistor output is used as a digital output DO FREQUENCY Transistor output is used as a frequency output FO 1 1805 DO SIGNAL Selects a drive status indicated through digital output DO FAULT 1 ES MIN 0 1802 FREQ INPUT Defines the maximum input value when DI5 is used as a MAX frequency input See section Frequency input on page 125 0 IN 0 Ol e N gt Ar n Ol IT IJI N NIN
169. de range 10 percentage points wide and displays the percentage of the collected samples that fall within that range Percentage of samples 3S 3S ES 3S 3S 3S 3S 3S ES oS O O O O O O O O Oo Oo ls N ea xY 19 E e P o o o o o o o o a A oe Ye N Amplitude ranges parameters 6414 6423 Amplitude logger 1 AL1 is fixed to monitor output current and it cannot be reset With amplitude logger 1 100 corresponds to the nominal output current of the drive ly The peak value logger and amplitude logger 2 can be reset by a user defined method They are also reset if either of the signals or the peak value filter time is changed 150 Program features E Settings Parameter Additional information Group 64 LOAD ANALYZER Load analyzer settings parameters 6401 6405 E Diagnostics Actual signal Additional information Group 64 LOAD ANALYZER Load analyzer results parameters 6406 6433 Program features 151 PFC and SPFC control E PFC control Pump and fan control PFC switches auxiliary pumps on and off as required by capacity changes Autochange function alternates between pumps to keep the duty times of the pumps equal Interlocks function enables the drive to detect if any of the pumps are unavailable eg switched off for maintenance in which case the next available pump is started instead The drive controls the motor of pump 1 varying the motor speed to control the pump ca
170. de see chapter Fault tracing on page 293 Control panels 83 Initially the panel is in the Output mode where you can LOC start stop change the direction switch between local and 49 1 Hz remote control modify the reference value and monitor up to three actual values 10 7 DIR 00 00 MENU To do other tasks go first to the Main menu and select the LOC UMAIN MENU 1 appropriate mode on the menu The status line see PARAMETERS section Status line on page 82 shows the name of the ASSISTANTS current menu mode item or state CHANGED PAR EXIT 00 00 ENTER How to do common tasks The table below lists common tasks the mode in which you can perform them and the page number where the steps to do the task are described in detail O TN Howto start and top the drive Ja a Howto change the direcion ofthe motorrotaton Oupa 66 Howto select the monitored signas Parameters 69 How to perform guided tasks specification of related parameter Assistants 91 sets with assistants How to view and edit changed parameters Changed 93 parameters How to view faults Fault logger How to reset faults and alarms Output Fault a How to show hide the clock change date and time formats set the Time and date clock and enable disable automatic clock transitions according to the daylight saving changes How to copy parameters from the drive to the control UA AAA A all E te How to restore parameters from th
171. delay set by parameter 4475 OUTLET CTRL DLY expires NOT SEL No digital input selected Pump fan outlet pressure monitored through digital input 1 DI1 C m seson C m es selec DI ma es selec DI C w ses selec DI 4415 OUTLET CTRL Sets the delay after which the action defined by parameter DLY 4409 OUTLET PROT CTRL is taken on detection of high outlet pressure 0 1800 0 s Delay time 0 1s This reference is used after detection of high outlet FORCED REF pressure See parameter 4409 OUTLET PROT CTRL WARNING Make sure that it is safe to continue operation using this reference 0 100 0 D 0 0 100 4417 PID OUT DEC PI controller ramp down time See selections PROTECT for 60 0 s TIME parameter 4401 INLET PROT CTRL and PROTECT for DI2 DI3 DI4 DIS Aree o al wl rh oj oS _ parameter 4409 OUTLET PROT CTRL 010 600 08 DE 4418 APPL Parameters 4418 APPL PROFILE CTL to 4420 PROF PROFILE CTL LIMIT ON DLY provide the Application profile protection feature based on long term monitoring of an internal status signal If the selected signal exceeds and remains above the supervision limit for a longer time than the set delay parameter 4420 PROF LIMIT ON DLY the internal status signal PROFILE HIGH is set to 1 The signal can be directed to a relay output see parameter group 14 RELAY OUTPUTS NOT SEL Not selected CONTROL Signal 0126 PID 1 OUTPUT is monitored and compared to DEV1 parameter 4419 PROF
172. direction command source start No start stop and direction command source and direction command source Start and stop through digital input DI1 O stop 1 start Direction is fixed according to parameter 1003 DIRECTION setting REQUEST FORWARD DI1 2 Start and stop through digital input DI1 O stop 1 start Direction through digital input DI2 0 forward 1 reverse To control direction parameter 1003 DIRECTION setting must be REQUEST DI1P 2P Pulse start through digital input DI1 0 gt 1 Start In order to start the drive digital input DI2 must be activated prior to the pulse fed to DI1 Pulse stop through digital input DI2 1 gt 0 Stop Direction of rotation is fixed according to parameter 1003 DIRECTION setting REQUEST FORWARD Note When the stop input DI2 is deactivated no input the control panel start and stop keys are disabled DI1P 2P 3P Pulse start forward through digital input DI1 0 gt 1 Start forward Pulse start reverse through digital input DI2 0 gt 1 Start reverse In order to start the drive digital input DI3 must be activated prior to the pulse fed to DI1 DI2 Pulse stop through digital input DI3 1 gt 0 Stop To control the direction parameter 1003 DIRECTION setting must be REQUEST Note When the stop input DI3 is deactivated no input the control panel start and stop keys are disabled KEYPAD Start stop and direction commands through control panel when EXT
173. direction of rotation is formed by calculating the two s complement from the corresponding positive reference value The contents of each reference word can be used as the frequency or process reference E Actual values Actual values ACT are 16 bit words containing selected values of the drive Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 277 Fieldbus references E Reference selection and correction Fieldbus reference called COMM in signal selection contexts is selected by setting a reference selection parameter 1103 or 1106 to COMM COMM AI1 or COMM AI1 When 1103 REF1 SELECT or 1106 REF2 SELECT is set to COMM the fieldbus reference is forwarded as such without correction When parameter 1103 or 1106 is set to COMM AI1 or COMM A 7 the fieldbus reference is corrected using analog input Al1 as shown in the following examples Setting When COMM gt 0 When COMM lt 0 COM COMM MAX MIN MIN COMM MAX MIN MIN M Al1 Al 50 MAX MIN Al 50 MAX MIN Corrected reference Hz COMM Max limit REF 100 50 oe Min limit 0 Min limit 0 50 100 COMM O di Corrected reference Hz Corrected reference Hz COMM REF 100 50 0 7 Min limit Max limit Min limit 0 0 50 REF Corrected reference Hz Maximum limit is defined by parameter 1105 REF1 MAX 1108 REF2 MAX Minimum limit is defined by parameter 1104 REF1
174. ditional information 1102 REF 1 2 selection 4230 4232 Trimming function settings 4201 4229 PID control settings Group 20 LIMITS Drive operation limits 122 Program features E Example The drive runs a conveyor line It is speed controlled but the line tension also needs to be taken into account If the measured tension exceeds the tension setpoint the speed will be slightly decreased and vice versa To accomplish the desired speed correction the user e activates the trimming function and connects the tension setpoint and the measured tension to it e tunes the trimming to a suitable level Speed controlled conveyor line Drive rollers pull Tension measurement Simplified block diagram Add Output frequency reference Trimmed output PID frequency reference Tension measurement Tension setpoint Programmable analog inputs The drive has two programmable analog voltage current inputs The inputs can be inverted filtered and the maximum and minimum values can be adjusted The update cycle for the analog input is 8 ms 12 ms cycle once per second The cycle time is shorter when information is transferred to the application program 8 ms gt 2 ms E Settings Additional information Group 35 MOTOR TEMP MEAS Al in motor temperature measurement Group 40 PROCESS PID SET 1 Al as PID process control reference or actual value 42 EXT TRIM PID source Group 44
175. drive can be controlled by external devices over a communication network using embedded fieldbus System overview The drive is connected to an external control system through embedded fieldbus The embedded fieldbus supports Modbus RTU protocol Modbus is a serial asynchronous protocol Transaction is half duplex Embedded fieldbus is connected with ElA 485 I O terminals 23 26 EIA 485 is designed for a multipoint application a single master controlling one or more slaves 272 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus POWER ElA 485 I O terminals 23 26 Data flow lt a Control word CW lt References Status word SW gt Actual values J gt Parameter R W Fieldbus controller Fieldbus Embedded fieldbus Modbus Process l O cyclic Service messages acyclic The drive can be set to receive all of its control information through the fieldbus interface or the control can be distributed between the fieldbus interface and other available sources eg digital and analog inputs Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 273 Setting up communication through the embedded Modbus Before configuring the drive for fieldbus control install the fieldbus according to instructions given in section Connecting the embedded fieldbus on page 54 The communication through the fieldbus link is initialized by setting parameter
176. drive resets immediately 0012005 206 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description 3104 AR Activates deactivates the automatic reset for the OVERCURRE overcurrent fault Automatically resets the fault OVERCURRENT after the delay set by parameter 3703 DELAY TIME DISABLE 3105 AR Activates deactivates the automatic reset for the OVERVOLTAG intermediate link overvoltage fault Automatically resets the E fault DC OVERVOLT after the delay set by parameter 3103 DELAY TIME DISABLE Activates deactivates the automatic reset for the UNDERVOLTA intermediate link undervoltage fault Automatically resets the fault DC UNDERVOLT after the delay set by parameter 3103 DELAY TIME DISABLE 3107 AR Al lt MIN Activates deactivates the automatic reset for fault Al lt MIN Al1 LOSS Al2 LOSS ie analog input signal under the allowed minimum level Automatically resets the fault after the delay set by parameter 3703 DELAY TIME DISABLE mave O ENABLE Active 1 WARNING The drive may restart even after a long stop if the analog input signal is restored Ensure that the use of this feature will not cause danger 3108 AR EXTERNAL Activates deactivates the automatic reset for EXT FAULT 1 DISABLE FLT EXT FAULT 2 Automatically resets the fault after the delay set by parameter 3103 DELAY TIME DISABLE me O All parameters No Name Value Actual signals and parameters 207 Description Def
177. e A new parameter value of a standard macro is saved automatically when changed from the panel but not when altered through a fieldbus connection DONE Saving completed SAVE Saving in progress i Z Mm Actual signals and parameters 185 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 1608 START Selects the source for the Start enable 1 signal ENABLE 1 Note Functionality of the Start enable signal is different from the Run enable signal Example External damper control application using Start enable and Run enable Motor can start only after the damper is fully open Drive started Start Stop command group 10 Start enable signals 1608 and 1609 Relay energized Started de output status energized l group 14 Damper open Damper Damper closed i i closed Damper lt gt status Damper Damper opening closing time time l Run enable signal rom the damper end switch when the damper is fully opened 1607 Motor status Acceleration Deceleration time 2202 time 2203 NOT SEL Start enable signal is on External signal required through digital input DI1 1 Start enable If Start enable signal is switched off the drive will not start or it coasts to stop if it is running and alarm START ENABLE 1 MISSING is activated 2 See selection D 7 See selection D 7 See selection D 7 COMM Fieldbus interface as the source for the inverted Start e
178. e aci82020 Lies aee Resende AAA Routing the cables ro Rode Pod Rae eae a ath cee at ee Be ee Rh ne Control Cable QUCIS ci CAG se hE Ss AAA Protecting the drive input power cable motor and motor cable in short circuit situations and against thermal overload es csrscicsia ronca RARA A EEE RS ORR ES Protecting the drive and input power cable in short circuit situations Protecting the motor and motor cable in short circuit situations Protecting the drive motor cable and input power cable against thermal overload Protecting the motor against thermal overload 0000000 Using residual current devices RCD with the drive 0 000 eee Implementing a bypass connection lt scedacaususys eusgeudaad saa sVGdas caadedas Protecting the contacts of relay outputs 0 00 00 eee 6 Electrical installation What this chapter contains o oo oooooooo eee Checking the insulation of the assembly ooocccccccccc tee DIVE ike De Whee dh ad Ba Ee DA on Pek whe a ee Se ee ath aie wi ea a Input power cable 0 20 0 0 eee eee Motor and motor cable 0 2 00 eee Checking the compatibility with IT ungrounded and corner grounded TN systems Connecting the power cables 0 0 eee Connection diagram 2 pra is lib Connection procedure sssaaa teen eeeeeeeeennes Connecting the control cables on seedve eee bente ed bee Gos Ok x are VO terminals states
179. e pump is connected directly to the supply Two actual signals 0176 SAVED AMOUNT 1 and 0177 SAVED AMOUNT 2 are used to store the energy saved in local currency To find out the total saved energy in currency units add the value of signal 0177 multiplied by 1000 to the value of signal 0176 Example 0176 SAVED AMOUNT 1 123 4 0177 SAVED AMOUNT 2 5 Total saved energy 5 1000 123 4 5123 4 currency units Note The values of saved energy parameters 0174 SAVED KWH 0175 SAVED MWH 0176 SAVED AMOUNT 1 0177 SAVED AMOUNT 2 and 0178 SAVED CO2 are derived from subtracting the drive s energy consumed from the direct on line DOL consumption calculated on the basis of parameter 4508 PUMP POWER As such the accuracy of the values is dependent on the accuracy of the power estimate entered in that parameter E Settings Additional information Group 45 ENERGY SAVING Energy saving settings E Diagnostics Actual signal Additional information 0174 0175 Energy saved in kWh Mwh 0176 0177 Energy saved in local currency Reduction in CO emission 148 Program features Pump cleaning The Pump cleaning function can be used for preventing solids from building up on pump impellers The function consists of a programmable sequence of forward and reverse runs of the pump see the figure below effectively shaking off any residue on the impeller This is especially useful with booster and wastewater pumps Forward NG A 9
180. e control panel to the drive Parameter backup How to view backup information Parameter backup How to edit and change parameter settings related to I O terminals I O Settings 84 Control panels How to get help Sie Aeon O y Press 2 to read the context sensitive help text for the Loc PAR GROUPS 10 item that is highlighted 01 OPERATING DATA 03 FB ACTUAL SIGNALS EXIT 00 00 SEL If help text exists for the item it is shown on the display LOC HELP This group defines external sources EXT1 and EXT2 for commands that enable start stop and EXIT 100 00 Ifthe whole text is not visible scroll the lines with keys LOC TU HELP CAS and Cw external sources EXT1 and EXT2 for commands that enable start stop and direction changes EXIT 00 00 After reading the text return to the previous display by LOC UPAR GROUPS 10 pressing z 01 OPERATING DATA 03 FB ACTUAL SIGNALS 04 FAULT HISTORY LO START DIR 11 REFERENCE SELECT EXIT 00 00 SEL How to find out the panel version If the power is switched on switch it off MAA a 2 Keep key O pressed down while you switch on the PANEL VERSION INFO power and read the information The display shows the Panel X XX j j jane om XXXXXXXXXX following panel normado Flash Revs ee Panel SW panel firmware version XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX ROM CRC panel ROM check sum Flash Rev flash content version Flash content comment When you release the
181. e first auxiliary motor is running drive output frequency drops below limit 8772 1 Hz output frequency stays below the relaxed limit 8112 1 Hz for at least time 8116 AUX MOT STOP D After the first auxiliary motor stops output frequency increases by value 8109 START FREQ 1 8112 LOW FREQ 7 In effect the output of the speed regulated motor increases to compensate for the loss of the auxiliary motor Actual signals and parameters 253 All parameters o Name Value Description Def FbEq See the figure where A 8109 START FREQ 1 8112 LOW FREQ 1 B Output frequency decrease during the stop delay C Diagram showing auxiliary motor s run status as frequency decreases 1 On Grey path Shows hysteresis if time is reversed the path backwards is not the same For details on the path for starting see the diagram at 8109 START FREQ 17 Note 8112 LOW FREQ 1 value must be between 2007 MINIMUM FREQ 1 Hz and 8109 START FREQ 1 f Hz fax 8112 8112 1 MIN 0 0 500 0 Hz Frequency 8113 LOW FREQ 2 Sets the frequency limit used to stop the second auxiliary E 25 0 Hz motor See 8112 LOW FREQ 1 for a complete description of U 30 0 Hz the operation The second auxiliary motor stops if e two auxiliary motors are running e drive output frequency drops below limit 8113 1 Hz output frequency stays below the relaxed limit 8773 1 Hz for at least time 8116 AUX MOT S
182. e function is deactivated during emergency stop LINEAR 0 0 LINEAR 0 0 Linear ramp Suitable for steady acceleration or 0 1s 0 1 1000 0s deceleration and for slow ramps 0 1 1000 00 s S curve ramp S curve ramps are ideal for conveyors carrying fragile loads or other applications where a smooth transition is required when changing from one speed to another The S curve consists of symmetrical curves at both ends of the ramp and a linear part in between A rule of thumb A suitable relation between the ramp shape time and the acceleration ramp time is 1 5 Speed Linear ramp Par 2204 0s N S curve ramp i Par 2204 gt 0 s D q 17 gt 4 gt Par 2202 Par 2204 parameter 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ See parameter 2202 ACCELER TIME 1 00180005 2206 DECELER Defines the deceleration time 2 ie the time required for the 60 0 s TIME 2 speed to change from the value defined by parameter 2008 2205 ACCELER Defines the acceleration time 2 ie the time required for the 60 0 s TIME 2 speed to change from zero to the speed defined by MAXIMUM FREQ to zero See parameter 2203 DECELER TIME 1 18000s Time 2207 ae SHAPE a the Co E of the acceleration deceleration ramp 2 0 0 The function is deactivated Co E emergency stop LINEAR o LINEAR See AAA 2204 RAMP SHAPE 1 0 1s 1000 0 s 2208 MERO DEC ile O the time within which the drive is stopped if an TIME emergency stop is activated See parameter 2109 EMERG STOP SEL 1
183. e in the motor circuit to the Interlock input the drive s PFC logic can then recognize that a motor fault is activated and stop the motor Disables the Interlock function All digital inputs are available for other purposes Requires 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 0 The Autochange function must be disabled if Interlock function is disabled Def FbEq Actual signals and parameters 261 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq DI1 Enables the Interlock function and assigns a digital input 1 starting with DI1 to the interlock signal for each PFC relay These assignments are defined in the following table and depend on the number of PFC relays number of parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 with value 31 PFC e the Autochange function status disabled if 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 0 and otherwise enabled No of Autochange disabled Autochange enabled PFC Parameter 8118 Parameter 8118 relays DI1 Speed reg motor DI2 DI5 Free 1 DI1 Speed reg motor DI2 First PFC relay DI3 DI5 Free Speed reg motor First PFC relay Second PFC relay DI5 Free Speed reg motor First PFC relay Second PFC relay Third PFC relay DI5 Free Speed reg motor First PFC relay Second PFC relay Third PFC relay Fourth PFC relay Not allowed Not allowed DI1 First PFC relay DI2 DI5 Free First PFC relay Second PFC relay DI5 Free First PFC relay
184. e number of auxiliary motors parameter 8117 Enable Autochange parameter 8118 In SPFC control the parameter only allows SPFC to use PFC s alternation switchgear box It is not used as the operating time interval between the automatic motor changes as in normal PFC application Autochange level is ignored parameter 8119 Parameterize Interlocks parameter 8120 Set Bypass function if needed parameter 8127 Set PFC start delay parameter 8122 Enable SPFC Set parameter 8123 PFC ENABLE to value 2 SPFC ACTIVE Value 1 ACTIVE enables normal PFC functionality Set PFC acceleration and deceleration times if needed parameters 8124 8125 Autochange enable with a timed function is ignored parameter 8726 Set relays in group 14 RELAY OUTPUTS Transistor output TO parameter 1805 DO SIGNAL can be used as an additional relay output if needed Both PFC and SPFC use these relays You must set at least as many relays as there are motors set for SPFC the number of auxiliary motors parameter 8177 1 speed regulated motor when SPFC is used Set number of PFC controlled motors in parameter 8727 number of PFC relays in group 14 RELAY OUTPUTS Also set other needed motor dependent parameters eg 2007 MINIMUM FREQ 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ and 2605 U F RATIO SPFC control requires the Autochange function PFC control and SPFC control default settings have differences in acceleration time 2202 deceleration time 2203 and au
185. e or ES to cancel your changes To set the date select SET DATE on the menu and press Specify the first part of the date day or month depending on the selected date format with keys AS and Cy and press 33 Repeat for the second part After specifying the year press 1 To cancel your changes press jra To enable or disable the automatic clock transitions according to the daylight saving changes select DAYLIGHT SAVING on the menu and press s Pressing opens the help that shows the beginning and end dates of the period during which daylight saving time is used in each country or area whose daylight saving changes you can select to be followed To disable automatic clock transitions according to the daylight saving changes select Off and press To enable automatic clock transitions select the country or area whose daylight saving changes are followed and press ST To return to the previous display without making changes press 77 I 41 CANCEL 00 00 OK LOC USET DATE 11J 03 05 CANCEL 00 00 OK LOC UDAYLIGHT SAV 1 OTT EU US Australial NSwW Vict Australia2 Tasmania EXIT 00 00 SEL LOC U HELP EU on Mar last Sunday Off Oct last Sunday US EXIT 00 00 Control panels 97 E Parameter backup mode The Parameter backup mode is used to export parameters from one drive to another or to make a backup of the drive parameters Uploading to the panel stores all drive parameters
186. e pump is connected directly to the supply See the note 0 1 kWh on page 242 The counter value is accumulated till it reaches 999 9 after which the counter rolls over and starts again from 0 0 and the counter value of signal 0775 is incremented by one Can be reset with parameter 4509 ENERGY RESET resets all energy calculators at the same time See group 45 ENERGY SAVING 0175 SAVED MWH Energy saved in MWh compared to the energy used when the pump is connected directly to the supply See the note on page 242 The counter value is accumulated till it reaches 65535 after which the counter rolls over and starts again from 0 Can be reset with parameter 4509 ENERGY RESET resets all energy calculators at the same time See group 45 ENERGY SAVING 0176 SAVED Energy saved in local currency remainder when the total AMOUNT 1 saved energy is divided by 1000 See the note on page 242 To find out the total saved energy in currency units add the value of signal 0177 multiplied by 1000 to the value of signal 0176 Example 0176 SAVED AMOUNT 1 123 4 0177 SAVED AMOUNT 2 5 Total saved energy 5 1000 123 4 5123 4 currency units The counter value is accumulated till it reaches 999 9 after which the counter rolls over and starts again from 0 0 and the counter value of signal 0177 is incremented by one Can be reset with parameter 4509 ENERGY RESET resets all energy calculators at the same time Local energy price is set wit
187. e stop date e operation can continue over midnight In the example below the Program features 145 drive runs continuously from 18 00 6 p m on Friday evening to 06 30 6 30 a m on Monday morning Timed function is enabled on the rising edge of digital input D 7 Parameter fem O O O O ooo 3601 TIMERS ENABLE DI1 CMODE 3602 START TIME 1 18 00 00 3603 STOP TIME 1 06 30 00 3604 START DAY 1 FRIDAY 3605 STOP DAY 1 MONDAY E Settings 1402 1403 1410 Timed function status indicated through relay output RO 2 4 With option MREL 01 only 1805 Timed function status indicated through digital output DO 4027 Timed PID1 parameter set 1 2 selection 4039 Selection between different internal constant set points for the process PID control PID1 parameter set 1 4139 Selection between different internal constant set points for the process PID control PID1 parameter set 2 4228 Timed external PID2 activation 8126 Timed autochange activation 146 Program features User load curve The user can specify a load curve motor torque as a function of frequency for supervision The curve is defined by five points Supervision can be set for the torque dropping below the underload curve exceeding the overload curve or both A fault is generated if the torque has been out of the allowed area for longer than the user defined time limit An alarm is generated if the torque has been out of the allowed area for longer than the half
188. eS 80 Features icici dosnt ada ala a doa Geet 80 VET VIEW ei clams be he ra ro iria ire Gets eves Ip O meas 81 OHEAN cise dana ad aca aaa ae Ree ae wwe 82 Output O ac gene tel nn sneha ae E ERE ogc Bae ns Pac ch Week Re 86 Parameters Mode unicidad atada ogee Ad Dd A od abs 88 Assistants mod 0 0 ccc ee ee ee eee 91 Changed parameters mode 0 000 eee 93 Fault logger MOE scort tc AD SEB hE be Eee ada oe Edd 94 Time and date mode 95 Parameter backup mode o 97 I O settings mode eee ae ee ne ene oP One ee a er ee ree eee wr ear ae 100 10 Application macros What this chapter contains 0 0 00 tees 101 Overview Of macros 101 Summary of the I O connections of the application macros ooooooooooo 103 ABB standard Macro 104 Default I O connections 0 0 0 0 ee eee eee 104 S WIFE IMAGCIO sines iian aa david Sek Ge Pad dad a aes 105 Default I O connections unaa naaa aaaea ee ee eee 105 Alternate Macro vita mena a Da A al wat dil a WY Mba ae 106 Default I O connections ee eee eee 106 Motor potentiometer macro 000 eee 107 Default I O connections ee eee ee 107 Hand Auto Macro 108 Default I O connections o o ee ee ees 108 PID control macro 109 Default I O connections 0 0 0 0 ee eee 109 PFC control macro a eee ee eee eens 110 8 Table of contents Default I O connections 22 444 28 2868 wand weed a YG
189. eV Poaa eee ES ave 110 SPEC control Macro i e circa oa eek elt Ga dates eel cede ale eaten wos Se Oe eG wes 111 Default I O connections 0 0 0 0 ee ee ees 111 MSOF Macros sica Bcd and a a a dida 112 11 Program features What this chapter contains 0 0 0c eee 113 Startup assistant G 33 9 oes soe Sas ee See AA e was 113 INTOCUCION Secos bs i peaga aves dyed eee bud aoe ped heed 113 Default order of the tasks 0 0 te tees 114 List of the tasks and the relevant drive parameters o o ooooooooooooooo 115 Contents of the assistant displays 0 000 eee eee 117 Local control vs external control 2 2 55 deen deaw rara ee eee Eerie sendads 117 Local COM ss sakes sdra OEE PEGE BE BO a He ew aa Des HENS RE DE eed Oe eae 118 External Control o 263 asad ne sb RS GAAS 2S ENE aaa E 118 SETIMOS cvs edo bs a ia AA 118 a A ara eR am ee ee EE E eee 119 Block diagram Start stop direction source for EXT1 00000 119 Block diagram Reference source for EXT1 0 0c eee 119 Reference types and processing ooooooocc eee ee 120 Sis G ee ee eee ee ee ee ee errr ee er or er ere ar ee ee ee ree 120 DiaGhOSGS sens as AER A OR ERE Se wires Hees ears eae sande A e 120 Reference trimming curia aa e ee Peale ee 121 o O ep eee er ee eee Rar eee Seer ata ey ae ere aee a eee Se eee 121 Example rana tada ddd Ay Eko he aA AA ed ee eas 122 Programmable analog inputs cicsccsey ed aeede eeebodivedavd
190. eases See the figure below This function allows the highest possible switching frequency at a specific operation point Higher switching frequency results in lower acoustic noise but higher internal losses feyy limit Drive temperature T 80 100 C 100 120 C Temperature depends on the drive output frequency PON Active e ON LOAD Switching frequency can adapt to loading instead of limiting 2 the output current This allows maximum loading with all switching frequency selections The drive automatically decreases the actual switching frequency if loading is too high for the selected switching frequency 198 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 2608 SLIP COMP Defines the slip gain for the motor slip compensation 0 RATIO control 100 means full slip compensation 0 means no slip compensation Other values can be used if a static speed error is detected despite the full slip compensation Example 35 Hz constant speed reference is given to the drive Despite the full slip compensation SL P COMP RATIO 100 a manual tachometer measurement from the motor axis gives a speed value of 34 Hz The static speed error is 35 Hz 34 Hz 1 Hz To compensate the error the slip gain should be increased 0 200 Slip gain 2609 NOISE Enables the noise smoothing function Noise smoothing DISABLE SMOOTHING distributes the acoustic motor noise over a range of frequenci
191. ection T Note The Pump cleaning function can override this parameter See parameter 4607 PUMP CLEAN TRIG FORWARD Fixed to forward E 0 1 2 3 4 0 1 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 1 1 1 1 1 SUPRV2 See selection SUPRV1 OVER OVER SUPRV2 See selection SUPRV1 UNDER 3 UNDER cis Actual signals and parameters 169 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq REVERSE REQUEST Control of rotation direction allowed 1101 KEYPAD REF Selects the type of the reference in local control mode REF 1 Hz SEL rpm REF1 Hz rpm Frequency reference in Hz aa 1102 EXT1 EXT2 Defines the source from which the drive reads the signal EXT1 SEL that selects between the two external control locations EXT1 or EXT2 EXT1 EXT1 active The control signal sources are defined by parameters 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS and 1103 REF1 SELECT bn poean O EXT O A CAN CTE A IC CTE CA i l E Be oo O See selection D11 EXT2 EXT2 active The control signal sources are defined by w Nj parameters 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS and 1106 REF2 SELECT COMM Fieldbus interface as the source for EXT1 EXT2 selection ie control word 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 bit 5 with ABB drives profile 5319 EFB PAR 19 bit 11 The control word is sent by the fieldbus controller through the embedded fieldbus Modbus to the drive For the control word bits see sections DCU communication profile on page 289 and ABB drives communication profile on page 284 Timed EXT1
192. ectrical safety WARNING Ignoring the following instructions can cause physical injury or death or damage to the equipment Only qualified electricians are allowed to install and maintain the drive Aj Never work on the drive motor cable or motor when input power is applied After disconnecting the input power always wait for 5 minutes to let the intermediate circuit capacitors discharge before you start working on the drive motor or motor cable Always ensure by measuring with a multimeter impedance at least 1 Mohm that there is no voltage between the drive input phases U1 V1 and W1 and the ground Do not work on the control cables when power is applied to the drive or to the external control circuits Externally supplied control circuits may carry dangerous voltage even when the input power of the drive is switched off Do not make any insulation or voltage withstand tests on the drive Disconnect the internal EMC filter when installing the drive on an IT system an ungrounded power system or a high resistance grounded over 30 ohms power system otherwise the system will be connected to ground potential through the EMC filter capacitors This may cause danger or damage the drive See page 46 Note When the internal EMC filter is disconnected the drive is not EMC compatible Disconnect the internal EMC filter when installing the drive on a corner grounded TN system otherwise the drive will be damaged See page 46 Note W
193. ee selection DI CMODE 15 7 1 2 CONT MODE Timed function enabled in continuous mode in which the 1 start date can be different from the stop date DI1 INV Inverted digital input DI1 Timed function enable on the falling edge of DI1 DI2 INV See selection D 1 INV DI3 INV See selection D 1 INV DI4 INV See selection D 1 INV 4 Actual signals and parameters 217 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq DI5 INV See selection D 1 INV DI1 INV CM Timed function enable on the falling edge of DI1 Timed 11 function is in continuous mode in which the start date can be different from the stop date 3602 START TIME 1 Defines the daily start time 1 The time can be changed in 2 00 00 00 second steps 00 00 00 hours minutes seconds 23 59 58 Example If parameter value is set to 07 00 00 timed function 1 is activated at 7 00 7 a m 3603 STOP TIME 1 Defines the daily stop time 1 The time can be changed in 2 00 00 00 second steps 00 00 00 hours minutes seconds 23 59 58 Example If parameter value is set to 18 00 00 timed function 1 is deactivated at 18 00 6 p m 3604 START DAY 1 Defines the start day 1 MONDAY MONDAY TUESDAY Example If parameter value is set to MONDAY timed function 1 is active from Monday midnight 00 00 00 WEDNESDAY is 7 THURSDAY 4 SATURDAY 6 SUNDAY 3605 STOP DAY 1 Defines the stop day 1 MONDAY See parameter 3604 START DAY 1 Example If para
194. eee ee 325 Control connection data vi suis cela ie toa iio aa al a A 327 o A A O 327 Degrees of protection said seeded Gee hdd aoe ced deed 327 Ambient conditions 0 0 00 eee 328 Mat rialS cs corria Cae ek aaa Sakae seal ee GE eases 329 Applicable standards 00 000 ccc eet 329 A ok Sereda ok Bee as E E oe ets ote oe ate ete aa amp merece 330 Compliance with the European EMC Directive 0 0 0 0 0 00 eee 330 Compliance with EN 61800 3 2004 0 eee nes 330 Definitio S esi aves oars ES RATA eae ee ee ake eae 330 Category rs rs ra a A os a een do 330 Category C2 os Suen la A E ROS Gy eee dica e EE 331 Category G3 he bac neni i nea hate eae a eels cated haem oe 331 UE MAKINO acii inean a y o A E aa E a amp ene 332 UL checklist ss cerris cia rra a A a EA 332 C Tick marking asi sadaa ngi spis Re ias a A Dia a KE AA 332 ROHS MAING 2245486345 iia a a e aa 333 Patent protection in the USA evi cuke a da e Ow ARA 333 17 Dimension drawings Frame sizes RO and R1 IP20 cabinet installation UL open 0 o oocooooooooo 336 Frame sizes RO and R1 IP20 NEMA1 0 00000 cee eee eee 337 Frame size R2 IP20 cabinet installation UL open 0 000 eee ee 338 Frame size R2 NEMA lt 2 2 54235080 5446000004560 04S LEH ES ye Ded Lo weed be 339 Frame size R3 IP20 cabinet installation UL open 0000 c ee ee 340 Frame size R3 NEMA 1 2 sce 8 fences bate a a MNES Ee ew edhe le
195. eldbus Drive control parameters After the Modbus communication has been set up the drive control parameters listed in the table below should be checked and adjusted when necessary The Setting for fieldbus control column gives the value to use when the Modbus interface is the desired source or destination for that particular signal The Function Information column gives a description of the parameter Parameter Setting for Function Information Modbus register fieldbus address control CONTROL COMMAND SOURCE SELECTION ABB DRV EXT2 COMM Enables 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 40031 bits COMMANDS bits 0 1 START STOP when 0 1 EXT2 is selected as the active control location DIRECTION FORWARD Enables rotation direction control 40031 bit 2 explained in section Reference handling on page 280 REF1 COMM Fieldbus reference REF1 is used 40002 for REF1 SELECT COMM A 1 when EXT1 is selected as the COMM AI1 active control location See section Fieldbus references on page 277 for information on the alternative settings REF2 COMM Fieldbus reference REF2 is used 40003 for REF2 Fieldbus references on page 277 for information on the alternative 1401 RELAY COMM Enables relay output RO control by 40134 for signal 0134 OUTPUT 1 COMM 1 signal 0134 COMM RO WORD 1501 AO1 135 Directs the contents of fieldbus 40135 for signal 0135 CONTENT reference 0135 COMM VALUE 1 SEL to analog output AO 1001 EXT1 COMM Enables 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 40031 bits COMMANDS bi
196. elects the third supervised signal Supervision limits are PARAM defined by parameters 3208 SUPERV 3 LIM LO and 3209 SUPERV 3 LIM HI See parameter 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM 3208 SUPERV 3 LIM Defines the low limit for the third supervised signal selected LO by parameter 3207 SUPERV 3 PARAM Supervision wakes up if the value is below the limit Setting range depends on parameter 3207 setting 3209 SUPERV 3 LIM Defines the high limit for the third supervised signal selected HI by parameter 3207 SUPERV 3 PARAM Supervision wakes up if the value is above the limit Setting range depends on parameter 3207 setting 3 ORM O rsi e 3301 FIRMWARE Displays the version of the firmware package 0000 FFFF Eg 241A hex hex 3302 LOADING Displays the version of the loading package type PACKAGE dependent 2101 21FF 2101 hex ACS310 03E hex 2102 hex ACS310 03U 3303 TEST DATE Displays the test date 00 00 Date value in format YY WW year week MA 3304 DRIVE RATING Displays the drive current and voltage ratings 0000 hex 0000 FFFF Value in format XXXY hex hex XXX Nominal current of the drive in amperes An A indicates decimal point For example if XXX is 9A7 nominal current is 9 7 A Y Nominal voltage of the drive 2 3 phase 200 240 V 4 3 phase 380 480 V 3305 PARAMETER Displays the version of the parameter table used in the TABLE drive 0000 FFFF Eg 400E hex hex 210 Actual signals and parameters All
197. emoved If parameter 2702 STOP FUNCTION is set to RAMP DC braking is applied after the ramp 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR 2107 DC BRAKE Defines the DC brake time TIME 00 26008 Times 0 100 Value in percent of the motor nominal current parameter Actual signals and parameters 191 All parameters No Name Value Description actively started and running the Start inhibit function ignores a pending start command in any of the following situations and a new start command is required a fault is reset Run enable signal activates while the start command is active See parameter 1601 RUN ENABLE control mode changes from local to remote external control mode switches from EXT1 to EXT2 or from EXT2 to EXT1 OFF Disabled ON firea 2109 EMERG STOP Selects the source for the external emergency stop S command The drive cannot be restarted before the emergency stop command is reset Note The installation must include emergency stop devices and any other safety equipment that may be needed Pressing the stop key on the drive s control panel does NOT generate an emergency stop of the motor separate the drive from dangerous potential NOT SEL Emergency stop function is not selected Digital input DI1 1 stop along the emergency stop ramp See parameter 2208 EMERG DEC TIME 0 emergency stop command reset __ ses lie BH 04 See selection DH 05 See selection DH DI1 INV Inverted digital input DI
198. enduswc etd iaaus 122 cccicatvteed shes apestaaannee cA ba ok ee eA EAR REO RES ARLE ES Rh TR 122 DISGNOSICS 6 54 5 5 6 44 06a bebe So 26 Aa HH DHSS ESO IBS IHS H OH BREA eae 123 Programmable analog output 0 0 123 MCUINOS scores dos Cees ew ohne ee eet ewe oe 123 o ed cre eae ee er ae ety ae ee a ea eee ne eRe PR eee ae te oer ee er or 123 Programmable digital inputs 5 0 s0 cise eteeESSSS oe eeE SEG bs eee aes ES eae Deed eee S 124 DOMINOS vicscio cris a nip sos Ake HERE it 124 DIAGHOSICS ince sen nra erin i LEERE Sy Sh SS Ge Re Sree Gk Gok He Hee RERE R BAO 125 Programmable relay output ciar a eo ae eee PE ee ee ke ae ddd eds 125 RE 125 a eat dee we ei te bene bene bu Se wees ee A E Ge eee 125 FrEQuenCYINDUL uce scac avo da heeded RAE DES Ea ie ea Le Me dr ca 125 DOMINOS jurar IA Oo PRR DO ORES ode Raed See saree eae eRe 125 DIAGNOSIS rol os do Eee o EDI Ee ae e448 WE Had 126 Transistor output 1 126 SENOS ccc An hen tica ete ld e dibene eee BARGER ee se RARE was 126 DiagnOStiGS tack tics ae Fees Oh ged y ad Rede Oe eee eae eee ee We y e 126 Actual SIQNalS 222054 nent AA NAAA AA 126 SENGS 54 25 50g Nad o5 adios das avis OEY hee E datededevedeseyereeedeonet 126 DIaGHOSGS e be MoS be Bee bas Re a daa asides ae AP eae 127 Power loss ride through coartada renales pas ee ee beheaded 127 S11 6 tr AE Ce ere arena e ee 127 pedo o An eRe eee a Ate ne ee OG ecg cree eee 128 SEMINE apera Anana en a ds oie eth oh ceed es
199. es Safety of machinery Electrical equipment of machines Part 1 General requirements Provisions for compliance The final assembler of the machine is responsible for installing an emergency stop device a supply disconnecting device Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems Part 3 EMC requirements and specific test methods UL Standard for Safety Power Conversion Equipment third edition 330 Technical data CE marking The CE mark is attached to the drive to verify that the drive follows the provisions of the European Low Voltage and EMC Directives Compliance with the European EMC Directive The EMC Directive defines the requirements for immunity and emissions of electrical equipment used within the European Union The EMC product standard EN 61800 3 2004 covers requirements stated for drives See section Compliance with EN 61800 3 2004 on page 330 Compliance with EN 61800 3 2004 E Definitions EMC stands for Electromagnetic Compatibility It is the ability of electrical electronic equipment to operate without problems within an electromagnetic environment Likewise the equipment must not disturb or interfere with any other product or system within its locality First environment includes establishments connected to a low voltage network which supplies buildings used for domestic purposes Second environment includes establishments connected to a network not directly supplying domestic premises D
200. es duty time between the pump motors Autochange periodically increments the position of each motor in the rotation the speed regulated motor becomes the last auxiliary motor the first auxiliary motor becomes the speed regulated motor etc See also section PFC control macro on page 110 E SPFC control Soft pump and fan control SPFC is used for pump and fan alternation applications where lower pressure peaks are desirable when a new auxiliary motor is connected online SPFC is an easy way to implement soft starting of direct on line auxiliary 152 Program features motors The main difference between traditional PFC and SPFC is the way SPFC connects auxiliary motors online SPFC connects auxiliary motors online with a flying start while the motor is still coasting Thus in some cases SPFC makes it possible to soften the start up current while connecting auxiliary motors online This is why lower pressure peaks on the pipelines and pumps may also be achieved Connection sequence and powering routine of auxiliary motors in SPFC is explained more detailed in the diagram The motor stopping routine follows always the normal PFC routine SPFC powering routine The diagram below illustrates the SPFC powering routine fout RO 1 Motor 1 i RO 2 Motor 2 es gt 8122 PFC START DELAY e 1 1 8122 PFC START DELAY gt 8122 PFC START DELAY 8115 AUX MOT START D 1 At start relay RO 1 is clo
201. es instead of a single tonal frequency resulting in lower peak noise intensity A random component with an average of 0 Hz is added to the switching frequency set by parameter 2606 SWITCHING FREQ Note Parameter has no effect if parameter 2606 SWITCHING FREQ is set to 16 kHz DISABLE Disabled Oo ENABLE Enabled 2610 USER Defines the first voltage point of the custom U f curve at the 19 of DEFINED U1 frequency defined by parameter 2611 USER DEFINED F1 Uy See section Custom U f ratio on page 130 0 120 of Un V Voltage 2611 USER Defines the first frequency point of the custom U f curve 10 0 Hz DEFINED F1 0 0 500 0H2 Frequency SSSA 2612 USER Defines the second voltage point of the custom U f curve at 38 of DEFINED U2 the frequency defined by parameter 2613 USER DEFINED Un F2 See section Custom U f ratio on page 130 0 120 of Uy V Voltage 2613 USER Defines the second frequency point of the custom U f curve 20 0 Hz DEFINED F2 0 0 500 0 Hz Frequency SSS 2614 USER Defines the third voltage point of the custom U f curve at the 47 5 of DEFINED U3 frequency defined by parameter 2615 USER DEFINED F3 Uy See section Custom U f ratio on page 130 0 120 of Uy V Voltage 2615 USER Defines the third frequency point of the custom U f curve 25 0 Hz DEFINED F3 0 0 500 0H2 Frequency SSSA 2616 USER Defines the fourth voltage point of the custom U f curve at 76 of DEFINED U4 the frequency defined by
202. ess 37 REM 0 l PAR 3 Find the appropriate parameter group with keys CAS and press 37 4 Find the appropriate parameter in the group with keys CA N CW 5 Press and hold 37 for about two seconds until the parameter value is shown with under the value 4 0 0 PAR FWD 6 Change the value with keys A N V The value changes faster while you keep the key pressed 3 8 0 down PAR FWD 7 Save the parameter value by pressing 7 Enter the rest of the motor data e motor nominal current parameter 9906 Allowed range 0 2 2 0 hy A e motor nominal frequency parameter 9907 e motor nominal speed parameter 9908 e motor nominal power parameter 9909 O Select the application macro parameter 9902 according to how the control cables are connected The default value 1 ABB STANDARD is suitable in most cases Start up and control with I O 61 Check the direction of the motor rotation If the drive is in remote control REM shown on the left switch to local control by pressing 2 To go to the Main menu press X if the bottom line shows OUTPUT otherwise press EY repeatedly until you see MENU at the bottom Press keys ANSY until you see rEF and press 7 Increase the frequency reference from zero to a small value with key lt a Press to start the motor Check that the actual direction of the motor is the same as indicated on the display FWD means forward and REV reverse
203. et to the Main menu ASSISTANTS CHANGED PAR EXIT 00 00 ENTER Go to the Fault logger mode by selecting FAULT LOC WFAULT LOGGER LOGGER on the menu with keys CA and SY 7 and 0 PANEL LOSS pressing lt The display shows the fault log starting 19 03 05 13 04 57 with the latest fault a a The number on the row is the fault code according to EXIT 00 00 DETAIL which the causes and corrective actions are listed in EXIT 00 00 DETAIL chapter Fault tracing on page 293 To see the details of a fault select it with keys As and LOC U PANEL LOSS yD and press Se FAULT 10 FAULT TIME 1 13 04 57 FAULT TIME 2 EXIT 00 00 DIAG To show the help text press Sl Scroll the help text with Loc U DIAGNOSTICS keys CA 5 and SY 7 Check comm lines After reading the help press lt to return to the e revious display arameters in groups p pay Po and 11 d EXIT 00 00 OK Control panels 95 E Time and date mode In the Time and date mode you can e show or hide the clock e change date and time display formats set the date and time e enable or disable automatic clock transitions according to the daylight saving changes e start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control The Assistant Control Panel contains a battery to ensure the function of the clock when the panel is not powered by the drive How to show or hide the clock change display formats set
204. eter on the list with keys AS LOC UPAR EDIT and SY 7 The value of the selected parameter is shown below it Press lt lt to modify the value 1202 CONST SPEED 1 0 0 Hz CANCEL 00 00 SAVE Specify a new value for the parameter with keys lt a LOC UPAR EDIT and Cw l 1202 CONST SPEED 1 Pressing the key once increments or decrements the HZ value Holding the key down changes the value faster Pressing the keys simultaneously replaces the displayed value with the default value CANCEL 00 00 SAVE To accept the new value press If the new value LOC CHANGED PART is the default value the parameter is removed from the 02 CONST SPEED list of changed parameters 0 RA To cancel the new value and keep the original press 1204 CONST SPEED 3 CANCEL 9902 APPLIC MACRO EXIT 00 00 EDIT 94 Control panels E Fault logger mode In the Fault logger mode you can e view the drive fault history of maximum ten faults after a power off only the three latest faults are kept in the memory e see the details of the three latest faults after a power off the details of only the most recent fault is kept in the memory e read the help text for the fault e start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control How to view faults Display Go to the Main menu by pressing S if you are inthe LOC U MAIN MENU I Output mode otherwise by pressing repeatedly 77 until IW INV Seales you g
205. eters 155 Actual signals and parameters What this chapter contains The chapter describes the actual signals and parameters and gives the fieldbus equivalent values for each signal parameter It also contains a table of the default values for the different macros Note When the control panel is in the short parameter view ie when parameter 1611 PARAMETER VIEW is set to 2 SHORT VIEW the control panel only shows a subset of all signals and parameters The lists of these signals and parameters starts on page 158 To be able to view all actual signals and parameters set parameter 1611 PARAMETER VIEW to 3 LONG VIEW The descriptions of all actual signals and parameters start on pages 160 and 167 respectively Terms and abbreviations Actual signal Signal measured or calculated by the drive Can be monitored by the user No user setting possible Groups 01 04 contain actual signals Parameter default value Parameter A user adjustable operation instruction of the drive Groups 10 99 contain parameters Note Parameter selections are shown on the Basic Control Panel as integer values Eg parameter 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS selection COMM is shown as value 10 which is equal to the fieldbus equivalent FbEq FbEq Fieldbus equivalent The scaling between the value and the integer used in serial communication Refers to types 03E with European parametrization Refers to types 03U with US parametrization 156 Actual signals
206. ettings e To stop the drive in local control press CO gt Text FWD or REV on the bottom line starts flashing slowly e To start the drive in local control press CH gt Text FWD or REV on the bottom line starts flashing rapidly It stops flashing when the drive reaches the setpoint Control panels 73 How to change the direction of the motor rotation You can change the direction of the motor rotation in any mode e EA If the drive is in remote control REM shown on the left switch to local control by pressing 2 29 The display briefly shows message LoC before returning to the previous display To change the direction from forward FWD shown at the bottom to reverse REV shown at the bottom or vice versa press Note Parameter 1003 DIRECTION must be set to 3 REQUEST 74 Control panels E Output mode In the Output mode you can e monitor actual values of up to three group 07 OPERATING DATA signals one signal at a time e start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control You get to the Output mode by pressing 7 until the display shows text OUTPUT at the bottom The display shows the value of one group 01 OPERATING DATA signal The unit is shown on the REM A 91 He right Page 77 tells how to select up to three signals to outPuT FWD be monitored in the Output mode The table below shows how to view them one ata time How to browse the monitored sign
207. exceeded alarm limit set by parameter 3503 ALARM LIMIT Motor is operating in stall region due to eg excessive load or insufficient motor power Check panel connection Check fault function parameters Check control panel connector Refit control panel in mounting platform If drive is in external control mode REM and is set to accept start stop direction commands or references through control panel Check group 10 START STOP DIR and 11 REFERENCE SELECT settings Check ambient conditions See also section Derating on page 319 Check air flow and fan operation Check motor power against unit power Check motor ratings load and cooling Check start up data Check fault function parameters Check value of alarm limit Check that actual number of sensors corresponds to value set by parameter 3501 SENSOR TYPE Let motor cool down Ensure proper motor cooling Check cooling fan clean cooling surfaces etc Check motor load and drive ratings Check fault function parameters 2013 AUTORESET Automatic reset alarm Check parameter group 31 1 0308 bit 12 AUTOMATIC RESET settings 2014 1 2015 2018 1 AUTOCHANGE 0308 bit 13 PFC I LOCK 0308 bit 14 PID SLEEP 0309 bit 1 PFC Autochange function is active PFC Interlocks are active Sleep function has entered sleeping mode See parameter group 81 PFC CONTROL section PFC control macro on page 110 and section SPFC control macro on
208. faults and view fault history It lists all alarm and fault messages including the possible cause and corrective actions Maintenance and hardware diagnostics page 311 contains preventive maintenance instructions and LED indicator descriptions Technical data page 317 contains technical specifications of the drive eg ratings sizes and technical requirements as well as provisions for fulfilling the requirements for CE and other marks Dimension drawings page 335 shows dimension drawings of the drive Introduction to the manual 21 e Further information inside of the back cover page 345 tells how to make product and service inquiries get information on product training provide feedback on ABB Drives manuals and find documents on the Internet Related documents See List of related manuals on page 2 Categorization by frame size The ACS310 is manufactured in frame sizes RO R4 Some instructions and other information which only concern certain frame sizes are marked with the symbol of the frame size RO R4 To identify the frame size of your drive see the table in section Ratings on page 318 22 Introduction to the manual Quick installation and commissioning flowchart Task See Identify the frame size of your drive RO R4 Operation principle and hardware description Type designation key on page 27 Technical data Ratings on page 318 Plan the installation select the cables etc Planning the electrical in
209. g input Al 2 2 See selection A 7 4411 Al OUT HI Sets the supervision limit for the primary outlet pressure 100 00 LEVEL measurement If the value of the selected analog input FAULT Detection of high outlet pressure trips the drive on a fault 3 exceeds this limit the action defined by parameter 4409 OUTLET PROT CTRL is taken after a delay set with parameter 4415 OUTLET CTRL DLY expires 0 00 100 00 Supervision level 1 0 01 4412 VERY HIGH Enables and selects the mode of the secondary outlet NOT SEL CTRL pressure supervision function The function uses the analog input selected by parameter 4410 Al MEAS OUTLET NOT SEL Secondary outlet pressure monitoring not used o STOP Detection of very high outlet pressure stops the drive The 1 drive will start again if the pressure falls below the supervision level FAULT Detection of very high outlet pressure trips the drive on a fault 413 Al OUT VERY Supervision level for secondary outlet pressure monitoring 100 00 HIGH function See parameter 4409 OUTLET PROT CTRL 0 00 100 00 Supervision level 1 0 01 240 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 4414 DI STATUS Selects the digital input for connection of a pressure switch NOT SEL OUTLET at the pump fan outlet The normal state is 1 active If the selected input switches to 0 inactive the action defined by parameter 4409 OUTLET PROT CTRL is taken after a
210. ge 27 Degree of protection by enclosure IP and UL NEMA Nominal ratings see section Ratings on page 378 4 Serial number of format MYYWWRXXXX where M Manufacturer YY 08 09 10 for 2008 2009 2010 WW 01 02 03 for week 1 week 2 week 3 R A B C for product revision number XXXX Integer starting every week from 0001 CE marking and C Tick C UL US and RoHS marks the label of your drive shows the valid markings Operation principle and hardware description 27 Type designation key The type designation contains information on the specifications and configuration of the drive You find the type designation on the type designation label attached to the drive The first digits from the left express the basic configuration for example ACS310 03E 09A7 4 The optional selections are given after that separated by signs for example J404 The explanations of the type designation selections are described below ACS310 03E 09A7 4 J404 ACS310 product series A 3 phase 03 3 phase input Configuration E EMC filter connected 50 Hz frequency U EMC filter disconnected 60 Hz frequency Output current rating In format xxAy where xx indicates the integer part and y the fractional part eg 09A7 means 9 7 A For more information see section Ratings on page 378 Input voltage range 2 200 240 VAC 4 380 480 VAC J404 ACS CP C Basic Control Panel 1 J400 AC
211. guration for PFC not complete The drive is unable to allocate a digital input interlock for each PFC motor Incorrect voltage to frequency U f ratio voltage setting It is not allowed to use frequency input signal and frequency output signal simultaneously OUTPUTS settings Check that following applies e 1504 MINIMUM AO1 lt 1505 MAXIMUM AO1 Check parameter settings Check that following applies e Relay Output Extension Module MREL 01 is connected to the drive 1402 1403 RELAY OUTPUT 2 RELAY OUTPUT 3 and 1410 RELAY OUTPUT 4 have non zero values See MREL 01 Relay Output Extension Module User s Manual 3AUA0000035974 English Check parameter settings Following must apply e There are enough relays parameterized for PFC No conflict exists between parameter group 14 RELAY OUTPUTS parameter 8117 NR OF AUX MOT and parameter 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV Check parameter settings Following must apply The actual number of PFC motors parameter 8127 MOTORS matches the PFC motors in parameter group 74 RELAY OUTPUTS and parameter 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV See parameters 8120 INTERLOCKS and 8127 MOTORS Check parameter 2610 USER DEFINED U17 2617 USER DEFINED F4 settings Disable frequency output or frequency input e change transistor output to digital mode value of parameter 1804 TO MODE DIGITAL or change frequency input selection to other value in parameter groups 11 R
212. h it off PO Keep key N pressed down while you switch on the power and read the panel firmware version shown on X X X the display g When you release the 3 key the panel goes to the Output mode How to start stop and switch between local and remote control You can start stop and switch between local and remote control in any mode To be able to start or stop the drive the drive must be in local control Step Action O y S e To switch between remote control REM shown on the left and local control LOC shown on the left press 2 Note Switching to local control can be disabled with parameter 1606 LOCAL LOCK After pressing the key the display briefly shows message LoC or rE as appropriate before returning to the previous display The very first time the drive is powered up it is in remote control REM and controlled through the drive I O terminals To switch to local control LOC and control the drive using the control panel press 2 The result depends on how long you press the key e If you release the key immediately the display flashes LoC the drive stops Set the local control reference as instructed on page 75 e If you press the key for about two seconds release when the display changes from LoC to LoC r the drive continues as before The drive copies the current remote values for the run stop status and the reference and uses them as the initial local control s
213. h parameter 4502 ENERGY PRICE See group 45 ENERGY SAVING 0177 SAVED Energy saved in local currency in thousand currency units AMOUNT 2 Eg value 5 means 5000 currency units See the note on page 242 The counter value is accumulated till it reaches 65535 the counter does not roll over See signal 0176 SAVED AMOUNT 1 Actual signals and parameters 163 All actual signals No Name Value Description 0178 SAVED CO2 Reduction in carbon dioxide emissions in tn See the note on page 242 The counter value is accumulated till it reaches 6553 5 the counter does nat roll over Can be reset with parameter 4509 ENERGY RESET resets all energy calculators at the same time CO conversion factor is set with parameter rc CONV FACTOR See group 45 ENERGY AVING 0301 FB CMD A 16 bit data word See section DCU communication profile WORD 1 on page 289 0302 FB CMD A 16 bit data word See section DCU communication profile WORD 2 on page 289 0303 FB STS WORD A 16 bit data word See section DCU communication profile 1 on page 289 0304 FB STS WORD A 16 bit data word See section DCU communication profile 2 on page 289 1 o E A 293 0305 FAULT WORD A 16 bit data word For the possible causes and remedies and fieldbus equivalents see chapter Fault tracing on page 93 Bit 14 EXT FAULT 2 7 Bit 15 EARTH FAULT 0306 FAULT WORD A 16 bit data word For the possible causes and remedies 2 and fieldbus equivalents see chapter Fa
214. h to external conr ExT ln o Ao Run nani ooo ai R Stop along teni active deceleration ramp bit 10 Bit 0 a must be 1 STOP a oe ees 0 No operation laca 1 Coastto stop BILO value mustbe E STOB o No operation OOS 10 RAMP_2 1 Use acceleration deceleration ramp pair 2 defined by parameters 2205 2207 Use acceleration deceleration ramp pair 1 defined by parameters 2202 2204 M RAMP OUT 0 T o No operation o E C operation 290 14 16 17 8 20 26 27 28 29 0 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus DCU profile Control word parameter 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 Name Value RAMP_IN_O Force ramp input to zero lO No operation REQ_LOCALLO 1 Enable local lock Entering the local control mode is disabled LOC REM key of the panel O No operation Reserved DCU profile Control word parameter 0302 FB CMD WORD 2 FBLOCAL_CTL 1 Fieldbus local mode for Control word requested Example If the drive is in remote control and the start stop direction command source is DI for external control location 1 EXT1 by setting bit 16 to value 1 the start stop direction is controlled by the fieldbus command word No fieldbus local mode FBLOCAL_REF 1 Fieldbus local mode Control word for reference requested See example in bit 16 FBLOCAL_CTL No fieldbus local mode START_DISABL 1 No Start enable Enable start Effective if parameter 1608 setting is COMM START_DISABL 1 N
215. he grounding conductors of each pair in the analog signal cable together and connect the bundle to the SCR terminal terminal 1 8 Secure all cables outside the drive mechanically 9 Slide the terminal cover back in place Sy LA 54 Electrical installation Connecting the embedded fieldbus Embedded fieldbus is connected to the drive with ElA 485 E Connection diagram The figure below shows the fieldbus connection X1C Fieldbus cable shield screen 24 8 Posve MID Mo 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 20 21 22 Terminate the ElA 485 bus with a 120 ohm resistor at the end of the network by setting the jumper J701 shunts as in the figure below Fieldbus controller termination resistor AL E Jumper shunts 4 Fieldbus connect the J701 J701 pi 120 ohm gt Installation checklist 55 Installation checklist Checking the installation Check the mechanical and electrical installation of the drive before start up Go through the checklist below together with another person Read chapter Safety on page 15 of this manual before you work on the drive The ambient operating conditions are allowed See Mechanical installation Checking the installation site on page 29 as well as Technical data Losses cooling data and noise on page 323 and Ambien
216. hen the internal EMC filter is disconnected the drive is not EMC compatible All ELV extra low voltage circuits connected to the drive must be used within a zone of equipotential bonding ie within a zone where all simultaneously accessible conductive parts are electrically connected to prevent hazardous voltages appearing between them This is accomplished by a proper factory grounding Note Even when the motor is stopped dangerous voltage is present at the power circuit terminals U1 V1 W1 and U2 V2 W2 Safety 17 E General safety WARNING Ignoring the following instructions can cause physical injury or death or damage to the equipment The drive is not field repairable Never attempt to repair a malfunctioning drive contact your local ABB representative or Authorized Service Center for replacement Make sure that dust from drilling does not enter the drive during the installation Electrically conductive dust inside the drive may cause damage or lead to malfunction Ensure sufficient cooling Safe start up and operation These warnings are intended for all who plan the operation start up or operate the drive E General safety WARNING Ignoring the following instructions can cause physical injury or death or damage to the equipment Before adjusting the drive and putting it into service make sure that the motor and all driven equipment are suitable for operation throughout the speed range provided by the
217. hey are displayed with group 1 0 3 34 PANEL DISPLAY parameters See page 76 for detailed instructions on changing parameter values By default the display shows three signals 1 0 A Signal 1 0103 OUTPUT FREQ Signal 2 0104 CURRENT PAR FWD Signal 3 0105 TORQUE To change the default signals select up to three 1 0 5 signals from group 01 OPERATING DATA to be shown Signal 1 Change the value of parameter 3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM to the index of the signal parameter in group 01 OPERATING DATA number of the parameter without the leading zero eg 105 means parameter 0105 TORQUE Value 100 means that no signal is displayed Repeat for signals 2 3408 SIGNAL2 PARAM and 3 3415 SIGNAL3 PARAM For example if 3401 0 and 3415 0 browsing is disabled and only the signal specified by 3408 appears in the display If all three parameters are set to 0 ie no signals are selected for monitoring the panel displays text n A PAR FWD PAR FWD Specify the decimal point location or use the decimal point location and unit of the source signal setting 9 o DIRECT Bar graphs are not available for Basic Operation Panel For details see parameter 3404 Signal 1 parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM Signal 2 parameter 3411 OUTPUT2 DSP FORM Signal 3 parameter 3418 OUTPUT3 DSP FORM PAR FWD has no effect if parameter 3404 3411 3418 is set to 9 DIRECT For details see parameter 3405 Signal 1 parameter 3405 OUTPUT1 UNIT Signal
218. his product may cause radio inference in which case supplementary mitigation measures may be required E Category C2 The emission limits are complied with the following provisions 1 The optional EMC filter is selected according to the ABB documentation and installed as specified in the EMC filter manual 2 The motor and control cables are selected as specified in this manual 3 The drive is installed according to the instructions given in this manual 4 For the maximum motor cable length with 4 kHz switching frequency see page 326 WARNING In a domestic environment this product may cause radio inference in which case supplementary mitigation measures may be required E Category C3 The immunity performance of the drive complies with the demands of IEC EN 61800 3 second environment see page 330 for IEC EN 61800 3 definitions The emission limits are complied with the following provisions 1 The internal EMC filter is connected the metal screw at EMC is in place or the optional EMC filter is installed 2 The motor and control cables are selected as specified in this manual 3 The drive is installed according to the instructions given in this manual 4 With the internal EMC filter motor cable length 30 m 100 ft with 4 kHz switching frequency For the maximum motor cable length with an optional external EMC filter see page 326 WARNING A drive of category C3 is not intended to be used on a low voltage public
219. if you do not want to run the Start up assistant Press key 7 to highlight MJ and then press lt REM U CHOICE if you want to make the panel ask or not ask the e stat oP question about running the Start up assistant again next_boot the next time you switch on the power to the drive ce EXIT 100 00 OK _ If you decided to run the Start up assistant the REM PAR EDIT display then asks you to select the language Scroll 9901 LANGUAGE to the desired language with keys lt a N Cv and ENGLISH SAVE press to accept 0 If you press Ez the Start up assistant is stopped eae LOD eve The Start up assistant now guides you through the REM PAR EDIT set up tasks starting with the motor set up Set the l90905 motor NOM VOLT motor data to exactly the same value as on the motor nameplate Scroll to the desired parameter value with keys 4 gt SAVE Cy and press 3 to accept and continue with the Start up assistant CANCEL 00 00 SAVE EXIT Note At any time if you press 7 the Start up assistant is stopped and the display goes to the Output mode The basic start up is now completed However it REM CHOICE D tt might be useful at this stage to set the parameters continue with required by your application and continue with the application setup application set up as suggested by the Start up assistant SK1p EXIT 00 00 OK Start up and control with O 63
220. ignals and parameters 181 All parameters No Name Value Description 1502 AO1 Defines the minimum value for the signal selected with CONTENT MIN parameter 1507 AO1 CONTENT SEL AO minimum and maximum correspond to the 1504 MINIMUM AO1 and 1505 MAXIMUM AO1 settings as follows AO mA 1502 1503 AO 1503 1502 AO content content XX Setting range depends on the parameter 1501 AO1 CONTENT SEL setting 1503 AO1 Defines the maximum value for the signal selected with CONTENT parameter 1501 AO1 CONTENT SEL See the figure for parameter 1502 AO1 CONTENT MIN x Setting range depends on the parameter 1501 AO1 CONTENT SEL setting 1504 MINIMUM AO1 Defines the minimum value for the analog output signal AO 0 0 mA See the figure for parameter 1502 AO1 CONTENT MIN 0 0 20 0 mA Minimum value 1 0 1 mA 1505 MAXIMUM Defines the maximum value for the analog output signal AO 20 0 mA AO1 See the figure for parameter 1502 AO1 CONTENT MIN 0 0 20 0 mA Maximum value 1 0 1 mA 1506 FILTER AO1 Defines the filter time constant for analog output AO ie the 0 1 s time within which 63 of a step change is reached See the figure for parameter 1303 FILTER Al1 0 10 0s Filter time constant 11601 RUN ENABLE Selects a source for the external Run enable signal NOT SEL NOT SEL Allows the drive to start without an external Run enable signal External signal required through digital input DI1 1 Run 1 enable If Run enable signal
221. iled 5060 Parameter download Retry parameter download aborted 5062 Parameter download has Retry parameter download failed 5070 Panel backup memory Contact your local ABB representative write error 5071 Panel backup memory Contact your local ABB Pp read error 5080 Operation is not allowed a a to local control mode because drive is not in local control mode 5081 Operation is not allowed PARIO cause of fault and reset fault because of active fault 5083 Operation is not allowed rencia parameter 1602 PARAMETER LOCK because parameter lock is setting on 5084 Operation is not allowed Wait until task is completed and retry because drive is performing task 5085 Parameter download from Check that source and destination drive types source to destination drive are same ie ACS310 See the type designation has failed label of the drive 5086 Parameter download from Check that source and destination drive type source to destination drive designations are the same See type has failed designation labels of the drives Fault tracing 301 ALARM CODE CAUSE WHAT TO DO 5087 Parameter download from Check that source and destination drive source to destination drive information are same See parameters in group has failed because 33 INFORMATION parameter sets are incompatible 5088 Operation has failed Contact your local ABB representative because of drive memory error 5089 Download has failed Contact
222. ill be generated and switch off the drive power then remove the panel to be able to see the LEDs At the top left Panel has no Green Drive ina normal Green Drive in an alarm corner of the power or no state state Assistant Control drive Drive in a fault Panel connection state To reset the fault press RESET from the control panel or switch off the drive power 316 Maintenance and hardware diagnostics Technical data 317 Technical data What this chapter contains The chapter contains the technical specifications of the drive eg ratings sizes and technical requirements as well as provisions for fulfilling the requirements for CE and other marks 318 Technical data Ratings Type Input Output ACS310 hn lip bn lomax Py x E U 1 IN IN A A kW hp 42 os os er os or ez mr 03x 02A6 2 4 03x 03A9 2 1 03x 05A2 2 03x 07A4 2 03x 08A3 2 03x 10A8 2 03x 14062 3 OD 194 2 4 03 26A8 2 OS4AT2 6 7 E 1 4 E 2 4 R R R 11 7 E MATAN 10 8 A R A R R R al al o al O3x 50A8 2 03x 01A3 4 05 03x 02A1 4 2 03x 02A6 4 03x 03A6 1 ee 03x 04A5 4 76 ies 03x 06A2 10 6 4 03x 08A0 4 4 NC 76 za 40 21 EC az or Cse IUCN IT E as s 13 36 2 6 8 2 2 3 3 2 5 8 7 2 A 3 6 2 80 97 154 4 188 2 6 3 3 9 4 5 2 6 7 4 7 8 3 13 1
223. including phasing Check ambient conditions Load capacity decreases if installation site ambient temperature exceeds 40 C See section Derating on page 319 Check deceleration time 2203 and 2206 Check input power line for static or transient overvoltage Check input power supply Check parameter 1003 DIRECTION settings Check status of fieldbus communication See chapter Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus on page 271 Check fault function parameter settings Check connections Check if master can communicate Check fault function parameter settings Check for proper analog control signal levels Check connections Check fault function parameter settings Check for proper analog control signal levels Check connections 296 Fault tracing CODE ALARM CAUSE WHAT TO DO 2008 2009 2010 2012 PANEL LOSS 0308 bit 7 programmable fault function 3002 DEVICE OVERTEMP 0308 bit 8 MOTOR TEMP 0305 bit 9 programmable fault function 3005 3009 3503 MOTOR STALL 0308 bit 11 programmable fault function 3010 3012 Control panel selected as active control location for drive has ceased communicating Drive IGBT temperature is excessive Alarm limit is 120 C Motor temperature is too high or appears to be too high due to excessive load insufficient motor power inadequate cooling or incorrect start up data Measured motor temperature has
224. ing function is triggered The NOT SEL TRIG pump cleaning sequence consists of forward and reverse Forward Revers I I I l I 4607 4605 4604 4606 4604 4605 4604 4608 WARNING Before enabling the Pump cleaning function ensure it is safe to perform the pump cleaning sequence with the connected equipment Notes The Pump cleaning function overrides parameter 1003 DIRECTION The Pump cleaning function observes the maximum forward and reverse frequencies parameters 2007 MINIMUM FREQ and 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ The Pump cleaning function always uses acceleration time 2 parameter 2205 and deceleration time 2 parameter 2206 The drive must be started and its Run enable signal must be present before the pump cleaning sequence can start 244 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq defined by parameter 4607 TRIG TIME DIZINV DIS INV DIA INV DIS NV DI1 INV S10 Enable on the falling edge of digital input DI1 trigger on 7 SUPRV1 OVER parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 See parameter group 32 SUPERVISION DI2 INV JS10 See selection D 1 INV S10 DI3 INV IS10 See selection D 1 INV S10 DI4 INV JS10 See selection D 1 INV S10 10 DI5 INV S10 See selection D 1 INV S10 11 4602 FWD STEP Defines the forward step frequency for the pump cleaning 0 0 sequence in percent of the nominal motor frequency parameter 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ 0 0 100 0 Forward step frequency
225. ion See section Motor temperature measurement through the standard I O on page 141 E Earth fault protection The Earth fault protection detects earth faults in the motor or motor cable The protection is active only during start An earth fault in the input power line does not activate the protection Settings Parameter 3017 EARTH FAULT E Incorrect wiring Defines the operation when incorrect input power cable connection is detected Program features 133 Settings Parameter 3023 WIRING FAULT E Input phase loss Input phase loss protection circuits supervise the input power cable connection status by detecting intermediate circuit ripple If a phase is lost the ripple increases Settings Parameter 3016 SUPPLY PHASE Pre programmed faults E Overcurrent The overcurrent trip limit for the drive is 325 of the drive nominal current E DC overvoltage The DC overvoltage trip limit is 420 V for 200 V drives and 840 V for 400 V drives E DC undervoltage The DC undervoltage trip limit is adaptive See parameter 2006 UNDERVOLT CTRL E Drive temperature The drive supervises the IGBT temperature There are two supervision limits Alarm limit and fault trip limit E Short circuit If a short circuit occurs the drive will not start and a fault indication is given E Internal fault If the drive detects an internal fault the drive is stopped and a fault indication is given Operation limits The drive has ad
226. is displayed on the panel 0 0 6553 5 kh Time Parameter is reset by setting it to zero 0 1 kh 2903 REVOLUTION Defines the trigger point for the motor revolution counter O Mrev TRIG Value is compared to parameter 2904 REVOLUTION ACT value 0 65535 Mrev Millions of revolutions If parameter value is set to zero the 1 trigger is disabled T 2904 REVOLUTION Defines the actual value for the motor revolution counter AC When parameter 2903 REVOLUTION TRIG has been set to a non zero value the counter starts When the actual value of the counter exceeds the value defined by parameter 2903 a maintenance notice is displayed on the panel 0 65535 Mrev Millions of revolutions Parameter is reset by setting it to 1 zero 2905 RUN TIME Defines the trigger point for the drive run time counter Value 0 0 kh TRIG is compared to parameter 2906 RUN TIME ACT value 0 0 6553 5 kh Time If parameter value is set to zero the trigger is 1 0 1 kh disabled 2906 RUN TIME Defines the actual value for the drive run time counter AC When parameter 2905 RUN TIME TRIG has been set to a non zero value the counter starts When the actual value of the counter exceeds the value defined by parameter 2905 a maintenance notice is displayed on the panel 0 0 6553 5 kh Time Parameter is reset by setting it to zero 0 1 kh 2907 USER MWh Defines the trigger point for the drive power consumption 0 0 MWh TRIG counter Value is compared t
227. is in remote control REM shown on the status line switch to local control by pressing 2 The display briefly shows a message about changing the mode and then returns to the Output mode Note With group 11 REFERENCE SELECT you can allow the reference modification in remote control To increase the highlighted reference value shown in the top right corner of the display press 4 gt The value changes immediately It is stored in the drive permanent memory and restored automatically after power switch off e To decrease the value press wv EXIT If you are not in the Output mode press ES repeatedly until you get there 0 5 A 10 7 DIR 00 00 MENU MENU e To increase the contrast press keys and aS simultaneously To decrease the contrast press keys Sul and v7 simultaneously DIR 00 00 MENU 88 Control panels E Parameters mode In the Parameters mode you can e view and change parameter values e start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control How to select a parameter and change its value Go to the Main menu by pressing if you are in the LOC U MAIN MENU 1 Output mode otherwise by pressing repeatedly EP until PARAMETERS you get to the Main menu ASSISTANTS CHANGED PAR EXIT 00 00 ENTER Go to the Parameters mode by selecting PARAMETERS Loc UPAR GROUPS O1 on the menu with keys 45 and SY 7 and pressing Ol OPERATING DATA ENTER 03 FB
228. is loaded into use Dean See selection DN E N i ii 184 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 1606 LOCAL LOCK Disables entering local control mode or selects the source NOT SEL for the local control mode lock signal When local lock is active entering the local control mode is disabled LOC REM key of the panel NOT SEL Local control is allowed DI1 Local control mode lock signal through digital input DI1 Rising edge of digital input DI1 Local control disabled Falling edge of digital input DI1 Local control allowed See selection D 7 See selection D 7 See selection D 7 See selection D 7 ON Localcontrolis disabled COMM Fieldbus interface as the source for the local lock e control word 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 bit 14 The control word is sent by the fieldbus controller through the embedded fieldbus Modbus to the drive For the control word bits see section DCU communication profile on page 289 Note This setting applies only for the DCU profile DI1 INV Local lock through inverted digital input DI1 Rising edge of inverted digital input DI1 Local control allowed Falling edge of inverted digital input DI1 Local control disabled DI2 INV See selection D 1 INV DI3 INV See selection D 1 INV DI4 INV See selection D 1 INV DI5 INV See selection D 1 INV 1607 PARAM SAVE Saves the valid parameter values to the permanent memory Not
229. istance grounded over 30 ohms power system otherwise the system will be connected to ground potential through the EMC filter capacitors This may cause danger or damage the drive Disconnect the internal EMC filter when installing the drive on a corner grounded TN system otherwise the drive will be damaged Note When the internal EMC filter is disconnected the drive is not EMC compatible 1 If you have an IT ungrounded or corner grounded TN system disconnect the internal EMC filter by removing the EMC screw For 3 phase U type drives with type designation ACS310 03U the EMC screw is already removed at the factory and replaced by a plastic one Note In frame size R4 the EMC screw is located to the right of terminal W2 Electrical installation 47 Connecting the power cables E Connection diagram OUTPUT For alternatives see section Selecting the supply disconnecting device disconnecting means on page 35 1 Ground the other end of the PE conductor at the distribution board 2 Use a separate grounding cable if the conductivity of the cable shield is insufficient smaller than the conductivity of the phase conductor and there is no symmetrically constructed grounding conductor in the cable See section Selecting the power cables on page 36 Note Do not use an asymmetrically constructed motor cable If there is a symmetrically constructed grounding conduc
230. justable limits for output frequency current maximum and DC voltage E Settings Parameter group 20 LIMITS 134 Program features Power limit Power limitation is used to protect the input bridge and the DC intermediate circuit If the maximum allowed power is exceeded the drive torque is automatically limited Maximum overload and continuous power limits depend on the drive hardware For specific values see chapter Technical data on page 317 Automatic resets The drive can automatically reset itself after overcurrent overvoltage undervoltage external and analog input below a minimum faults The Automatic resets must be activated by the user E Settings Additional information 31 AUTOMATIC RESET Automatic reset settings E Diagnostics Additional information AUTORESET Automatic reset alarm Supervisions The drive monitors whether certain user selectable variables are within the user defined limits The user may set limits for speed current etc The supervision status can be indicated through relay or digital output The supervision function outputs can be used for triggering some drive functionality start stop sleep pump cleaning The supervision functions operate on a 2 ms time level E Settings Parameter group 32 SUPERVISION E Diagnostics Actual signal Additional information 1001 1002 EXT1 EXT2 start stop according to supervision functions 1401 Supervision status through RO 1 1402 1403 14
231. keys 45 and SY 7 and pressing To copy all parameters including user sets and internal parameters from the drive to the control panel select UPLOAD TO PANEL on the Par backup menu with keys AS and Cv and press SN terrassa ld During the transfer the display shows the transfer status as a percentage of completion Press EZ if you want to stop the operation ABORT 00 00 After the upload is completed the display shows a O message about the completion Press vl to return to the Par backup menu LOC UMESSAGE Parameter_upload successful OK 00 00 To perform downloads select the appropriate operation here DOWNLOAD FULL SET is used as an example on the Par backup menu with keys As and _v_ and press SS The display shows the transfer status as a percentage of completion Press E if you want to stop the operation After the download is completed the display shows a message about the completion Press Sy to return to the Par backup menu LOC UPAR BACKUP Downloading parameters full set ae Re a a ee ee ABORT 00 00 LOC UMESSAGE Parameter_download successful ly completed OK 00 00 How to view information about the backup Go to the Main menu by pressing lt if you are in the Output mode otherwise by pressing repeatedly EP until you get to the Main menu Go to the Par backup mode by selecting PAR BACKUP on the menu with keys 45 and SY 7 and pressing Select BACKUP INF
232. le to connect a motor temperature measurement to the drive The user can tune both the thermal model and the temperature measurement function further by parameters The most common temperature sensors are e motor sizes IEC180 225 thermal switch for example Klixon e motor sizes IEC200 250 and larger PTC or Pt100 For more information on the thermal model see section Motor thermal protection on page 132 For more information on the temperature measurement function see section Motor temperature measurement through the standard I O on page 141 Using residual current devices RCD with the drive ACS310 03x drives are suitable to be used with residual current devices of Type B Other measures for protection in case of direct or indirect contact such as separation from the environment by double or reinforced insulation or isolation from the supply system by a transformer can also be applied Implementing a bypass connection WARNING Never connect the supply power to the drive output terminals U2 V2 and W2 Power line voltage applied to the output can result in permanent damage to the drive If frequent bypassing is required employ mechanically connected switches or contactors to ensure that the motor terminals are not connected to the AC power line and drive output terminals simultaneously Planning the electrical installation 43 Protecting the contacts of relay outputs Inductive loads relays contactors motors cause vo
233. lected as the source for external reference REF 1 this value corresponds to the value of parameter 1105 REF1 MAX Actual signals and parameters 177 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 100 0 100 0 Value in percent of the full signal range Example If the maximum value for analog input is 10 mA the percent value for 0 20 mA range is 10 mA 20 mA 100 50 1303 FILTER Al1 Defines the filter time constant for analog input Al1 ie the time within which 63 of a step change is reached Unfiltered signal Filtered signal 7 Time constant 0 0 10 0s Filter time constant 0 1s 1304 MINIMUM AI2 Defines the minimum value that corresponds to minimum 1 0 mA V signal for analog input Al2 See parameter 1301 MINIMUM Al1 100 0 100 0 See parameter 1301 MINIMUM Al1 0 1 1305 MAXIMUM Al2 Defines the maximum value that corresponds to 100 0 maximum mA V signal for analog input Al2 See parameter 1302 MAXIMUM AlI1 100 0 100 0 See parameter 1302 MAXIMUM Al1 0 1 1306 FILTER Al2 Defines the filter time constant for analog input Al2 See 0 1s parameter 1303 FILTER Al1 0 0 10 0s Filter time constant 0 1s NOT SEL READY Ready to function Run enable signal on no fault supply voltage within acceptable range and emergency stop signal off 1401 RELAY Selects a drive status indicated through relay output RO 1 FAULT 1 OUTPUT 1 The relay energizes when the
234. livery and install the drive mechanically Planning the electrical installation page 35 tells how to check the compatibility of the motor and the drive and select cables protections and cable routing Electrical installation page 45 tells how to check the insulation of the assembly and the compatibility with IT ungrounded and corner grounded TN systems as well as connect power cables control cables and embedded fieldbus Installation checklist page 55 contains a checklist for checking the mechanical and electrical installation of the drive Start up and control with I O page 57 tells how to start up the drive as well as how to start stop change the direction of the motor rotation and adjust the motor speed through the I O interface Application macros page 101 gives a brief description of each application macro together with a wiring diagram showing the default control connections It also explains how to save a user macro and how to recall it Program features page 113 describes program features with lists of related user settings actual signals and fault and alarm messages Actual signals and parameters page 155 describes actual signals and parameters It also lists the default values for the different macros Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus page 277 tells how the drive can be controlled by external devices over a communication network using embedded fieldbus Fault tracing page 293 tells how to reset
235. ls and parameters 263 Description Enables the Interlocks function and assigns a digital input Def FbEq Not allowed DI1 DI2 Free DI3 First PFC relay DI4 Second PFC relay DI5 Third PFC relay Not allowed Not allowed Enables the Interlock function and assigns a digital input starting with DI4 to the interlock signal for each PFC relay These assignments are defined in the following table and depend on the number of PFC relays number of parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 with value 31 PFC e the Autochange function status disabled if 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 0 and otherwise enabled No of Autochange disabled Autochange enabled PFC Parameter 8118 Parameter 8118 relays DI1 DI3 Free DI4 Speed reg motor DI5 Free DI4 Speed reg motor DI5 First PFC relay 2 Not allowed ES Free DI1 DI3 Free DI4 First PFC relay DI5 Free DI1 DI3 Free DI4 First PFC relay DI5 Second PFC relay 3 5 Not allowed Not allowed 3 starting with DI3 to the interlock signal for each PFC relay These assignments are defined in the following table and depend on the number of PFC relays number of parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 with value 31 PFC e the Autochange function status disabled if 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 0 and otherwise enabled No of Autochange disabled Autochange enabled PFC Parameter 8118 Parameter 8118 relays DI2 Free Not allowed Speed reg motor DI5 Free
236. ltage transients when switched off Equip inductive loads with noise attenuating circuits varistors RC filters AC or diodes DC in order to minimize the EMC emission at switch off If not suppressed the disturbances may connect capacitively or inductively to other conductors in the control cable and form a risk of malfunction in other parts of the system Install the protective component as close to the inductive load as possible Do not install protective components at the I O terminal block Varistor z 4 i Drive 230 V AC relay output RC filter f Drive 230 V AC relay output Diode i Drive 24 V DC relay output 44 Planning the electrical installation Electrical installation 45 Electrical installation What this chapter contains The chapter tells how to check the insulation of the assembly and the compatibility with IT ungrounded and corner grounded TN systems as well as connect power cables control cables and embedded fieldbus ip WARNING The work described in this chapter may only be carried out by a qualified electrician Follow the instructions in chapter Safety on page 15 Ignoring the safety instructions can cause injury or death Make sure that the drive is disconnected from the input power during installation If the drive is already connected to the input power wait for 5 minutes after disconnecting the input power Checking the insulation of the assem
237. lues menus or lists Shows also faults and alarms Bottom line shows current functions of the two soft keys and if enabled the clock display Soft key 1 Function depends on the context The text in the lower left corner of the LCD display indicates the function Increments the reference value if the upper right corner is highlighted 5 Up e Scrolls up through a menu or list displayed in the center of the LCD display Increments a value if a parameter is selected Holding the key down changes the value faster e Decrements the reference value if the upper right corner is highlighted Holding the key down changes the value faster 7 LOC REM Changes between local and remote control of the drive Ka Help Displays context sensitive information when the key is pressed The information Scrolls down through a menu or list displayed in the center of the LCD display Decrements a value if a parameter is selected displayed describes the item currently highlighted in the center of the display STOP Stops the drive in local control START Starts the drive in local control 82 Control panels Status line The top line of the LCD display shows the basic status information of the drive LOC LOC UMAIN MENU 1 OS 4 00 Field Alternatives No control panel I O or fieldbus State Rotating arrow Dotted rotating arrow Drive is running but not at setpoint
238. m frequency 2101 START Selects the motor starting method FUNCTION AUTO The drive starts the motor instantly from zero frequency If 1 flying start is required use selection SCAN START DC MAGN The drive pre magnetizes the motor with DC current before 2 the start The pre magnetizing time is defined by parameter 2103 DC MAGN TIME Note Starting the drive connected to a rotating motor is not possible when DC MAGN is selected WARNING The drive will start after the set pre magnetizing time has passed even if the motor magnetization is not completed In applications where a full break away torque is essential always ensure that the constant magnetizing time is long enough to allow generation of full magnetization and torque 190 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq TORQ BOOST Torque boost should be selected if a high break away 4 torque is required The drive pre magnetizes the motor with DC current before the start The pre magnetizing time is defined by parameter 2103 DC MAGN TIME Torque boost is applied at start Torque boost is stopped when output frequency exceeds 20 Hz or when it is equal to the reference value See parameter 2110 TORQ BOOST CURR Note Starting the drive connected to a rotating motor is not possible when TORQ BOOST is selected WARNING The drive will start after the set pre magnetizing time has passed although the motor magnetization is not completed
239. meter is set to FRIDAY timed function 1 is deactivated on Friday midnight 23 59 58 Se ses parameter 3602 START TIME J 3607 STOP TIME 2 See parameter 3003 STOP TME Ses parameter 3003 STOP TME Jo 3608 START DAY 2 See parameter 3604 START DAYI ses parameter 3604 STARTDAY 1 3609 STOP DAY 2 See parameter 3605 STOP Day J Seo parameter 3605 stop Day Jo 3610 START TIME 3 See parameter 3602 START TIMET ses parameter 3002 START TIME J 3611 STOP TIME 3 See parameter 3603 STOP TIMET Ses parameter 3003 STOP TME O JOO 3612 START DAY 3 See parameter 3004 START DAYI 218 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description See parameter 3604 START DAY 1 See parameter 3605 STOP DAY 1 Def FbEq 613 STOP DAY 3 614 START TIME 4 615 STOP TIME 4 See parameter 3605 STOP DAY 1 Selects the source for the booster activation signal NOT SEL SEL NOT SEL No booster activation signal DI1 Digital input DI1 1 active O inactive D2 DI DIS DI1 INV Inverted digital input DI1 O active 1 inactive 1 DIZANV See selection DIN H DIS INV See selection DIN DIA INV See selection DIH INV H DIBINV See selection DIH INV H 3623 BOOSTER Defines the time inside which the booster is deactivated 616 START DAY 4 617 STOP DAY 4 3622 BOOSTER l TIME 00 00 00 23 59 58 after the booster activation signal is switched off hours
240. minutes seconds Example If parameter 3622 BOOSTER SEL is set to DI1 and 3623 BOOSTER TIME is set to 01 30 00 the booster is active for 1 hour and 30 minutes after digital input DI is deactivated Booster active Booster time 3626 TIMED FUNC 1 Selects the time periods for TIMED FUNC 1 SRC Timed NOT SEL SRC function can consist of 0 4 time periods and a booster NOT SEL No time periods selected Time period 1 1 Time period 2 2 Ss 2 oO o S Actual signals and parameters 219 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 73 THT3 Time periods Pang 1213 PGE v4 TTA TeTaTa Time periods 1 24 O o fn Tota Time pa iods 4 and3 O Me TiT3 T4 Time periods 1 3a OOO o fe THT2 TS T4 Time periods 1 2 3a fe BOOSTER Booster Oo o me Ti Boosterand ime prio r 1248 Booster and ime period fe THT248 Booster and time periods Tand2 o THB Boosterandtime piod fo TH T3 B Booster and time periods Tand3 fz TH T2 TS B_ Booster and time periods 1 293 a THT4 B Booster and time periods Tanda ToT Booster and time periods 3and4 THTS T B_ Booster and tme periods 1 3ad4 a T2T3 T4 6 Booster and time periods 2 3ard4 fao 112131448 Booster and time periods 1 2 3and4 fo 3627 TIMED FUNC 2 See parameter 3626 TIMED FUNC 1 SRC SRC See parameter 3626 TIMED FUNC 1 SRC o 3628 TIMED FUNC 3 See parameter 3626 TIMED FUNC 1 SRC A SRC See parameter 3626 TI
241. mode 0115 KWH kWh counter The counter value is accumulated till it COUNTER R reaches 65535 after which the counter rolls over and starts again from 0 The counter can be reset by pressing UP and DOWN keys simultaneously when the control panel is in the Parameter mode 0116 APPL BLK Application block output signal Value is either from PFC 1 0 1 OUTPUT control if PFC control is active or from signal 0112 EXTERNAL REF 2 0120 Al1 Relative value of analog input Al1 in percent 0 1 0121 Al 2 Relative value of analog input Al2 in percent 0 1 0124 AO 1 Value of analog output AO in mA 0126 PID 1 OUTPUT Output value of the process PID1 controller in percent 0 1 0127 PID 2 OUTPUT Output value of the PID2 controller in percent 0 1 0128 PID 1 SETPNT Setpoint signal reference for the process PID1 controller Unit depends on parameter 4006 UNITS 4007 UNIT SCALE and 4027 PID 1 PARAM SET settings alo i al W V V 1 C 1 1 1 0 E o LE N O gt Il 3 gt ME l Actual signals and parameters 161 All actual signals No Name Value Description 0129 PID 2 SETPNT Setpoint signal reference for the PID2 controller Unit depends on parameter 4106 UNITS and 4107 UNIT SCALE settings 0130 PID 1 FBK Feedback signal for the process PID1 controller Unit depends on parameter 4006 UNITS 4007 UNIT SCALE and 4027 PID 1 PARAM SET settings 0131 PID 2 FBK Feedback signal for the PID2 con
242. mpedance as well as the cross sectional area material and length of the supply cable In case the 0 5 seconds operating time is exceeded with the gG or T fuses ultra rapid aR fuses will in most cases reduce the operating time to an acceptable level Note Larger fuses must not be used Type Fuses Size of copper conductor in cablings ACS310 gG UL Class T Supply Motor PE 600 V U1 V1 W1 U2 V2 W2 x E U A A mm AWG mm AWG mm AWG 1 5 osxt4a6 2 25 30 60 10 6 10 60 10 03x 19A4 2 25 35 60 10 6 f 10 6o 10 o3x26a82 63 60 100 8 10 8 100 8 oxa 80 80 160 6 16 6 160 6 03x 04A5 4 03x 09A7 4 03x13A8 4 25 30 60 10 6 10 60 10 e 6 03x 25Ad 4 o3x34A 14 80 s0 16 03x 48A4 4 00578903 xls D 322 Technical data Dimensions weights and free space requirements E Dimensions and weights Dimensions and weights IP20 cabinet UL open H1 H2 H3 WwW D Weight mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in 0 He Ro 169 6 65 202 7 95 2 76 161 6 34 6 65 202 7 95 2 76 161 6 34 6 65 202 7 95 4 13 165 6 50 6 65 7 95 9 29 6 65 6 65 7 13 7 95 9 61 10 24 169 6 65 00578903 xls D Dimensions and weights IP20 NEMA 1 H4 H5 Ww Weight mm in mm in mm in mm in kg Ib Ro 287 10 12 280 11 02 70 276 10 12 280 11 02 70 2 76 6 65 10 12 282 11 10 105 4 13 6 65 10 24 6 05 177 697 10 63 320 12 60 10 2 6 97 005
243. n 3004 EARTH FAULT 2330 0305 bit 15 programmable fault function 3017 Motor temperature is too high or appears to be too high due to excessive load insufficient motor power inadequate cooling or incorrect start up data Measured motor temperature has exceeded fault limit set by parameter 3504 FAULT LIMIT Control panel selected as active control location for drive has ceased communicating Motor is operating in stall region due to eg excessive load or insufficient motor power External fault 1 External fault 2 Drive has detected earth ground fault in motor or motor cable Check motor ratings load and cooling Check start up data Check fault function parameters Check value of fault limit Check that actual number of sensors corresponds to value set by parameter 3501 SENSOR TYPE Let motor cool down Ensure proper motor cooling Check cooling fan clean cooling surfaces etc Check panel connection Check fault function parameters Check control panel connector Refit control panel in mounting platform If drive is in external control mode REM and is set to accept start stop direction commands or references through control panel Check group 10 START STOP DIR and 11 REFERENCE SELECT settings Check motor load and drive ratings Check fault function parameters Check external devices for faults Check parameter 3003 EXTERNAL FAULT 1 setting Check external devices f
244. n Def FbEq 3006 MOT THERM Defines the thermal time constant for the motor thermal 500 s model e the time within which the motor temperature has reached 63 of the nominal temperature with steady load For thermal protection according to UL requirements for NEMA class motors use the rule of thumb Motor thermal time 35 t6 t6 in seconds is specified by the motor manufacturer as the time the motor can safely operate at six times its rated current Thermal time for a Class 10 trip curve is 350 s for a Class 20 trip curve 700 s and for a Class 30 trip curve 1050 s Motor load Temp rise 100 Par 3006 2569898 3 JE 3007 MOT LOAD Defines the load curve together with parameters 3008 100 CURVE ZERO SPEED LOAD and 3009 BREAK POINT FREQ With the default value 100 motor overload protection is functioning when the constant current exceeds 127 of the parameter 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR value The default overloadability is at the same level as what motor manufacturers typically allow below 30 C 86 F ambient temperature and below 1000 m 3300 ft altitude When the ambient temperature exceeds 30 C 86 F or the installation altitude is over 1000 m 3300 ft decrease the parameter 3007 value according to the motor manufacturer s recommendation Example If the constant protection level needs to be 115 of the motor nominal current set parameter 3007 value to 91 115 127 100 Output current relative t
245. n in section Terminal and lead through data for the power cables on page 324 3 Restore power Control panel E Cleaning the control panel Use a soft damp cloth to clean the control panel Avoid harsh cleaners which could scratch the display window Changing the battery in the Assistant Control Panel A battery is only used in Assistant Control Panels that have the clock function available and enabled The battery keeps the clock operating in memory during power interruptions The expected life for the battery is greater than ten years To remove the battery use a coin to rotate the battery holder on the back of the control panel Replace the battery with type CR2032 Note The battery is NOT required for any control panel or drive functions except the clock Maintenance and hardware diagnostics 315 LEDs There is a green and a red LED on the front of the drive They are visible through the panel cover but invisible if a control panel is attached to the drive The Assistant Control Panel has one LED The table below describes the LED indications Where LED off LED lit and steady LED blinking On the front of No power Green Power supply on Green Drive in an alarm the drive the board OK state a o P Drive in a fault Drive in a fault state drive switch to state To reset To reset the fault remote control the fault press switch off the drive otherwise a fault RESET from the power control panel or w
246. n or equal to compared to the rated motor power The power ratings are the same regardless of the supply voltage within one voltage range Note 1 The maximum allowed motor shaft power is limited to 1 5 Py If the limit is exceeded motor torque and current are automatically restricted The function protects the input bridge of the drive against overload Note 2 The ratings apply at ambient temperature of 40 C 104 F for ly and 50 C 122 F for hip In multimotor systems the drive output current rating p must be equal to or greater than the calculated sum of the input currents of all motors E Derating ly The load capacity decreases if the installation site ambient temperature exceeds 40 C 104 F or if the altitude exceeds 1000 meters 3300 ft or the switching frequency is changed from 4 kHz to 8 12 or 16 kHz l_p The load capacity decreases if the altitude exceeds 1000 meters 3300 ft or the switching frequency is changed from 4 kHz to 8 12 or 16 kHz Temperature derating lon In the temperature range 40 C 50 C 104 F 122 F the rated output current ly is decreased by 1 for every additional 1 C 1 8 F The output current is calculated by multiplying the current given in the rating table by the derating factor Example If the ambient temperature is 50 C 122 F the derating factor is 100 1 2 10 C 90 or 0 90 The output current is then 0 90 Izy Altitude derating ly and
247. n principle and hardware description 25 E Power connections and control interfaces The diagram gives an overview of connections I O connections are parameterable See chapter Application macros on page 101 for I O connections for the different macros and chapter Electrical installation on page 45 for installation in general Control panel 4 RJ 45 Analog output Screen Analog input 1 0 10 V 0 20 mA Reference voltage 10 V DC max 10 mA Analog input 2 PROGRAMMABLE RELAY e varaga gupi AND DIGITAL OUTPUTS 24 V DC max 200 mA 17 18 Relay output 250 VAC 30VDC 6A PROGRAMMABLE 919 DIGITAL INPUTS 20 Digital frequency output 021 PNP transistor type DI5 can also be used 3 30 V DC max 100 mA as a frequency input Modbus RTU ma Output relay module MREL 01 ElA 485 EMC filter grounding screw FlashDrop Varistor grounding screw L144 3 phase power supply L2 200 480 VAC AC motor L3 26 Operation principle and hardware description Type designation label The type designation label is attached to the left side of the drive An example label and explanation of the label contents are shown below ABB ACS310 03E 09A7 4 1 IP20 UL Open type 2 DIAN S N MYYWWRXXXX 4 kW 5 HP DIN U1_3 380 480 V 3AUA0000039632 1 3 15 0 A f1 48 63 Hz U2 3 0 U1V 2 97A f2 0 500 Hz Type designation see section Type designation key on pa
248. nable Start disable signal ie control word 0302 FB CMD WORD 2 bit 18 bit 19 for Start enable 2 The control word is sent by the fieldbus controller through the embedded fieldbus Modbus to the drive For the control word bits see section DCU communication profile on page 289 Note This setting applies only for the DCU profile DI1 INV External signal required through inverted digital input DI1 0 Start enable If Start enable signal is switched off the drive will not start or it coasts to stop if it is running and alarm START ENABLE 1 MISSING is activated DI1 DI2 DI3 See selection D 7 DI4 DI5 186 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq ENABLE 2 parameter 1608 START ENABLE 1 See parameter 1608 STARTENABLET 1610 DISPLAY Activates deactivates alarms OVERCURRENT 2001 ALARMS OVERVOLTAGE 2002 UNDERVOLTAGE 2003 and DEVICE OVERTEMP 2009 For more information see chapter Fault tracing on page 293 Y Alarms are active 1 1611 PARAMETER Selects the parameter view ie which parameters are shown SHORT VIEW on the control panel VIEW 2 3 4 5 FLASHDROP Shows the FlashDrop parameter list Does not include the short parameter list Parameters which are hidden by the FlashDrop device are not visible FlashDrop is designed for fast copying of parameters to unpowered drives It allows easy customization of the parameter list eg selected parameters can be hi
249. nal 3 0105 TORQUE To change the default signals select up to three signals from group 01 OPERATING DATA to be shown Signal 1 Change the value of parameter 3401 SIGNAL 1 PARAM to the index of the signal parameter in group 01 OPERATING DATA number of the parameter without the leading zero eg 105 means parameter 0105 TORQUE Value O means that no signal is displayed Repeat for signals 2 3408 SIGNAL2 PARAM and 3 3415 SIGNAL3 PARAM Select how you want the signals to be displayed as a decimal number or a bar graph For decimal numbers you can specify the decimal point location or use the decimal point location and unit of the source signal setting 9 DIRECT For details see parameter 3404 Signal 1 parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM Signal 2 parameter 3411 OUTPUT2 DSP FORM Signal 3 parameter 3418 OUTPUT3 DSP FORM Select the units to be displayed for the signals This has no effect if parameter 3404 3411 3418 is set to 9 DIRECT For details see parameter 3405 Signal 1 parameter 3405 OUTPUT1 UNIT Signal 2 parameter 3412 OUTPUT2 UNIT Signal 3 parameter 3419 OUTPUT3 UNIT Control panels 89 LOC UPARAMETERS 9901 LANGUAGE 9902 APPLIC MACRO 3 WIRE 9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR EXIT 00 00 EDIT LOC UPAR EDIT 3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM OUTPUT FREQ 103 ET 00 00 SAVE LOC UPAR EDIT 3408 SIGNAL2 PARAM CURRENT 104 CANCEL 00 00 SAVE LOC UPAR EDIT 3415 SIGNAL3 PARAM TORQUE 105 CANC
250. nce minimum and maximum correspond to the 1301 MINIMUM AI and 1302 MAXIMUM Al1 settings as follows REF Hz D Ow walo N N N 0 Oo N al N o o REF1 MAX _ 1105 l REF1 MIN 1104 1302 1301 AM signal REF1 MIN _ 1104 REF1 MAX 1105 172 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 1105 REF1 MAX Defines the maximum value for external reference REF1 E 50 0 Hz Corresponds to the maximum setting of the used source U 60 0 Hz signal 0 0 500 0 Hz Maximum value in Hz See the example for parameter 1104 1 0 1 Hz REF1 MIN Al DI3U 4D COMM COMMEAN 19 i 12 ATAI 14 40 PROCESS PID SET 1 and 41 PROCESS PID SET 2 Se A 1107 REF2 MIN Defines the minimum value for external reference REF2 0 0 Corresponds to the minimum setting of the used source signal 100 0 Value in percent of the maximum frequency maximum speed nominal torque See the example for parameter 1104 REF1 MIN for correspondence to the source signal limits 1108 REF2 MAX Defines the maximum value for external reference REF2 100 0 Corresponds to the maximum setting of the used source signal 0 0 100 0 Value in percent of the maximum frequency maximum speed nominal torque See the example for parameter 1104 REF1 MIN for correspondence to the source signal limits Actual signals and parameters 173 All parameters
251. nd parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 8123 PFC ENABLE Selects PFC control or SPFC control When enabled PFC NOT SEL control or SPFC control does the following e Switches in or out auxiliary constant speed motors as output demand increases or decreases Parameters 8109 START FREQ 1 to 8114 LOW FREQ 3 define the switch points in terms of the drive output frequency Adjusts the speed regulated motor output down as auxiliary motors are added and adjusts the speed regulated motor output up as auxiliary motors are taken off line e Provides Interlock functions if enabled NOT SEL Disabled ACTIVE PFC control enabled 1 SPFC ACTIVE SPFC control enabled Soft pump and fan control is used for 2 alternation applications where lower pressure peaks are desirable when a new auxiliary motor is started 8124 ACC IN AUX Sets the PFC acceleration time for a zero to maximum 0 0 NO STOP frequency ramp This PFC acceleration ramp T SEL applies to the speed regulated motor when an auxiliary motor is switched off replaces the acceleration ramp defined in group 22 ACCEL DECEL applies only until the output of the regulated motor increases by an amount equal to the output of the switched off auxiliary motor Then the acceleration ramp defined in group 22 ACCEL DECEL applies fout A t Aux motor 1 0 A speed regulated motor accelerating using group 22 ACCEL DECEL parameters 2202
252. nged from EXT1 to EXT2 from EXT2 to EXT1 or from LOC to REM COMM AlI1 Summation of fieldbus reference REF2 and analog input Al1 See section Reference selection and correction on page 277 Actual signals and parameters 225 All parameters No Name Value Description DI3U 4D NC Digital input DI3 Reference increase Digital input DI4 Reference decrease The program stores the active reference not reset by a stop command The reference is not saved if the control source is changed from EXT1 to EXT2 from EXT2 to EXT1 or from LOC to REM Al1 Al2 Reference is calculated with the following equation REF Al1 Al2 50 Al1 AI2 Reference is calculated with the following equation REF Al Al2 50 Al1 Al2 Reference is calculated with the following equation REF Al1 50 Al2 AI1 Al2 Reference is calculated with the following equation REF Al1 50 Al2 INTERNAL A constant value defined by parameter 4017 INTERNAL SETPNT 4036 INTERNAL SETPNT2 4037 INTERNAL SETPNT3 or 4038 INTERNAL SETPNT4 See also parameter 4039 INT SETPNT SEL DI4U 5D NC See selection D 3U 4D NC FREQ INPUT Frequency input 4011 INTERNAL Selects a constant value as process PID controller 0 SETPNT reference when parameter 4070 SET POINT SEL value is set to INTERNAL gt Unit and range depend on the unit and scale defined by parameters 4006 UNITS and 4007 UNIT SCALE 4012 SETPOINT Defines the minimum value f
253. nly function that will be processed after this mode is entered is the Restart Communications Option function subcode 01 6 8 Write Multiple 10 16 Writes to the registers 1 to approximately 120 registers in a slave Holding device Registers Parameter sets control status and reference values are mapped as holding registers 7 Read Write 17 23 Performs a combination of one read operation and one write Multiple operation function codes 03 and 10 in a single Modbus 08 Provides a series of tests for checking the communication between Holding transaction The write operation is performed before the read Registers operation Mi Register mapping The drive parameters Control Status word references and actual values are mapped to the area 4xxxx so that e 40001 40099 are reserved for drive control status reference and actual values e 40101 49999 are reserved for drive parameters 0107 9999 Eg 40102 is parameter 0702 In this mapping the thousands and hundreds correspond to the group number while the tens and ones correspond to the parameter number within a group The register addresses that do not correspond with drive parameters are invalid If there is an attempt to read or write invalid addresses the Modbus interface returns an exception code to the controller See Exception codes on page 283 282 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus The following table gives information on the conten
254. normal operation this number increases constantly 5205 PARITY Number of characters with a parity error received from the ERRORS Modbus link If the number is high check that the parity settings of the devices connected on the bus are the same Note High electromagnetic noise levels generate errors 0 65535 Number of characters 5206 FRAME Number of characters with a framing error received by the ERRORS Modbus link If the number is high check that the communication speed settings of the devices connected on the bus are the same Note High electromagnetic noise levels generate errors 0 65535 Number of characters 5207 BUFFER Number of characters which overflow the buffer ie number OVERRUNS of characters which exceed the maximum message length 128 bytes 0 65535 Number of characters 5208 CRC ERRORS Number of messages with an CRC cyclic redundancy check error received by the drive If the number is high check CRC calculation for possible errors Note High electromagnetic noise levels generate errors 0 65535 Number of messages 5301 EFB Contains the identification and program revision of the PROTOCOL ID protocol 0000 FFFF Format XXYY hex where XX protocol ID and hex YY program revision of the protocol 5302 EFB STATION Defines the address of the device Two units with the same 1 ID address are not allowed on line 0 65555 246 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name
255. ntains 0 0 311 Maintenance intervals 0 0 000 311 Cooling fan A naaa 312 Replacing the cooling fan frame sizes R1 R4 0 2 0 02 ee 312 PPP eS obs he ER ee OESO OGRKO ORE ORE 313 Reforming the capacitors 0 0 0 eee 313 Power connections o 314 Control pael conocio ret esa Rod Ny gcc a a ac EE eR Noia 314 Cleaning the control panel arrob 314 Changing the battery in the Assistant Control Panel o o o oooooo 314 LEDS ee ee ee ee cee ee AAA adas 315 16 Technical data What this chapter contains 0 0 000 tee 317 RANGS sigais ARANA A SASS ARERR RR CDR ES 318 DEMOS 05 000 iras oS ERDAS AAA dee iaa A ees 318 SIZING A ere OR RN 319 D ratihg esc ncneicin caos aaa ee 319 Power cable sizes and fuses o o ooooooo 321 Dimensions weights and free space requirements o o oooooooooooooooooo 322 DIMENSIONS and weights serio ea PE de 322 Free Space requirements oo 322 Losses cooling data and noise o oooooocoo eee 323 Losses and cooling data 62 465 keke eee erre rr a ee ee ee ee ee ee 323 NOISE fick Sek date ha ee aaa bade Pie eet Pa el ed eS a 324 Terminal and lead through data for the power cables 0 000 e eee eees 324 Terminal and lead through data for the control cables 0 000 cece eee 324 Electric power network specification 0 00 0 000 325 Table of contents 13 Motor connection data o o o ooooooo
256. ntrol Panel Asia ACS CP D 2 04 or later 68 Control panels To find out the panel revision see the label on the back of the panel An example label and explanation of the label contents are shown below ABB Oy ACS CP A S N MO935E0001 RoHS Y AAT Manufacturer 08 09 10 for 2008 2009 2010 01 02 03 for week 1 week 2 week 3 A B C for panel revision Integer starting every week from 0001 3 ROHS mark the label of your drive shows the valid markings To find out the panel firmware version of your Assistant Control Panel see page 84 For the Basic Control Panel see page 72 See parameter 9901 LANGUAGE to find out the languages supported by the different Assistant Control Panels Control panels 69 Basic Control Panel E Features The Basic Control Panel features e numeric control panel with an LCD display copy function parameters can be copied to the control panel memory for later transfer to other drives or for backup of a particular system 70 Control panels E Overview The following table summarizes the key functions and displays on the Basic Control Panel LCD display Divided into five areas a Upper left Control location LOC drive control is local that is from the control panel REM drive control is remote such as the drive I O or fieldbus b Upper right Unit of the displayed value c Center Variable in general shows p
257. ntrol Panel is in use the Notice handler assistant informs when the definable value of the operating hour counter is reached see parameter 2901 COOLING FAN TRIG This information can also be passed to the relay output see parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 regardless of the used panel type Fan failure can be predicted by the increasing noise from the fan bearings If the drive is operated in a critical part of a process fan replacement is recommended once these symptoms start appearing Replacement fans are available from ABB Do not use other than ABB specified spare parts E Replacing the cooling fan frame sizes R1 R4 Only frame sizes R1 R4 include a fan frame size RO has natural cooling WARNING Read and follow the instructions in chapter Safety on page 15 Ignoring the instructions can cause physical injury or death or damage to the equipment 1 Stop the drive and disconnect it from the power line Wait for five minutes to let the drive DC capacitors discharge Ensure by measuring with a multimeter impedance at least 1 Mohm that there is no voltage present Remove the hood if the drive has the NEMA 1 option Lever the fan holder off the drive frame with eg a screwdriver Free the fan cable from the clip in the drive frame E E amp Lift the holder from the hinges Maintenance and hardware diagnostics 313 6 Disconnect the fan cable The figure below on the right shows the lo
258. ntrol Status word DCU profile g Data conversion E for REF1 2 Actual values selected by par 5310 5317 E ABB drives communication profile Two implementations of the ABB drives communication profile are available ABB drives full and ABB drives limited The ABB drives communication profile is active when parameter 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE is set to ABB DRV FULL or ABB DRV LIM The Control word and Status word for the profile are described below The ABB drives communication profiles can be used through both EXT1 and EXT2 The Control word commands are in effect when parameter 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS or 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS whichever control location is active is set to COMM Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 285 The table below and the state diagram on page 288 describe the Control word content for the ABB drives profile The upper case boldface text refers to the states shown in the diagram ABB drives profile Control word parameter 5319 EFB PAR 19 Enter READY TO OPERATE Stop along currently active deceleration ramp 2203 2206 Enter OFF1 ACTIVE proceed to READY TO SWITCH ON unless other interlocks OFF2 OFF3 are active Continue operation OFF2 inactive Emergency OFF drive coast to stop Enter OFF2 ACTIVE proceed to SWITCH ON INHIBITED Continue operation OFF3 inactive Emergency stop drive stops within time defined by par 2208 Enter OFF3 ACTIVE proceed to SWITCH ON INHIBITED
259. ntrol panel with the help of menus and keys You select an option eg operation mode or parameter by scrolling the 45 and lt gt arrow keys until the option is visible in the display and then pressing the 37 key With the CZ key you return to the previous operation level without saving the made changes The Basic Control Panel has five panel modes Output mode Reference mode Parameter mode Copy mode and Fault mode The operation in the first four modes is described in this chapter When a fault or alarm occurs the panel goes automatically to the Fault mode showing the fault or alarm code You can reset the fault or alarm in the Output or Fault mode see chapter Fault tracing on page 293 After the power is switched on the panel is in the Output mode where you can start stop change the REM A 91 ye direction switch between local and remote control and outPuT FWD monitor up to three actual values one at a time To do other tasks go first to the Main menu and select the appropriate mode How to do common tasks The table below lists common tasks the mode in which you can perform them and the page number where the steps to do the task are described in detail O A E N How to switch between local and remote control Ary Howto siar and stop the dive Ay How to change the direction ofthe matorratali n Ary 293 72 Control panels How to find out the panel firmware version If the power is switched on switc
260. o 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR 150 Par 3007 100 127 Par 3008 50 Par 3009 Actual signals and parameters 203 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 150 Allowed continuous motor load relative to the nominal motor current 3008 ZERO SPEED Defines the load curve together with parameters 3007 MOT 70 LOAD LOAD CURVE and 3009 BREAK POINT FREQ 150 Allowed continuous motor load at zero speed in percent of 1 1 the nominal motor current 3009 EEA POINT Defines the load curve together with parameters 3007 MOT 35 Hz LOAD CURVE and 3008 ZERO SPEED LOAD Example Thermal protection trip times when parameters 3006 3008 have default values Output current Re Nominal motor current fo Output frequency fark Break point frequency A Trip time 1 250 Hz Drive output Drive output frequency at 100 load at Drive output frequency at 100 load load 3010 STALL Selects how the drive reacts to a motor stall condition The NOT SEL FUNCTION protection wakes up if the drive has operated in a stall region see the figure below longer than the time set by parameter 3012 STALL TIME Current A Stall region 0 95 User defined limit User defined limit 2003 MAX CURRENT Par 3011 NOT SEL Protection is inactive is inactive Protection is inactive JO 204 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq FAULT The drive trips
261. o Start enable Enable start Effective if parameter 1609 setting is COMM Reserved REF_CONST Constant speed reference request This is an internal control bit Only for supervision No operation REF_AVE Average speed reference request This is an internal control bit Only for supervision No operation LINK_ON Master detected on fieldbus link This is an internal control bit Only for supervision Fieldbus link is down REQ_STARTINH Start inhibit No start inhibit Reserved Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 291 The following tables describe the Status word content for the DCU profile 1 5 DCU profile Status word parameter 0303 FB STS WORD 1 Value READY ENABLED STARTED RUNNING ZERO_SPEED ACCELERATE DECELERATE AT_SETPOINT LIMIT SUPERVISION REV_REF REV_ACT PANEL_LOCAL FIELDBUS_LOCAL 1 EXT2_ACT Drive is ready to receive start command Drive is not ready External Run enable signal received No external Run enable signal received Drive has received start command Drive has not received start command Drive is modulating Drive is not modulating Drive is at zero speed Drive has not reached zero speed Drive is accelerating Drive is not accelerating Drive is decelerating Drive is not decelerating Drive is at setpoint Actual value equals reference value ie is within tolerance limits Drive has not reached setpoint Operation is limited by gr
262. o be boosted Voltage V Custom Uff ratio Par 2618 Par 2616 Par 2614 Par 2612 Par 2070 gt Par 2603 f Hz Par 2611 Par 2613 Par 2615 Par 2617 Par 9907 Note The voltage and the frequency points of the U f curve must fulfill the following requirements 2610 lt 2612 lt 2614 lt 2616 lt 2618 and 2611 lt 2613 lt 2615 lt 2617 lt 9907 WARNING High voltage at low frequencies may result in poor performance or motor damage overheating E Settings Additional information 2605 Custom U f ratio activation 2610 2618 Custom U f ratio settings E Diagnostics Fault sd Additional information PAR CUSTOM U F Incorrect U f ratio Program features 131 IR compensation When IR compensation is activated the drive gives an extra voltage boost to the motor at low speeds IR compensation is useful in applications that require high break away torque Motor voltage IR compensation E Settings Parameter 2603 IR COMP VOLT No compensation f Hz Programmable protection functions Al lt Min Al lt Min function defines the drive operation if an analog input signal falls below the set minimum limit Settings Parameters 3001 AI lt MIN FUNCTION 3021 Al1 FAULT LIMIT and 3022 Al2 FAULT LIMIT E Panel loss Panel loss function defines the operation of the drive if the control panel selected as the control location for the drive s
263. o parameter 2908 USER MWh ACT value o o o o o zlz o o x le x x o OM RO Q Dp lt 200 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 0 0 6553 5 Megawatt hours If parameter value is set to zero the trigger 1 MWh is disabled 0 1 MWh 2908 USER MWh Defines the actual value of the drive power consumption 0 0 MWh ACT counter When parameter 2907 USER MWh TRIG has been set to a non zero value the counter starts When the actual value of the counter exceeds the value defined by parameter 2907 a maintenance notice is displayed on the panel 0 0 6553 5 Megawatt hours Parameter is reset by setting it to zero 1 MWh 0 1 MWh 3001 AI lt MIN Defines the drive response if the analog input Al signal NOT SEL FUNCTION drops below the fault limits and Al is used e as the active reference source group 11 REFERENCE SELECT as the process or external PID controllers feedback or setpoint source group 40 PROCESS PID SET 1 41 PROCESS PID SET 2 or 42 EXT TRIM PID and the corresponding PID controller is active 3021 Al1 FAULT LIMIT and 3022 Al2 FAULT LIMIT set the fault limits NOT SEL Protection is inactive Oo FAULT The drive trips on fault A 1 LOSS Al2 LOSS and the motor 1 coasts to stop Fault limit is defined by parameter 3021 A 1 FAULT LIMIT 3022 Al2 FAULT LIMIT CONST SP7 The drive generates alarm A 1 LOSS Al1 LOSS and sets 2 the speed
264. ol EXT1 Speed control EXT2 Start Stop control Timed functions Protections Output signals SPFC CONTROL Language select Motor set up Application Option modules Speed control EXT1 Speed control EXT2 Start Stop control Timed functions Protections Output signals Program features 115 E List of the tasks and the relevant drive parameters Depending on the selection made in the Application task parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO the Start up assistant decides which consequent tasks it suggests Name Description Setparameters Language select Selecting the language 9901 Motor set up Setting the motor data 9905 9909 Application Selecting the application macro 9902 parameters associated to the macro Option modules Activating the option modules Group 35 MOTOR TEMP MEAS group 52 PANEL COMM 9802 Speed control EXT1 Selecting the source for the speed output 7703 frequency reference If Al1 is used Setting analog input Al 1301 1303 3001 limits scale inversion Setting the reference limits 1104 1105 Setting the frequency limits 2007 2008 Setting the acceleration and deceleration 2202 2203 times Speed control EXT2 Selecting the source for the speed output 1106 frequency reference If Al1 is used Setting analog input Al1 1301 1303 3001 limits scale inversion Setting the reference limits 1107 1108 PID control Selecting the source for the process 1106 reference If Al1 is used Set
265. on fault MOTOR STALL and the motor coasts to stop 1 2 ALARM The drive generates alarm MOTOR STALL 3011 STALL Defines the frequency limit for the stall function See FREQUENCY parameter 3010 STALL FUNCTION 0 5 50 0 Hz 3012 STALL TIME Defines the time for the stall function See parameter 3010 20 s STALL FUNCTION 10 400 3016 SUPPLY Selects how the drive reacts to supply phase loss ie when FAULT PHASE DC voltage ripple is excessive FAULT The drive trips on fault SUPPLY PHASE and the motor coasts to stop when the DC voltage ripple exceeds 14 of the nominal DC voltage LIMIT ALARM Drive output current is limited and alarm INPUT PHASE LOSS is generated when the DC voltage ripple exceeds 14 of the nominal DC voltage There is a 10 s delay between the activation of the alarm and the output current limitation The current is limited until the DC voltage ripple drops under the ripple limit ALARM The drive generates alarm INPUT PHASE LOSS when the 2 DC ripple exceeds 14 of the nominal DC voltage 3017 EARTH FAULT Selects how the drive reacts when an earth ground fault is ENABLE detected in the motor or the motor cable Note Disabling earth ground fault may void the warranty DISABLE ENABLE The drive trips on fault EARTH FAULT 1 3018 COMM FAULT Selects how the drive reacts in a fieldbus communication NOT SEL FUNC break The time delay is defined by parameter 3019 COMM FAULT TIME NOT SEL Protection is inactive
266. onnected to power line with voltage level higher than the rated motor voltage 200 V units Voltage 115 345 VV Note The stress on the motor insulations is always 400 VE units dependent on the drive supply voltage This also applies to 200 600 V the case where the motor voltage rating is lower than the 400 VU units rating of the drive and the supply of the drive 230 690 V 270 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 9907 MOTOR NOM Defines the nominal motor frequency ie the frequency at E 50 0 Hz FREQ which the output voltage equals the motor nominal voltage U 60 0 Hz Field weakening point Nom frequency Supply voltage Motor nom voltage 10 0 500 0 Hz Frequeney O Oo o eo 9908 MOTOR NOM Defines the nominal motor speed Must be equal to the Type SPEED value on the motor rating plate dependent 50 18000 rpm 9909 MOTOR NOM Defines the nominal motor power Must equal the value on PN POWER the motor rating plate 0 2 3 0 Py KW Power 1 0 1 kW hp 9914 PHASE Inverts two phases in the motor cable This changes the NO INVERSION direction of the motor rotation without having to exchange the positions of two motor cable phase conductors at the drive output terminals or at the motor connection box Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 271 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus What this chapter contains The chapter describes how the
267. ontrol location LOCAL EXT1 or EXT2 e Reference values e Drive temperature e Operating time counter h kWh counter e Digital I O and analog I O status e PID controller actual values Three signals can be shown simultaneously on the assistant control panel display one signal on the basic panel display It is also possible to read the values through the serial communication link or through the analog outputs E Settings Additional information 1501 Selection of an actual signal to AO 1808 Selection of an actual signal to frequency output Group 32 SUPERVISION Actual signal supervision Program features 127 Parameter Additional information Group 34 PANEL DISPLAY Selection of an actual signals to be displayed on the control panel E Diagnostics Actual signal Additional information Group 01 OPERATING DATA 04 Lists of actual signals FAULT HISTORY Power loss ride through If the incoming supply voltage is cut off the drive will continue to operate by utilizing the kinetic energy of the rotating motor The drive will be fully operational as long as the motor rotates and generates energy to the drive The drive can continue the operation after the break if the main contactor remained closed ye AN II Ginput power Tm fout Upc N m Hz Vdc Usd 160 80 520 120 60 390 f 80 40 260 Tm 40 20 130 0 0 0 t s
268. or the input power is a delta grounded system and the motor cable capacitance is large Loaded software is not compatible Condition defined by 3701 USER LOAD C MODE has been valid longer than the time set by 3703 USER LOAD C TIME Option module not supported by the drive firmware is connected to the drive Pressure at pump fan inlet too low Pressure at pump fan outlet too high Pressure at pump fan inlet too low See chapter Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus on page 277 Check input power connections Contact your local ABB representative See parameter group 37 USER LOAD CURVE Check connections Check for a closed valve on the inlet side of the pump fan Check piping for leaks See parameter group 44 PUMP PROTECTION Check piping for blocks See parameter group 44 PUMP PROTECTION Check for a closed valve on the inlet side of the pump fan Check piping for leaks See parameter group 44 PUMP PROTECTION 306 Fault tracing CODE FAULT CAUSE WHAT TO DO 0043 0101 0103 0201 0202 0203 0204 0206 1000 1001 1003 OUTLET HIGH 8A82 0307 bit 9 SERF CORRUPT FF55 0307 bit 14 SERF MACRO FF55 0307 bit 14 DSP T1 OVERLOAD 6100 0307 bit 13 DSP T2 OVERLOAD 6100 0307 bit 13 DSP T3 OVERLOAD 6100 0307 bit 13 DSP STACK ERROR 6100 0307 bit 12 CB ID ERROR 5000 0307 bit 11 PAR HZRPM 6320 0307 bit 15 PAR PFC REF NEG 632
269. or 2205 B speed regulated motor decelerating using group 22 ACCEL DECEL parameters 2203 or 2206 At aux motor start speed regulated motor decelerates using 8125 DEC IN AUX START At aux motor stop speed regulated motor accelerates using 8124 ACC IN AUX STOP 0 0 NOT SEL 0 0 Not selected 0 1 1800 0s 0 1 1800 s Activates this function using the value entered as the acceleration time Actual signals and parameters 267 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 8125 DEC IN AUX Sets the PFC deceleration time for a maximum to zero 0 0 NO START frequency ramp This PFC deceleration ramp T SEL applies to the speed regulated motor when an auxiliary motor is switched on replaces the deceleration ramp defined in group 22 ACCEL DECEL applies only until the output of the regulated motor decreases by an amount equal to the output of the auxiliary motor Then the deceleration ramp defined in group 22 ACCEL DECEL applies See the figure for parameter 8124 ACC IN AUX STOP 0 0 NOT SEL 0 0 Not selected 1 0 1s 0 1 1800 0s 0 1 1800 s Activates this function using the value entered as the deceleration time 8126 TIMED Sets the autochange using a timed function See parameter NOT SEL AUTOCHNG 8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL NOT SEL Not selected TIMED FUNC 1 Enables autochange when timed function 1 is active TIMED FUNC 2 See selection TIMED FUNC 1 TIMED FUNC 3 See selection TIMED FUNC 1 TIMED FUNC
270. or changes considerably in time E External Trim controller PID2 PID2 42 EXT TRIM PID can be used in two different ways e External controller Instead of using additional PID controller hardware the user can connect PID2 output through drive analog output or fieldbus controller to control a field instrument like a damper or a valve e Trim controller PID2 can be used to trim or fine tune the reference of the drive See section Reference trimming on page 121 136 Program features E Block diagrams The figure below shows an application example The controller adjusts the speed of a pressure boost pump according to the measured pressure and the set pressure reference Example PID control block diagram Pressure boost pump ref Actual values Frequency 4014 reference 4021 Al IMOT ref 4010 Program features 137 The following figure presents the speed scalar control block diagram for process controller PID1 E LLVZLLO ELOv ZLOV Lp pue py dnoJ6 el z pue Jes Jajeweled Ajid Usemyaq sjoajes ZOP JE EWeIed Y 0y 9OLL dnog NO did 1 01 U09 Ldld Japun p ds jue suo Z pasds jsuo VOLL p ds aBejany peeds jaued joyuoD jo WJH LOLL Aouenbel4 peeds W390 901 Jo joued YO MS QOLL Jes e007 Em jue suo 1 Y 0b dnog MO Ladld Em njen LOV Id an en Jajjonuos LOV Cid
271. or faults Check parameter 3004 EXTERNAL FAULT 2 setting Check motor Check motor cable Motor cable length must not exceed maximum specifications See section Motor connection data on page 325 Note Disabling earth fault ground fault may void the warranty 304 Fault tracing CODE FAULT CAUSE WHAT TO DO 0018 0021 0022 0024 0026 0027 0028 0029 0030 THERM FAIL 5210 0306 bit 1 CURR MEAS 2211 0306 bit 4 SUPPLY PHASE 3130 0306 bit 5 OVERSPEED 7310 0306 bit 7 DRIVE ID 5400 0306 bit 9 CONFIG FILE 630F 0306 bit 10 SERIAL 1 ERR 7510 0306 bit 11 programmable fault function 3018 3019 EFB CON FILE 6306 0306 bit 12 FORCE TRIP FF90 0306 bit 13 Drive internal fault Thermistor used for drive internal temperature measurement is open or short circuited Drive internal fault Current measurement is out of range Intermediate circuit DC voltage is oscillating due to missing input power line phase or blown fuse Trip occurs when DC voltage ripple exceeds 14 of nominal DC voltage Motor is turning faster than highest allowed speed due to incorrectly set minimum maximum speed Operating range limits are set by parameters 2007 MINIMUM FREQ and 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ Internal drive ID fault Internal configuration file error Fieldbus communication break Configuration file reading error Trip command received from fieldbus
272. or one constant speed is used The potentiometer speed is controlled by two digital inputs increase decrease keep unchangea Hand Auto Speed control applications where switching between two control devices is needed Some control signal terminals are reserved to one device the rest for the other One digital input selects between the terminals devices in use 102 Application macros Macro Suitable applications PID control Process control applications for example different closed loop control systems such as pressure control level control and flow control It is possible to switch between process and speed control Some control signal terminals are reserved for process control others for speed control One digital input selects between process and speed control PFC control Pump alternation applications for example booster stations in buildings The pressure in the network is adjusted by changing the speed of the pump according to the signal received from the pressure transducer and adding auxiliary pumps directly on line when needed SPFC control Soft PFC control for pump alternation applications where lower pressure peaks are desirable when a new auxiliary motor is started User The user can save the customized standard macro e the parameter settings including group 99 START UP DATA into the permanent memory and recall the data at a later time For example two user macros can be used when switching between two
273. or the selected PID reference 0 MI signal source See parameter 4010 SET POINT SEL 500 0 500 0 Value in percent Example Analog input Al1 is selected as the PID reference source value of parameter 4010 is A 1 The reference minimum and maximum correspond to the 1301 MINIMUM AI and 1302 MAXIMUM Al1 settings as follows Ref Ref MAX gt MIN MIN gt MAX w N gt o N O al E N 1301 1302 Al1 1301 1302 Al 4013 SETPOINT Defines the maximum value for the selected PID reference 100 0 MAX signal source See parameters 4010 SET POINT SEL and 4012 SETPOINT MIN 500 0 500 0 Value in percent 1 0 1 4014 FBK SEL Selects the process actual value feedback signal forthe ACT1 process PID controller The sources for the variables ACT1 and ACT2 are further defined by parameters 4016 ACT1 INPUT and 4017 ACT2 INPUT 226 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq Addition of ACT1 and ACT2 _MIN AGTH 2 Selects the smaller o ACT1 and ACT2 e sqr ACT 2 Square oot of the subtraction of ACTI and ACT2 e sqA1 sqA2 Addition of the square root of ACT1 and the square root of a ACT2 4015 FBK Defines an extra multiplier for the value defined by 0 000 MULTIPLIER parameter 4014 FBK SEL Parameter is used mainly in applications where feedback value is calculated from another variable eg flow from pressure difference 32 768 Multiplier If parame
274. orm the start up e start stop change the direction of the motor rotation and adjust the speed of the motor through the I O interface Using the control panel to do these tasks is explained briefly in this chapter For details on how to use the control panel refer to chapter Control panels on page 67 How to start up the drive ip A WARNING The start up may only be carried out by a qualified electrician The safety instructions given in chapter Safety on page 15 must be followed during the start up procedure The drive will start up automatically at power up if the external run command is on and the drive is in the remote control mode Check that the starting of the motor does not cause any danger De couple the driven machine if there is a risk of damage in case of incorrect direction of rotation Note By default parameter 1611 PARAMETER VIEW is set to 2 SHORT VIEW and you cannot see all actual signals and parameters To be able to view them set parameter 1611 PARAMETER VIEW to 3 LONG VIEW 58 Start up and control with I O Check the installation See the checklist in chapter Installation checklist on page 55 How you start up the drive depends on the control panel you have if any If you have no control panel follow the instructions given in section How to start up the drive without a control panel on page 58 If you have a Basic Control Panel follow the instructions given in section How to perform a man
275. oup 20 LIMITS settings Operation is within group 20 LIMITS settings A supervised parameter group 32 SUPERVISION is outside its limits All supervised parameters are within limits Drive reference is in reverse direction Drive reference is in forward direction Drive is running in reverse direction Drive is running in forward direction Control is in control panel or PC tool local mode Control is not in control panel local mode Control is in fieldbus local mode Control is not in fieldbus local mode Control is in EXT2 mode Control is in EXT1 mode Drive is in a fault state FAULT O Drive is not in a fault state 292 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 9 25 29 0 DCU profile Status word parameter 0304 FB STS WORD 2 Value ALARM 1 NOTICE DIRLOCK LOCALLOCK CTL_MODE Reserved REQ_CTL REQ_REF1 1 REQ_REF2 1 REQ_REF2EXT 1 ACK_STARTINH 1 An alarm is on No alarms are on A maintenance request is pending No maintenance request Direction lock is ON Direction change is locked Direction lock is OFF Local mode lock is ON Local mode is locked Local mode lock is OFF N A Drive is in scalar control mode Control word requested from fieldbus No operation Reference 1 requested from fieldbus Reference 1 is not requested from fieldbus Reference 2 requested from fieldbus Reference 2 is not requested from fieldbus External PID reference 2 requested from fieldbus
276. ow to use an assistant The table below shows the basic operation sequence which leads you through assistants The Motor set up assistant is used as an example ES Display Go to the Main menu by pressing Sul if you are in the LOC WMAIN MENU T Output mode otherwise by pressing repeatedly EP until CANTAS you get to the Main menu ASSISTANTS CHANGED PAR EXIT 00 00 ENTER Go to the Assistants mode by selecting ASSISTANTS on LOC WASSISTANTS 1 the menu keys 4 5 and SY 7 and pressing S Start up assistant Motor Set up Application Speed control EXT1 Speed control EXT2 EXIT 00 00 SEL Select the assistant keys a and SY 7 and press LOC OPAR EDIT 9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT If you select any other assistant than the Start up assistant it guides you through the task of specification of its parameter set as shown in steps 4 and 5 below After that you can select another assistant on the Assistants menu or exit the Assistants mode The Motor set up assistant is used here as an example EXIT 00 00 SAVE If you select the Start up assistant it activates the first LOC CHOICE assistant which guides you through the task of US With specification of its parameter set as shown in steps 4 and 5 below The Start up assistant then asks if you application setuni want to continue with the next assistant or skip it select 1p the appropriate answer with keys a and SY 7 and EXIT 00 00 OK press SS If you choose to skip the Start u
277. p assistant asks the same question about the next assistant and so on 92 Control panels Step Aston O y e To specify a new value press keys AG and Y 2 LOC OPAR EDIT 9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT EXIT 00 00 SAVE e To ask for information on the requested parameter LOC HELP press key 7 Scroll the help text with keys a and Set as given on the motor nameplate Voltage value must correspond to motor D Y connection EXIT 00 00 e To accept the new value and continue to the setting of oc UPAR EDIT the next parameter press To stop the assistant press me Y Close the help by pressing E 9906 MOTOR_NOM CURR EXIT 00 00 SAVE Control panels 93 E Changed parameters mode In the Changed parameters mode you can e view a list of all parameters that have been changed from the macro default values e change these parameters e start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control How to view and edit changed parameters Go to the Main menu by pressing Sul if you are in the LOC WMAIN MENU T Output mode otherwise by pressing repeatedly EP until ICAA you get to the Main menu ASSISTANTS CHANGED PAR EXIT 00 00 ENTER Go to the Changed parameters mode by selecting LOC TU CHANGED PAR CHANGED PAR on the menu with keys 4 5 and Y7 0 E a Z and pressing 03 CONST SPEED 1204 CONST SPEED 3 9902 APPLIC MACRO EXIT 00 00 EDIT Select the changed param
278. pacity This motor is the speed regulated motor Direct line connections power the motors of pump 2 and pump 3 etc The drive switches pump 2 and then pump 3 etc on and off as needed These motors are auxiliary motors The drive PID control uses two signals a process reference and an actual value feedback The PID controller adjusts the speed frequency of the first pump such that the actual value follows the process reference When demand defined by the process reference exceeds the first motor s capacity user defined as a frequency limit the PFC control automatically starts an auxiliary pump The PFC also reduces the speed of the first pump to account for the auxiliary pump s addition to total output Then as before the PID controller adjusts the speed frequency of the first pump such that the actual value follows the process reference If demand continues to increase PFC adds additional auxiliary pumps using the same process When demand drops such that the first pump speed falls below a minimum limit user defined as a frequency limit the PFC control automatically stops an auxiliary pump The PFC also increases the speed of the first pump to account for the auxiliary pump s missing output An Interlock function when enabled identifies off line out of service motors and the PFC control skips to the next available motor in the sequence An Autochange function when enabled and with the appropriate switchgear equaliz
279. parameter 3501 SENSOR TYPE value is set to THERM 0 THERM 1 216 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq DI5 Digital input DI5 Used when parameter 3501 SENSOR 7 TYPE value is set to THERM 0 THERM 1 3503 ALARM LIMIT Defines the alarm limit for motor temperature measurement Alarm MOTOR TEMP indication is given when the limit is exceeded When parameter 3507 SENSOR TYPE value is set to THERM 0 THERM 1 1 alarm 3504 FAULT LIMIT Defines the fault trip limit for motor temperature measurement The drive trips on fault MOT OVERTEMP when the limit is exceeded When parameter 3501 SENSOR TYPE value is set to THERM 0 THERM 1 1 fault 3505 AO Enables current feed from analog output AO Parameter DISABLE EXCITATION setting overrides parameter group 15 ANALOG OUTPUTS settings With PTC the output current is 1 6 mA With Pt 100 the output current is 9 1 mA DISABLE Disabled o ENABLE Enabled 3601 TIMERS Selects the source for the timed function enable signal NOT SEL ENABLE NOT SEL Timed function is not selected Oo Digital input DI Timed function enable on the rising edge of DI1 DI1 CMODE Timed function enable on the rising edge of DI1 Timed function is in continuous mode in which the start date can be different from the stop date DI2 CMODE See selection D 1 CMODE 1 DI3 CMODE See selection DI1 CMODE 1 2 3 DI4 CMODE See selection DI CMODE 14 DI5 CMODE S
280. r c bl t min 300 mm 12 in Motor cable Input power cable min 200 mm 8 in au min 500 mm 20 in Control cables E Control cable ducts 24 V 230V 24V 230V Lead 24 V and 230 V control cables in Not allowed unless the 24 V cable is separate ducts inside the cabinet insulated for 230 V or insulated with an insulation sleeving for 230 V Planning the electrical installation 41 Protecting the drive input power cable motor and motor cable in short circuit situations and against thermal overload E Protecting the drive and input power cable in short circuit situations Arrange the protection according to the following guidelines Circuit diagram Short circuit protection Distribution Input cable Drive Protect the drive and input board cable with fuses or a circuit breaker See VA a footnotes 1 and 2 PAS 1 Size the fuses according to instructions given in chapter Technical data on page 317 The fuses will protect the input cable in short circuit situations restrict drive damage and prevent damage to adjoining equipment in case of a short circuit inside the drive 2 Circuit breakers which have been tested by ABB with the ACS350 can be used Fuses must be used with other circuit breakers Contact your local ABB representative for the approved breaker types and supply network characteristics WARNING Due to the inherent operating principle and construction of
281. r values select and modify the signals shown in the Output mode e start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control How to select a parameter and change its value Step Ao JO a Go to the Main menu by pressing 7 if you are in the Output mode otherwise by pressing 77 repeatedly until you see MENU at the bottom If the panel is not in the Parameter mode PAr not visible press key CA or SY until you see PAr and then press 37 The display shows the number of one of the parameter groups Use keys CAN and SY 7 to find the desired parameter group Press 57 The display shows one of the parameters in the selected group parameter display shows the value of the parameter with underneath indicating that changing of the value is now possible Note When is visible pressing keys lt A gt and v_ simultaneously changes the displayed value to the default value of the parameter Press and hold 37 for about two seconds until the 1 PAR FWD Use keys 4 5 and SY 7 to select the parameter value When you have changed the parameter value 2 SET ing EH starts flashing one mpi e To save the displayed parameter value press Y To cancel the new value and keep the original press UZ Use keys 4 and SY to find the desired Control panels 77 How to select the monitored signals Sie Asi O y You can select which signals are monitored in the Output mode and how t
282. re not followed the drive may experience problems that the warranty does not cover Implementing the AC power line connection See the requirements in section Electric power network specification on page 325 Use a fixed connection to the AC power line WARNING As the leakage current of the device typically exceeds 3 5 mA a fixed installation is required according to IEC 61800 5 1 Selecting the supply disconnecting device disconnecting means Install a hand operated supply disconnecting device disconnecting means between the AC power source and the drive The disconnecting device must be of a type that can be locked to the open position for installation and maintenance work 36 Planning the electrical installation E European union To meet the European Union Directives according to standard EN 60204 1 Safety of Machinery the disconnecting device must be one of the following types e aswitch disconnector of utilization category AC 23B EN 60947 3 e a disconnector having an auxiliary contact that in all cases causes switching devices to break the load circuit before the opening of the main contacts of the disconnector EN 60947 3 e a circuit breaker suitable for isolation in accordance with EN 60947 2 E Other regions The disconnecting device must conform to the applicable safety regulations Checking the compatibility of the motor and drive Check that the 3 phase AC induction motor and the drive are compatible ac
283. re not stored 2 into the permanent memory To store changed parameter values set parameter 1607 PARAM SAVE value to SAVE 1603 PASS CODE _ Selects the pass code for the parameter lock see parameter 1602 PARAMETER LOCK 0 65535 Pass code Setting 358 opens the lock The value reverts 1 1 back to 0 automatically KEYPAD DI1 or from the control panel D D Di START STOP Reset along with the stop signal received through a digital input or from the control panel Note Do not use this option when start stop and direction commands are received through fieldbus communication 1604 FAULT RESET Selects the source for the fault reset signal The signal SEL resets the drive after a fault trip if the cause of the fault no longer exists Actual signals and parameters 183 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq COMM Fieldbus interface as the source for the fault reset signal ie control word 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 bit 4 with ABB drives profile 5319 EFB PAR 19 bit 7 The control word is sent by the fieldbus controller through the embedded fieldbus Modbus to the drive For the control word bits see sections DCU communication profile on page 289 and ABB drives communication profile on page 284 Reset through inverted digital input DI1 reset on the falling 1 edge of DI1 or from the control panel 2 1605 USER PAR Enables the change of the User parameter set through a NOT SEL SET CHG digital input See par
284. related manuals 0 00 cee ee eee eee eee ee 1 Safety What this chapter contains 0 00 00 eee Use of warnings 20 nay eh ook ate oes tad te ee ace th do a yk is A ee Safety in installation and maintenance occcccccoccc ee Electrical safety errar rs IAE OHSHRe de WOE CONSTA safety asii a oo w eds A Saree Sede OG ERS AE wee Safe start up and operation 44 ise Feed bee bived edad iead edad evad aeons a ee Bes General safety o ee ee ewe ee oo oe Lela dg ce gis aed eee 2 Introduction to the manual What this chapter contains 0 aaae APPICADINY iaar a IA telat moet a dogs Aa IAS Tari andienco sanas oia oa e o ease eee ee Aneesh eee Purpose of the manual eee eee eee eee Contents of this manual sick ikke eae Rad RRGR ERED ER RAR RRL ERROR RARER Related documents 0 00 00 eee ees Categorization By frame size 403000 ra sede neon de ANS SEES FARES OE CERRO Quick installation and commissioning flowchart 0000 cee eee 3 Operation principle and hardware description What this chapter contains 0 00 0 eee Operati n principle wi sree sei i a et ht ii Ua a aah a WON I Ae Ania a Product overview o A reias Sek SERED SEER LADERA eee Ra Se AOS eHSSs css BS HIS BASES dees Power connections and control interfaces 000 0c eee Type designation label nna anaana aa eee eee Type designation key 0 ccc eee eens 4 Mechanical installation
285. rgy savings are calculated See parameters 0174 SAVED KWH 0175 SAVED MWH 0176 SAVED AMOUNT 1 0177 SAVED AMOUNT 2 and 0178 SAVED CO2 It is possible to use this parameter as the reference power also for other applications than pumps The reference power can also be some other constant power than a motor connected directly online 0 0 1000 0 Pump power in percent of nominal motor power 1 0 1 4509 ENERGY Resets energy calculators 0174 SAVED KWH 0175 SAVED DONE RESET MWH 0176 SAVED AMOUNT 1 0177 SAVED AMOUNT 2 and 0178 SAVED CO2 DONE Reset not requested normal operation Oo RESET Reset energy counters The value reverts automatically to DONE Actual signals and parameters 243 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq NOT SEL No triggering source defined Trigger on the rising edge of digital input DI1 i i i See selection D 1 See selection D 1 See selection D 7 DI DI1 SUP1OVR Enable on the rising edge of digital input DI1 trigger on SUPRV1 OVER parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 See parameter group 32 SUPERVISION DI2 SUP1OVR See selection DI1 SUP1OVR DI3 SUP1OVR See selection DI1 SUP1OVR DI4 SUP1OVR See selection DI1 SUP1OVR DIS SUP1OVR See selection D 1 SUP10VR SUPRV1 Trigger on SUPRV1 OVER parameter 1401 RELAY OVER OUTPUT 1 See parameter group 32 SUPERVISION DRIVE START Trigger when the drive receives a start command 4601 PUMP CLEAN Defines how the Pump clean
286. rikana bene asa hehe xen ina 216 OF USER LOAD CURVE sirere terena etg daa iii o dee 220 40 PROCESS PID SET IL soriana Cheese ada a g EA E 221 41 PROCESS PID SEI 2 rc o A awe dikei oneri rau AAA 233 42 EADS TRIM PID score EE A 235 44 PUMP PROTECTION dsrosinae sacro ora ee oho AAA AA 236 45 ENERGY SAVING 209 20cerirrsarol rra 242 46 PUMP CLEANING ronan eia pidada ir sen ieds Fane AL a aaia 243 92 PANEL COMM sce rier er hanne da gaa auaina g Oe a OE E rece DOGE E a ee ri 244 SO EFB PROTOCOL si seire nee eee oe ENE are eed RUANO ae Boas 245 64 LOAD ANALYZER pa iya3 453949084008 A Ube ceed awe aS 247 81 PFC CONTROL tices ci ean eR rra Seba Seance ender ARA ees 250 SO OF WONG 6 22368 a a een eee ener ee saade ean seeeae sae 267 99 START UP DATA ata a tpeaeaha le tae ehh ca deca rr 268 13 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus What this chapter contains 0 0 00 271 System overvieW 242k eka RS ea ea be ke ee a a oe ba ES ba Oe 271 Setting up communication through the embedded Modbus 0000e0ee 273 Drive control parameters o 274 FISIODUS control interface seres sales is Rees eee Res ewe Ree es RRS EER Lae 276 Control word and Status word 0 0 cc ccc teens 276 A ala a aan aide al hg sat aia Medaka A ak Parad a ached Wage 276 Actual Valles coc od RES coded Ea Gea a Ged dd Gd Med dade Deed ae 276 Fieldbus references 0 ee eee e ene e eee 277 Reference selection and correction 0 00 00 eee 277
287. rive of category C1 drive of rated voltage less than 1000 V intended for use in the first environment Drive of category C2 drive of rated voltage less than 1000 V and intended to be installed and commissioned only by a professional when used in the first environment Note A professional is a person or organization having necessary skills in installing and or commissioning power drive systems including their EMC aspects Category C2 has the same EMC emission limits as the earlier class first environment restricted distribution EMC standard IEC EN 61800 3 does not any more restrict the distribution of the drive but the using installation and commissioning are defined Drive of category C3 drive of rated voltage less than 1000 V intended for use in the second environment and not intended for use in the first environment Category C3 has the same EMC emission limits as the earlier class second environment unrestricted distribution E Category C1 The emission limits are complied with the following provisions Technical data 331 1 The optional EMC filter is selected according to the ABB documentation and installed as specified in the EMC filter manual 2 The motor and control cables are selected as specified in this manual 3 The drive is installed according to the instructions given in this manual 4 For the maximum motor cable length with 4 kHz switching frequency see page 326 WARNING In a domestic environment t
288. rocessing See group 13 ANALOG INPUTS in the list of all parameters 1301 MINIMUM Al1 Defines the minimum value that corresponds to minimum 1 0 mA V signal for analog input Al1 14 RELAY OUTPUTS Status information indicated through relay output and relay operating delays See group 14 RELAY OUTPUTS in the list of all parameters 1401 RELAY Selects a drive status indicated through relay output RO 1 FAULT 1 OUTPUT 1 16 SYSTEM Parameter view Run enable parameter lock etc See group CONTROLS 16 SYSTEM CONTROLS in the list of all parameters 1611 PARAMETER Selects the parameter view ie which parameters are shown ih VIEW on the control panel 20 LIMITS Drive operation limits See group 20 L MITS in the list of all parameters 2008 MAXIMUM Defines the maximum limit for the drive output frequency E 50 0 Hz FREQ U 60 0 Hz 21 START STOP Start and stop modes of the motor See group 27 START STOP in the list of all parameters 2102 STOP Selects the motor stop function COAST FUNCTION Actual signals and parameters 159 Parameters in the short parameter view No Name Value Description Def FbEq 2202 ACCELER Defines the acceleration time 1 5 0s TIME 1 2203 DECELER Defines the deceleration time 1 5 0s TIME 1 9901 LANGUAGE Selects the display language ENGLISH 9902 APPLIC Selects the application macro ABB MACRO STANDA 9905 MOTOR NOM Defines the nominal motor voltage 9908 MOTOR NOM Defines the nominal motor speed
289. rrent through the sensor The resistance of the sensor increases sharply as the motor temperature rises over the PTC reference temperature Tref as does the voltage over the resistor The temperature measurement function reads the voltage through analog input Al1 2 and converts it into ohms The figure below shows typical PTC sensor resistance values as a function of the motor operating temperature Normal 0 1 5kohm 1 2 3 4 5 THERM 0 The function is active Motor temperature is monitored using a PTC sensor see selection PTC connected to drive through a normally closed thermistor relay connected to a digital input O motor overtemperature THERM 1 The function is active Motor temperature is monitored using a PTC sensor see selection PTC connected to drive through a normally open thermistor relay connected to a digital input 1 motor overtemperature 3502 INPUT Selects the source for the motor temperature measurement A 1 SELECTION signal Al Analog input Al1 Used when PT100 or PTC sensor is selected for the temperature measurement Analog input Al2 Used when PT100 or PTC sensor is selected for the temperature measurement Digital input DI1 Used when parameter 3501 SENSOR TYPE value is set to THERM 0 THERM 1 Digital input DI2 Used when parameter 3501 SENSOR TYPE value is set to THERM 0 THERM 1 Digital input DI3 Used when parameter 3501 SENSOR TYPE value is set to THERM 0 THERM 1 Digital input D14 Used when
290. rtial The partial set does not include user sets internal motor parameters parameters 9905 9909 1605 1607 5201 nor any group 53 EFB PROTOCOL parameters The source and target drives and their motor sizes do not need to be the same Copy USER S1 parameters from the control panel to the drive dL u1 Download User set 1 A user set includes group 99 START UP DATA parameters and the internal motor parameters The function is only shown on the menu when User set 1 has been first saved using parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO see section User macros on page 112 and then uploaded to panel Copy USER S2 parameters from the control panel to the drive dL u2 Download User set 2 As dL u1 Download User set 1 above Start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control Control panels 79 How to upload and download parameters For the upload and download functions available see above Step Atom YO a Go to the Main menu by pressing 37 if you are in the Output mode otherwise by pressing U7 repeatedly until you see MENU at the bottom If the panel is not in the Copy mode CoPY not visible press key 4 5 or SY 2 until you see CoPY Press ST 3 To upload all parameters including user sets from the drive to the control panel step to uL with keys CAN and Cw Press _ During the transfer the display shows the transfer status as a percentage of completion
291. s parameters 9905 9909 1605 1607 5201 nor any group 53 EFB PROTOCOL parameters The source and target drives and their motor sizes do not need to be the same Copy USER S1 parameters from the control panel to the drive DOWNLOAD USER SET1 A user set includes group 99 START UP DATA parameters and the internal motor parameters The function is only shown on the menu when User set 1 has been first saved using parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO see section User macros on page 112 and then uploaded to the control panel with UPLOAD TO PANEL Copy USER S2 parameters from the control panel to the drive DOWNLOAD USER SET2 As DOWNLOAD USER SET1 above Start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control 98 Control panels How to upload and download parameters For the upload and download functions available see above Note that the drive has to be in local control for uploading and downloading EIC A Go to the Main menu by pressing Sul if you are in the LOC WMAIN MENU Output mode otherwise by pressing repeatedly until PARAMETERS you get to the Main menu If REM is shown on the ASSISTANTS status line press to switch to local control CHANGED PAR EXIT 00 00 ENTER LOC UPAR BACKUP 1 BACKUP INFO DOWNLOAD FULL SET DOWNLOAD APPLICATION DOWNLOAD USER SET1 EXIT 00 00 SEL LOC UPAR BACKUP Copying parameters pi ad del Go to the Par backup mode by selecting PAR BACKUP on the menu with
292. s dotted until the drive reaches the setpoint 86 Control panels E Output mode In the Output mode you can e monitor actual values of up to three signals in group 07 OPERATING DATA e change the direction of the motor rotation e set the frequency reference e adjust the display contrast e start stop change the direction and switch between local and remote control You get to the Output mode by pressing EP repeatedly The top right corner of the display shows the reference value The center can be configured to show up to three signal values or bar graphs see page 89 for instructions on selecting and modifying the monitored signals CERI Loc Y DI 00 00 MENU 00 00 MENU How to change the direction of the motor rotation EXIT If you are not in the Output mode press E repeatedly until you get there If the drive is in remote control REM shown on the status line switch to local control by pressing 2 The display briefly shows a message about changing the mode and then returns to the Output mode To change the direction from forward shown on the status line to reverse J shown on the status line or vice versa press gt lt Note Parameter 1003 DIRECTION must be set to 3 DIR 1 00 00 ENU REQUEST Control panels 87 How to set the frequency reference If you are not in the Output mode press 77 repeatedly until you get there 0 5 A 10 7 DIR 00 00 MENU Ifthe drive
293. s operating 140 Program features E Example The time scheme below visualizes the operation of the sleep function Reference Sleep boost time 4030 Time Selected process actual value 4026 Wake up delay Wake up level deviation 4025 Time Output frequency ta Sleep delay 4024 PID Control panel SLEEP tsd 1 t lt tsd i cm Time Stop Start Sleep function for a PID controlled pressure boost pump when parameter 4022 is set to INTERNAL The water consumption falls at night As a consequence the PID process controller decreases the motor speed However due to natural losses in the pipes and the low efficiency of the centrifugal pump at low speeds the motor does not stop but keeps rotating The sleep function detects the slow rotation and stops the unnecessary pumping after the sleep delay has passed The drive shifts into sleep mode still monitoring the pressure The pumping restarts when the pressure falls under the allowed minimum level and the wake up delay has passed Program features 141 E Settings Parameter Additional information 9902 PID control activation 4022 4026 4030 4031 Sleep function settings 4122 4126 4130 4131 E Diagnostics Parameter Additional information 1401 PID sleep PID sleep function status through RO1 status PID sleep function status throughRO1 RO 1 mw PID sleep function
294. s the delay for the sleep start function See parameter 60 0 s DELAY 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL When the motor speed falls below the sleep level the counter starts When the motor speed exceeds the sleep level the counter is reset 0 0 3600 0s Sleep start delay 230 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description 4025 WAKE UP DEV Defines the wake up deviation for the sleep function The drive wakes up if the process actual value deviation from the PID reference value exceeds the set wake up deviation 4025 longer than the wake up delay 4026 Wake up level depends on parameter 4005 ERROR VALUE INV settings If parameter 4005 is set to 0 Wake up level PID reference 4010 Wake up deviation 4025 If parameter 4005 is set to 1 Wake up level PID reference 4010 Wake up deviation 4025 Wake up level when 4005 1 PID reference Wake up level when 4005 0 t See also figures for parameter 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL Unit and range depend on the unit and scale defined by parameters 4026 WAKE UP DELAY and 4007 UNIT SCALE 4026 WAKE UP Defines the wake up delay for the sleep function See DELAY parameter 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL 0 00 60 00 s Wake up delay 0 01s 4027 PID 1 PARAM Defines the source from which the drive reads the signal X X SET that selects between PID parameter set 1 and 2 PID parameter set 1 is defined by parameters 4001 4026 PID parameter set
295. se eee esas ee we 128 Table of contents 9 Maintenance MUS sra as E RN AAA AA CERES 128 SENGS erent penine de ads sia alo add e 128 Acceleration and deceleration rampS o ooococococoooo 128 A lt 4 22 26 amie be ete Reka a eee eres eee a eee ae ae eee 128 Critical PESOS tas cee Fees OER es oR AAA OG Sed Lees ORR EOS 129 ee ee ee ee ee ee ee eee ee ee eee 129 Constat Speeds 1 Mid ode trastos aa AAA 129 SINO eed da ap do ee ek oe eh ee oe aed Rae hee eee 129 C stom WT ratlos ests citere ar orindi tise taie ai hahaa a aoa eh Bae Ree 130 SOMOS Ls rest REG ae AS aed PORSCHE SMENSESS SORES YSH AME TS Eaa da s 130 DIAGNOSIS 20000 ik eh bud E E E ade eA ees oe Oe eee 130 IR compensation 000 eee eee ees 131 A teat guest ecg aed aie ge ghia AS 131 Programmable protection functions 0 000 ee eee ee 131 ASA ho Pest ac a es a Re i Tm 131 Panel SS siii dace banda a ee AR Ree Rea eae Ge KE ee ae ee Rae 131 External Gull 22 24 ou cage ra Ghd bide Pe de ee Da ad 131 Stall Protecto 6 25 35 2438 ank Aa 131 Motor thermal protection nnana naaa aaea 132 Earth fault protection 0 0 0 0 anaa 132 MICOS CL A ANNE 132 Input phase loSS 2 0 0 eee eee 133 Pre programmed faults coxis bhacee esas sega deaswnaae dene Sea eke tee od ROE RR EES 133 enn 133 DC overvoltage cnica A A Red hs 133 DC undervoltage 6 005 noes reseca iE e Ea E EDE ous meus E DR a E 133 Drive temperature o 133 1 a gaess OS 133 in
296. sed or was not set Format on the basic panel Time elapsed after power on in 2 second ticks minus the whole days stated by signal 0402 FAULT TIME 1 30 ticks 60 seconds Eg value 514 equals 17 minutes and 8 seconds 514 30 bEq 0404 SPEED AT FLT Motor speed in rpm at the time the latest fault occurred 0405 FREQ AT FLT Frequency in Hz at the time the latest fault occurred 1 0 1 Hz 1 0 0407 CURRENT AT Motor current in A at the time the latest fault occurred 1 0 1A FLT 0408 TORQUE AT Motor torque in percent of the motor nominal torque atthe 1 0 1 FLT time the latest fault occurred 0409 STATUS AT Drive status in hexadecimal format at the time the latest FLT fault occurred 0412 PREVIOUS Fault code of the 2nd latest fault See chapter Fault tracing FAULT 1 on page 293 for the codes 0406 VOLTAGE AT Intermediate circuit voltage in V DC at the time the latest 0 1 V FL fault occurred 0413 PREVIOUS Fault code of the 3rd latest fault See chapter Fault tracing 1 1 FAULT 2 on page 293 for the codes 0414 DI 1 5 AT FLT Status of digital inputs DI1 5 at the time the latest fault occurred binary Example 10000 DI1 is on DI2 DI5 are off Actual signals and parameters 167 All parameters All parameters No AS RRESMESRN Def FbEq 1001 EXT1 Defines the connections and the source for the start ET DI 2 COMMANDS and direction commands for external control location 1 EXT1 NOT SEL No start stop and
297. sed and motor 1 is connected to the drive output 2 The drive waits for the time specified by parameter 8722 PFC START DELAY to ensure that the contactor RO 1 has stabilized and then starts modulating from zero speed Motor 1 is the speed regulated motor 3 When the drive output frequency fout rises over the start frequency 8109 START FREQ 1 the start delay for the auxiliary motor 8775 AUX MOT START D is set 4 When delay 8775 has elapsed the drive coasts to stop and relay RO 1 is opened motor 1 is disconnected from the drive output 5 The drive waits for 8122 PFC START DELAY to ensure that the contactor RO 1 has stabilized 6 After delay 8722 RO 2 is closed and motor 2 is connected to the drive output as the new speed regulated motor T 8 Program features 153 The drive waits for 8122 PFC START DELAY to ensure that the contactor RO 2 has stabilized After delay 8122 the drive starts modulating from zero speed regulating the speed of motor 2 RO 1 is closed and motor 1 is connected directly online as an auxiliary motor How to parameterize SPFC control 1 DIAN N 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Select the SPFC control macro by setting parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO to value 15 SPFC CONTROL Set PFC reference steps parameters 8103 8105 if needed Set PFC start and stop frequencies parameters 8109 8114 Set PFC auxiliary motor start and stop delays parameters 8115 8116 Set th
298. sed as the reference 1 DI active 0 DI inactive DI1 DI2 Internal setpoint selected 0 0 4077 INTERNAL SETPNT 7 710 4036 INTERNAL SETPNTZ 0 14037 INTERNAL SETPNTS 7 DI2 3 See selection D 7 2 DI3 4 See selection D 7 2 DI4 5 See selection D 7 2 D D D D D TIMED FUNC 110 4011 INTERNAL SETPNT is used 1 4036 INTERNAL 15 SETPNT2 is used TIMED FUNC 2 See selection T MED FUNC 1 TIMED FUNC 3 See selection TIMED FUNC 1 TIMED FUNC 4 See selection TIMED FUNC 1 TIMED Selects with timed functions 1 and 2 which internal setpoint FUN1 amp 2 is used as the reference 1 timed function active 0 timed function inactive Timed Timed internal setpoint selected function 1 function 2 4011 INTERNAL SETPNT 0 0 1 0 4036 INTERNAL SETPNT2 0 1 4037INTERNAL SETPNT3 4038 INTERNAL SETPNT4 1 2 3 4 5 4101 GAIN See parameter 4001 GAIN 4102 INTEGRATION See parameter 4002 INTEGRATION TIME TIME 4103 DERIVATION See parameter 4003 DERIVATION TIME TIME 4104 PID DERIV See parameter 4004 PID DERIV FILTER FILTER 4105 ERROR See parameter 4005 ERROR VALUE INV VALUE INV 4106 UNITS See parameter 4006 UNITS 4107 UNIT SCALE See parameter 4007 UNIT SCALE aluai a N Or AJOJN ol CO N amp o 234 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description 4108 0 VALUE See parameter 4008 0 VALUE 4109 100 VALUE See parameter 4009 100 VALUE 411
299. ses to send start stop signals The following describes how the drive keeps track of motors and relays The drive provides one relay output RO 1 An external relay output module can be added to provide relay outputs RO 2 RO 4 Note If five auxiliary motors are needed Autochange disabled use transistor output TO parameter 1805 DO SIGNAL in addition to relay outputs RO 1 RO 4 In relay order auxiliary motor order TO is set between RO 1 and RO 2 see page 256 Transistor output must be set to digital mode ie parameter 1804 TO MODE is set to 0 DIGITAL Note that maximum voltage at TO is 30 V DC Parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 define respectively how relays RO 1 RO 4 are used the parameter value 31 PFC defines the relay as used for PFC The drive assigns auxiliary motors to relays in ascending order If the Autochange function is disabled the first auxiliary motor is the one connected to the first relay with a parameter setting 31 PFC and so on If the Autochange function is used the assignments rotate Initially the speed regulated motor is the one connected to the first relay with a parameter setting 31 PFC the first auxiliary motor is the one connected to the second relay with a parameter setting 31 PFC and so on The fourth auxiliary motor uses the same reference step low frequency and start frequency values as the third auxiliary motor 0 4 5 with TO Number of auxiliary motors
300. sojas lt 0 0 AO U2 V2 W2 MOTOR 17 18 19 20 21 22 Electrical installation 49 Connecting the control cables E 1 0 terminals The figure below shows the I O terminals Tightening torque is 0 4 N m 3 5 Ibf in J701 x1C X1A X1B 1 SCR 17 ROCOM 2 Al 18 RONC 3 GND 19 RONO 4 10V 20 DOSRC 5 Al2 21 DOOUT 6 GND 22 DOGND 7 AO 8 GND X1C 9 24V 23 SCR 10 GND 24 B 11 DCOM 25 A 12 DI1 26 GND_A J701 Connects 120 ohm termination resistor See page 13 DI2 54 14 DI3 1 Selects voltage or current as the signal types for 15 DI4 analog inputs Al1 and Al2 16 DI5 digital or frequency input Voltage and current selection for analog inputs Switch S1 selects voltage 0 2 10 V 10 10 V or current 0 4 20 mA 20 20 mA as the signal types for analog inputs Al1 and Al2 The factory settings are unipolar voltage for Al1 0 2 10 V and unipolar current for Al2 0 4 20 mA which correspond to the default usage in the application macros The switch is located to the left of I O terminal 9 see the I O terminal figure above S1 E Top position 0 4 20 mA default for Al2 or 20 20 mA E m Bottom position U 0 2 10 V default for Al1 or 10 10 V z N lt L lt 50 Ele
301. ss See parameter 3405 OUTPUT1 UNIT 3413 OUTPUT2 MIN Sets the minimum display value for the signal selected by parameter 3408 SIGNAL2 PARAM See parameter 3402 SIGNAL1 MIN Setting range depends on parameter 3408 setting 3414 OUTPUT2 Sets the maximum display value for the signal selected by MAX parameter 3408 SIGNAL2 PARAM See parameter 3402 SIGNAL 1 MIN Setting range depends on parameter 3408 setting E 214 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value 3415 SIGNAL3 PARAM 0 101 178 3416 SIGNAL3 MIN xX 3417 SIGNAL3 MAX 1X 3418 OUTPUT3 DSP FORM 3419 OUTPUT3 UNIT 3420 OUTPUT3 MIN X X 3421 OUTPUT3 MAX X 3501 SENSOR TYPE NONE 1 x PT100 2 x PT100 3 x PT100 Description Def FbEq Selects the third signal to be displayed on the control panel 105 in the Output mode See par 3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM Parameter index in group 01 OPERATING DATA Eg 102 1 1 0102 SPEED If value is set to 0 no signal is selected Defines the minimum value for the signal selected by parameter 3415 See parameter 3402 SIGNAL1 MIN Setting range depends on parameter 3415 SIGNAL3 PARAM setting Defines the maximum value for the signal selected by parameter 3415 SIGNAL3 PARAM See parameter 3402 SIGNAL1 MIN Setting range depends on parameter 3415 SIGNAL3 PARAM setting Defines the format for the displayed signal selected by DIRECT parameter 3415 SIGNAL3 PARAM See parameter 3404 OUTPU
302. ss 341 Frame size R4 IP20 cabinet installation UL open 0 00000 eee 342 Frame size R4 NEMA 1 0 ee eee eee 343 Further information Product and service inquiries 0 000 tees 345 Product training e rin oi at dee Ae aa demoed te eee aed ea cad ghd ge ae 345 Providing feedback on ABB Drives manuals 00 000 ence eee eee 345 Document library on the Internet ocio acid Ree ene Cee hee onde ede A ed 345 14 Table of contents Safety 15 Safety What this chapter contains The chapter contains safety instructions which you must follow when installing operating and servicing the drive If ignored physical injury or death may follow or damage may occur to the drive motor or driven equipment Read the safety instructions before you work on the drive AN Use of warnings Warnings caution you about conditions which can result in serious injury or death and or damage to the equipment and advise on how to avoid the danger The following warning symbols are used in this manual Electricity warning warns of hazards from electricity which can cause physical injury and or damage to the equipment General warning warns about conditions other than those caused by electricity which can result in physical injury and or damage to the equipment 16 Safety Safety in installation and maintenance These warnings are intended for all who work on the drive motor cable or motor E El
303. stallation on page 35 Check the ambient conditions ratings and Technical data on page 317 required cooling air flow Unpack and check the drive Mechanical installation Unpacking on page 31 If the drive will be connected to an IT Operation principle and hardware description ungrounded or corner grounded system Type designation key on page 27 check that the internal EMC filter is not Electrical installation Checking the connected compatibility with IT ungrounded and corner grounded TN systems on page 46 Install the drive on a wall or in a cabinet Mechanical installation on page 29 Route the cables Planning the electrical installation Routing the cables on page 39 Check the insulation of the input cable and the Electrical installation Checking the insulation motor and the motor cable of the assembly on page 45 Connect the power cables Electrical installation Connecting the power cables on page 47 Connect the control cables Electrical installation Connecting the control cables on page 49 Check the installation Installation checklist on page 55 Commission the drive Start up and control with I O on page 57 Operation principle and hardware description 23 Operation principle and hardware description What this chapter contains The chapter briefly describes the operation principle layout type designation label and type designation information It also shows a general diagram of power connections
304. status meets the setting Running Start signal on Run enable signal on no active fault FAULT 1 Inverted fault Relay is de energized on a fault trip REVERSED Motor rotates in reverse direction 6 178 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description STARTED The drive has received start command Relay is energized 7 even if Run enable signal is off Relay is de energized when drive receives a stop command or a fault occurs SUPRV1 Status according to supervision parameters 3201 3203 OVER See parameter group 32 SUPERVISION SUPRV1 See selection SUPRV1 OVER UNDER SUPRV2 Status according to supervision parameters 3204 3206 OVER See parameter group 32 SUPERVISION SUPRV2 See selection SUPRV2 OVER UNDER SUPRV3 Status according to supervision parameters 3207 3209 OVER See parameter group 32 SUPERVISION SUPRV3 See selection SUPRV3 OVER UNDER AT SET POINT Output frequency is equal to the reference frequency FLT ALARM Fault or alarm EXT CTRL Drive is under external control REF 2 SEL External reference REF 2 is in use CONST FREQ A constant speed is in use See parameter group 12 CONSTANT SPEEDS REF LOSS Reference or active control location is lost DRIVE TEMP Alarm Fault by drive overtemperature protection function E UNDERVOLTA Alarm Fault by undervoltage protection function G Al LOSS Analog input Al1 signal is lost Al2 LOSS Analog input Al2 signal is lost
305. status through RO 2 4 With option MREL 01 only Alarm Additional Additional information PID aom p pena information A mode Motor temperature measurement through the standard I O This section describes the temperature measurement of one motor when the drive I O terminals are used as the connection interface Motor temperature can be measured using PT100 or PTC sensors connected to analog input and output One sensor Three sensors A WARNING According to IEC 664 the connection of the motor temperature sensor requires double or reinforced insulation between motor live parts and the sensor Reinforced insulation entails a clearance and creepage distance of 8 mm 400 500 V AC equipment If the assembly does not fulfill the requirement the I O board terminals must be protected against contact and they may not be connected to other equipment or the temperature sensor must be isolated from the I O terminals 142 Program features It is also possible to monitor motor temperature by connecting a PTC sensor and a thermistor relay between the 24 V DC voltage supply offered by the drive and a digital input The figure below displays the connection Par 3501 THERM 0 or THERM 1 Thermistor relay WARNING According to IEC 664 the connection of the motor thermistor to the digital input requires double or reinforced insulation between motor live parts and the thermistor Reinforced insul
306. sting the voltage of analog input Al1 Reverse direction Switch digital input DI2 on Forward direction Switch digital input DI2 off Switch digital input DI1 off The motor stops Basic Control Panel Text FWD starts flashing slowly Assistant Control Panel The arrow stops rotating 66 Start up and control with I O Control panels 67 Control panels What this chapter contains The chapter describes the control panel keys LED indicators and display fields It also instructs in using the panel in control monitoring and changing the settings About control panels Use a control panel to control the ACS310 read status data and adjust parameters The drive works with either of two different control panel types e Basic Control Panel This panel described in section Basic Control Panel on page 69 provides basic tools for manual entry of parameter values e Assistant Control Panel This panel described in section Assistant Control Panel on page 80 includes pre programmed assistants to automate the most common parameter setups The panel provides language support It is available with different language sets Applicability The manual is applicable to panels with the panel revisions and the panel firmware versions given in the table below Panel type Type code Panel revision Panel firmware version Basic Control Panel ACS CP C 1 13 or later Assistant Control Panel ACS CP A 2 04 or later Assistant Co
307. t and stop buttons are disabled E Default I O connections X1A Zd tov Reference voltage 10 V DC max 10 mA Not in use by default 0 10 V max 500 an 6 GND Analog input circuit common 7 AO Output frequency value 0 20 mA AA OTTO IA Ho 24v punta voltage output 24 V DC max 200 mA 10 6ND Auxiliary voltage output common 11 pcom Digital input common 12 pm Start pulse gt SSS X1B 17 ROCOM pa RON Q S peL Digital output max 100 mA O fooour 4 No fault Fault 1 22 DOGND 1 See parameter group 12 CONSTANT 2 360 degree grounding under a clamp SPEEDS Tightening torque 0 4 N m 3 5 Ibf in DI3 DI4 Operation parameter O 0 Set speed through Al1 11 O Speed 1 1202 Relay output 1 No fault Fault 1 o H Speed 2 1203 106 Application macros Alternate macro This macro provides an I O configuration adapted to a sequence of DI control signals used when alternating the rotation direction of the motor To enable the macro set the value of parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO to 3 ALTERNATE For the parameter default values see section Default values with different macros on page 157 If you use other than the default connections presented below see section I O terminals on page 49 E Default I O connections X1A 1 SR Signal cable sieneen 2 Jan ap ee Reference voltage 10 V DC max
308. t capacity Frequency Imbalance 200 208 220 230 240 V AC 3 phase for 200 V AC drives 380 400 415 440 460 480 V AC 3 phase for 400 V AC drives 110 variation from converter nominal voltage is allowed as default Maximum allowed prospective short circuit current at the input power connection as defined in IEC 60439 1 is 100 kA The drive is suitable for use in a circuit capable of delivering not more than 100 kA rms symmetrical amperes at the drive maximum rated voltage 50 60 Hz 5 maximum rate of change 17 s Max 3 of nominal phase to phase input voltage Motor connection data Motor type Voltage U2 Short circuit protection IEC 61800 5 1 UL 508C Frequency Frequency resolution Current Power limit Field weakening point Switching frequency Maximum recommended motor cable length AC induction motor 0 to U4 3 phase symmetrical Umax at the field weakening point The motor output is short circuit proof by IEC 61800 5 1 and UL 508C 0 500 Hz 0 01 Hz See section Ratings on page 378 1 5 PN 10 500 Hz 4 8 12 or 16 kHz Operational functionality and motor cable length The drive is designed to operate with optimum performance with the following maximum motor cable lengths The motor cable lengths may be extended with output chokes as shown in the table Maximum motor cable length m ft RTRA ro o R1 R4 100 330 326 Technical data EMC compatibility and motor cable length
309. t conditions on page 328 The drive is fixed properly on an even vertical non flammable wall See Mechanical installation on page 29 The cooling air will flow freely See Mechanical installation Free space around the drive on page 30 The motor and the driven equipment are ready for start See Planning the electrical installation Checking the compatibility of the motor and drive on page 36 as well as Technical data Motor connection data on page 325 For ungrounded and corner grounded systems The internal EMC filter is disconnected EMC screw removed The capacitors are reformed if the drive has been stored over a year The drive is grounded properly The input power voltage matches the drive nominal input voltage The input power connections at U1 V1 and W1 are OK and tightened with the correct torque Appropriate input power fuses and disconnector are installed The motor connections at U2 V2 and W2 are OK and tightened with the correct torque OO OOOO O 56 Installation checklist The motor cable input power cable and control cables are routed separately The external control I O connections are OK The input power voltage cannot be applied to the output of the drive with a bypass connection Terminal cover and for NEMA 1 hood and connection box are in place Start up and control with I O 57 Start up and control with I O What this chapter contains The chapter tells how to e perf
310. t of steps for checking the delivery installing and commissioning the drive The flowchart refers to chapters sections in this manual Applicability The manual is applicable to the ACS310 drive firmware version 4 00E or later See parameter 3301 FIRMWARE on page 209 Target audience The reader is expected to know the fundamentals of electricity wiring electrical components and electrical schematic symbols The manual is written for readers worldwide Both Sl and imperial units are shown Special US instructions for installations in the United States are given Purpose of the manual This manual provides information needed for planning the installation installing commissioning using and servicing the drive 20 Introduction to the manual Contents of this manual The manual consists of the following chapters Safety page 15 gives safety instructions you must follow when installing commissioning operating and servicing the drive Introduction to the manual this chapter page 19 describes applicability target audience purpose and contents of this manual It also contains a quick installation and commissioning flowchart Operation principle and hardware description page 23 describes the operation principle layout power connections and control interfaces type designation label and type designation information in short Mechanical installation page 29 tells how to check the installation site unpack check the de
311. tart and stop through digital input DI5 O stop 1 start Direction is fixed according to parameter 1003 DIRECTION setting REQUEST FORWARD DI5 4 Start and stop through digital input DI5 O stop 1 start 2 Direction through digital input DI4 O forward 1 reverse To control direction parameter 1003 DIRECTION must be REQUEST SUPRV1 Start when the value of supervision parameter 1 goes over OVER the supervision high limit Stop when the value goes below the low limit See parameter group 32 SUPERVISION SUPRV1 Start when the value of the supervision parameter 1 goes UNDER below the supervision low limit Stop when the value goes over the high limit See parameter group 32 SUPERVISION SUPRV3 See selection SUPRV1 OVER OVER SUPRV3 See selection SUPRV1 UNDER UNDER SUP1OVER Start and stop as for SUPRV1 OVER Direction through DI2 digital input DI2 O forward 1 reverse To control direction parameter 1003 DIRECTION setting must be REQUEST SUP1 Start and stop as for SUPRV1 UNDER Direction through UDR DI2 digital input DI2 O forward 1 reverse To control direction parameter 1003 DIRECTION setting must be REQUEST 1002 EXT2 Defines the connections and the source for the start stop NOT SEL COMMANDS and direction commands for external control location 2 EXT2 See parameter 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS Po 1003 DIRECTION Enables the control of rotation direction of the motor or fixes REQUES the dir
312. tches off the above motor s contactor if the motor was running Any other running motors are not interrupted e Switches on the contactor of the new speed regulated motor The autochange switch gear connects this motor to the drive power output Delays motor start for time 8122 PFC START DELAY Starts the speed regulated motor e Identifies the next constant speed motor in the rotation e Switches the above motor on but only if the new speed regulated motor had been running as a constant speed motor This step keeps an equal number of motors running before and after autochange e Continues with normal PFC operation All parameters Actual signals and parameters 259 No Name Value Description PID output aaa APFC A 100 Fa 2PFC 8119 apre 3PFC APFC 2PFC 1PFC 8122 8118 je 8118 B A Area above 8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL autochange not allowed B Autochange occurs 1PFC etc PID output associated with each motor Starting order counter The operation of the starting order counter The relay output parameter definitions 1401 1403 and 1410 establish the initial motor sequence The lowest parameter number with a value 31 PFC identifies the relay connected to 1PFC the first motor and so on Initially 1PFC speed regulated motor 2PFC 1st auxiliary motor etc The first autochange shifts the sequence to 2PFC speed regulated motor 3PFC 1st auxiliary mo
313. ter modulates motor is magnetized and the drive is ready for a quick restart 0 0 60 0 s Delay time If parameter value is set to zero Zero speed 1 0 1s delay function is disabled 2113 START DELAY Defines the start delay After the conditions for start have 0 00 s been fulfilled the drive waits until the delay has elapsed and then starts the motor Start delay can be used with all start methods If start delay is zero the delay is disabled During the start delay alarm START DELAY is shown 0 0 60 0 s Delay time 1 0 01s 2201 ACCIDEC 1 2 Defines the source from which the drive reads the signal SEL that selects between the two ramp pairs acceleration deceleration pair 1 and 2 Ramp pair 1 is defined by parameters 2202 2204 Ramp pair 2 is defined by parameters 2205 2207 Digital input DI1 1 ramp pair 2 O ramp pair 1 Ta a E aT Actual signals and parameters 193 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq COMM Fieldbus interface as the source for ramp pair 1 2 selection 7 ie control word 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 bit 10 The control word is sent by the fieldbus controller through the embedded fieldbus Modbus to the drive For the control word bits see section DCU communication profile on page 289 Note This setting applies only for the DCU profile 2202 ACCELER Defines the acceleration time 1 ie the time required for the 5 0s TIME 1 speed to change from zero to the speed defined by parameter 2
314. ter value is set to zero no multiplier is 1 0 001 32 767 used 4016 ACT1 INPUT Defines the source for actual value 1 ACT1 See also Al2 parameter 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM Uses analog input 1 for ACT1 Uses analog input 2 for ACT1 CURRENT Uses current for ACT 1 TORQUE Uses torque for ACT1 POWER Uses power for ACT1 7 parameter 4020 ACT2 MINIMUM See parameter 4016 ACT1 INPUT Actual signals and parameters 227 All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 4018 ACT1 Sets the minimum value for ACT1 0 MINIMUM Scales the source signal used as the actual value ACT1 defined by parameter 4016 ACT1 INPUT For parameter 4016 values 6 COMM ACT 1 and 7 COMM ACT 2 scaling is not done 1 Analog input 3 Current p 2 nominal current T A Normal B Inversion ACT1 minimum gt ACT 1 maximum ACT1 ACT1 Source min Source max Source min Source max Source signal Source signal 1000 1000 4019 ACT1 Defines the maximum value for the variable ACT1 if an MAXIMUM analog input is selected as a source for ACT1 See parameter 4016 ACT1 INPUT The minimum 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM and maximum settings of ACT1 define how the voltage current signal received from the measuring device is converted to a percentage value used by the process PID controller See parameter 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM 1000 1000 4020 ACT2 See parameter 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM 0 MINIMUM 1000 1000 See parameter 4018 4021 ACT2
315. ternal fault sss orcas a die la ada 133 Ope rati n lIMItS REA ARENA RADARES 133 A A Oita ae 133 Power limit o 134 Automatic resets o o ooo o 134 SENOS a sia ida abia ee 134 DIAQNOSICS 263 nora AAA 134 SUPEIVISIONS soj sgob co ba a cobs RR a A a AA 134 A ee cae pie tes ak a ang Ne enamel ho aera aes ia cag Ge eee eee ee 134 Di gNOSUCS 2 025 4 05 0 ina ne aa A pad 134 Parameter lock o 135 Settings saci ce see rner nia abd Noh Se RAB e i e SoH Bd als See 135 PID CONTO i cate e ed suf ee AAA elas 135 Process controller PIDA 0 0 ccc tees 135 External Trim controller PID2 nananana kaos be date Ea Bee eae eee os 135 Block diagrams uni opti ieee ae dale Oe al ae 2 ee Reale Beirne dtd kk Bera Geek Peetu 136 SEUNS ciao dera pao cee clean ren 138 DIAOROSMES cobarde ad we eer be 138 Sleep function for the process PID PID1 control ooooccccccccoc 139 Example ermita daria Pate bad Ga du e aio dea 140 o A 141 DiagNOsStCS caos rata ra sa dica EE 141 Motor temperature measurement through the standard I O oooooccocooooo o 141 10 Table of contents SENGS aree even ale aah ee ane ewes Reka eo patentee ee ee ee 142 E A A 142 Timed functions Sosa ica lira a ii ii arene 143 Examples ii rd a a hee a Raita aii 144 DOMINOS er pis ds os town e AA A ed o A 2 145 USEFICAA QUIVE sa sonic AAA 146 SENGS sce hoe ae ia AA e Ss 146 a A A tee aceon Revd gt Rate Graces 146 Energy GpUIMIZE ocredehad
316. the date and time and enable or disable clock transitions due to daylight saving changes Display Go to the Main menu by pressing Sul if you are in the LOC WMAIN MENU T Output mode otherwise by pressing repeatedly EP until IICA you get to the Main menu ASSISTANTS CHANGED PAR EXIT 00 00 ENTER Go to the Time and date mode by selecting TIME amp Loc UTIME DATE 1 DATE on the menu with keys a and SY 7 and CLOCK VISIBILITY pressing TIME FORMAT wl DATE FORMAT EXIT 00 00 SEL e To show hide the clock select CLOCK VISIBLILITY Loc cLock visiB 1 on the menu press wl select Show clock Hide clock and press b or if you want to return to the Hide cloc previous display without making changes press wa EXIT 00 00 SEL e To specify the date format select DATE FORMAT on LoC DATE FORMAT 1 the menu press Sul and select a suitable format O E OK CANCEL Press y to save or 277 to cancel your changes dat mm YY yy mm dd yyyy CANCEL 00 00 OK e To specify the time format select TIME FORMAT on LOC UTIME FORMAT 1 the menu press vl and select a suitable format d Press to save or 237 to cancel your ch QUE lt EP your changes CANCEL 00 00 SEL 96 Control panels Step Aston O y To set the time select SET TIME on the menu and LOC USET TIME press Specify the hours with keys lt A gt and SY Sy and press Ss Then specify the minutes Press vl to sav
317. time within which 63 of a step change is reached 0 0 10 0s Filter time constant 0 1s 1814 DI1 ON DELAY Defines the delay from the signal change to the change of 0 0s the digital input DI to the ON state 0 0 3600 0s_ Delay time 0 1s 1815 DI1 OFF Defines the delay from the signal change to the change of 0 0 s DELAY the digital input DI to the OFF state 0 0 3600 0s Delay time 0 1s 1816 DI2 ON DELAY See parameter 1814 DI1 ON DELAY 0 ial Oo n 188 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 1817 DI2 OFF See parameter 1815 DI1 OFF DELAY DELAY 1818 DI3 ON DELAY See parameter 1814 DI1 ON DELAY 0 Os 1819 DI3 OFF See parameter 1815 DI1 OFF DELAY DELAY 1820 DI4 ON DELAY See parameter 1814 DI1 ON DELAY Os 1821 DI4 OFF See parameter 1815 DI1 OFF DELAY DELAY 1822 DI5 ON DELAY See parameter 1814 D 1 ON DELAY 1823 DI5 OFF See parameter 1815 DI1 OFF DELAY DELAY o o n 2003 MAX Defines the allowed maximum motor current CURRENT 00 18 fyAlGunent SSAA 2005 OVERVOLT Activates or deactivates the overvoltage control of the CTRL intermediate DC link Fast braking of a high inertia load causes the voltage to rise to the overvoltage control limit To prevent the DC voltage from exceeding the limit the overvoltage controller automatically decreases the braking torque DISABLE Overvoltage control deactivated ENABLE Overvoltage control activated 1 2006
318. ting analog input Al1 1301 1303 3001 limits scale inversion Setting the reference limits 1107 1108 Setting the speed reference limits 2007 2008 Setting the source and limits for the 4016 4018 4019 process actual value Start Stop control Selecting the source for start and stop 1001 1002 signals of the two external control locations EXT1 and EXT2 Selecting between EXT1 and EXT2 1102 Defining the direction control 1003 Defining the start and stop modes 2101 2103 Selecting the use of Run Enable signal 1601 Setting the current limits 2003 Output signals Selecting the signals indicated through Group 14 RELAY relay output RO OUTPUTS Selecting the signals indicated through Group 15 ANALOG analog output AO OUTPUTS Setting the minimum maximum scaling and inversion 116 Program features Name Description Sot parameters Timed functions Setting the timed functions 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS Selecting the timed start stop control for 1001 1002 external control locations EXT1 and EXT2 Selecting timed EXT1 EXT2 control 1102 Activation of timed constant speed 1 1201 Selecting timed function status indicated 1401 through relay output RO Selecting timed PID1 parameter set 1 2 4027 control Selection between different internal 4039 constant set points for the process PID control PID1 parameter set 1 Selection between different internal 4139 constant set points for the process PID control PID1 parameter
319. tion codes Exception codes are serial communication responses from the drive The drive supports the standard Modbus exception codes listed in the following table Name Description S O Illegal Function Unsupported command llegal Data Address Address does not exist or is read write protected Illegal Data Value Incorrect value for the drive Value is outside minimum or maximum limits Parameter is read only Message is too long Parameter write is not allowed when start is active Parameter write is not allowed when factory macro is selected Drive parameter 5318 EFB PAR 18 holds the most recent exception code 284 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus Communication profiles The embedded fieldbus supports three communication profiles e DCU communication profile DCU PROFILE e ABB drives limited communication profile ABB DRV LIM e ABB drives full communication profile ABB DRV FULL The DCU profile extends the control and status interface to 32 bits and it is the internal interface between the main drive application and the embedded fieldbus environment The ABB drives limited is based on the PROFIBUS interface ABB drives full profile supports two Control word bits not supported by the ABB DRV LIM implementation Modbus Embedded fieldbus network ElA 485 Drive ABB DRV LIM ABB DRV FULL ABB drives profile DCU profile Actual values selected by par 5310 8317 DCU PROFILE DCU profile Co
320. tives are Linear and S curve Linear Suitable for drives requiring steady or slow acceleration deceleration S curve Ideal for conveyors carrying fragile loads or other applications where a smooth transition is required when changing the speed E Settings Parameter group 22 ACCEL DECEL Program features 129 Critical speeds Critical speeds function is available for applications where it is necessary to avoid certain motor speeds drive output frequencies or speed bands output frequency bands because of eg mechanical resonance problems The user can define three critical frequencies or frequency bands E Settings Parameter group 25 CRITICAL SPEEDS Constant speeds It is possible to define seven positive constant speeds Constant speeds are selected with digital inputs Constant speed activation overrides the external speed reference Constant speed selections are ignored if e PID reference is being followed or e drive is in local control mode This function operates on a 2 ms time level E Settings Parameter group 12 CONSTANT SPEEDS Constant speed 7 1208 CONST SPEED 7 is also used for fault functions See parameter group 30 FAULT FUNCTIONS 130 Program features Custom U f ratio The user can define a U f curve output voltage as a function of frequency This custom ratio is used only in special applications where linear and squared U f ratio are not sufficient eg when motor break away torque needs t
321. to the value defined by parameter 1208 CONST SPEED 7 Alarm limit is defined by parameter 3021 Al1 FAULT LIMIT 3022 Al2 FAULT LIMIT WARNING Make sure that it is safe to continue operation in case the analog input signal is lost LAST SPEED The drive generates alarm A 1 LOSS Al1 LOSS and 3 freezes the speed to the level the drive was operating at The speed is determined by the average speed over the previous 10 seconds Alarm limit is defined by parameter 3021 Al1 FAULT LIMIT 3022 Al2 FAULT LIMIT WARNING Make sure that it is safe to continue operation in case the analog input signal is lost 3002 PANEL COMM Selects how the drive reacts to a control panel FAULT communication break Note When either of the two external control locations are active and start stop and or direction are through the control panel 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS 8 KEYPAD the drive follows the speed reference according to the configuration of the external control locations instead of the value of the last speed or parameter 1208 CONST SPEED 7 FAULT Drive trips on fault PANEL LOSS and the motor coasts to stop Actual signals and parameters 201 All parameters No Name Value Description CONST SP7 The drive generates alarm PANEL LOSS and sets the speed to the speed defined by parameter 1208 CONST SPEED 7 WARNING Make sure that it is safe to continue operation in case of a panel communication break LAST SPEED
322. tops communicating Settings Parameter 3002 PANEL COMM ERR E External fault External faults 1 and 2 can be supervised by defining one digital input as a source for an external fault indication signal Settings Parameters 3003 EXTERNAL FAULT 1 and 3004 EXTERNAL FAULT 2 E Stall protection The drive protects the motor in a stall situation It is possible to adjust the supervision limits frequency time and choose how the drive reacts to the motor stall condition alarm indication fault indication amp drive stop no reaction Settings Parameters 3010 3012 132 Program features E Motor thermal protection The motor can be protected against overheating by activating the Motor thermal protection function The drive calculates the temperature of the motor on the basis of the following assumptions 1 The motor is in the ambient temperature of 30 C when power is applied to the drive 2 Motor temperature is calculated using either the user adjustable or automatically calculated motor thermal time constant and motor load curve see the figures below The load curve should be adjusted in case the ambient temperature exceeds 30 C Output current relative to motor nom current 150 Break point Motor load curve P 3007 100 127 P 3008 50 Zero speed load Motor thermal time constant Settings Parameters 3005 3009 Note It is also possible to use the motor temperature measurement funct
323. tor 1PFC last auxiliary motor The next autochange shifts the sequence again and so on If the autochange cannot start a needed motor because all inactive motors are interlocked the drive displays an alarm 2015 PFC I LOCK When the drive power supply is switched off the counter preserves the current Autochange rotation positions in permanent memory When power is restored the Autochange rotation starts at the position stored in memory If the PFC relay configuration is changed or if the PFC enable value is changed the rotation is reset according to parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 Def FbEq 260 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value NOT SEL Description Output frequency No aux 1 aux 2aux motors motor motors Area Autochange is allowed PID output 100 Interlock function is enabled an interlock is active when its command signal is absent an interlock is inactive when its command signal is present the drive will not start if a start command occurs when the speed regulated motor s interlock is active the control panel displays an alarm 2015 PFC LOCK Wire each Interlock circuit as follows Wire a contact of the motor s On Off switch to the Interlock circuit the drive s PFC logic can then recognize that the motor is switched off and start the next available motor Wire a contact of the motor thermal relay or other protective devic
324. tor in the motor cable in addition to the conductive shield connect the grounding conductor to the grounding terminal at the drive and motor ends Route the motor cable input power cable and control cables separately For more information see section Routing the cables on page 39 Grounding of the motor cable shield at the motor end For minimum radio frequency interference ground the cable by twisting the shield as follows flattened width gt 1 5 length or ground the cable shield 360 degrees at the lead through of the motor terminal box 48 Electrical installation E Connection procedure 1 Fasten the grounding conductor PE of the input power cable under the grounding clamp Connect the phase conductors to the U1 V1 and W1 terminals Use a tightening torque of 0 8 N m 7 Ibf in for frame sizes RO R2 1 7 Nem 15 Ibf in for R3 and 2 5 N m 22 Ibf in for R4 Strip the motor cable and twist the shield to form as short a pigtail as possible Fasten the twisted shield under the grounding clamp Connect the phase conductors to the U2 V2 and W2 terminals Use a tightening torque of 0 8 N m 7 Ibf in for frame sizes RO R2 1 7 N m 15 Ibf in for R3 and 2 5 N m 22 Ibf in for R4 3 Secure the cables outside the drive mechanically 25 26 PO PNO 17 18 19 5 16 20 21 22 4 same 6 H 7 o ie FS b els Q T8 Q
325. troller Unit depends on parameter 4106 UNITS and 4107 UNIT SCALE settings 0132 PID 1 Deviation of the process PID1 controller e the difference DEVIATION between the reference value and the actual value Unit depends on parameter 4006 UNITS 4007 UNIT SCALE and 4027 PID 1 PARAM SET settings 0133 PID 2 Deviation of the PID2 controller ie the difference between DEVIATION the reference value and the actual value Unit depends on parameter 4106 UNITS and 4107 UNIT SCALE settings 0134 COMM RO Relay output Control word through fieldbus decimal See 1 WORD parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 0135 COMM VALUE Data received from fieldbus 1 1 0136 COMM VALUE Data received from fieldbus 1 2 0137 PROCESS Process variable 1 defined by parameter group 34 PANEL VAR 1 DISPLAY 0138 PROCESS Process variable 2 defined by parameter group 34 PANEL VAR 2 DISPLAY 0139 PROCESS Process variable 3 defined by parameter group 34 PANEL VAR 3 DISPLAY 0140 RUN TIME Elapsed drive running time counter thousands of hours 1 Runs when the drive is modulating Counter cannot be 0 01 kh reset 0141 MWH MWH counter The counter value is accumulated till it COUNTER reaches 65535 after which the counter rolls over and starts Wh again from 0 Cannot be reset 0142 REVOLUTION Motor revolution counter millions of revolutions The counter can be reset by pressing UP and DOWN keys simultaneously when the control panel is in the Parameter mode 0143 DRIVE O
326. ts 0 1 START STOP when EXT1 is selected as the active REVERSE as defined by parameters 1001 EXT1 EXT2 Enables EXT1 EXT2 selection 40001 40031 bit 5 SEL through 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 bit 11 bit 5 with ABB drives profile 5319 SELECT COMM A 1 when EXT2 is selected as the settings SYSTEM CONTROL INPUTS ABB DRV 0 1 control location REQUEST and 1002 The direction control is EFB PAR 19 bit 11 COMM AI1 active control location See section OUTPUT SIGNAL SOURCE SELECTION ABB DRV DCU COMM Enables the control of the inverted 40001 bit 3 40031 bit 6 Run enable signal Run disable through 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 bit 6 with ABB drives profile 5319 EFB PAR 19 bit 3 Fieldbus control with embedded fieldbus 275 Parameter Setting for Function Information Modbus register fieldbus address control 1604 FAULT COMM Enables fault reset through 40001 bit 7 40031 bit 4 RESET SEL fieldbus 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 bit 4 with ABB drives profile 5319 EFB PAR 19 bit 7 1606 LOCAL COMM Local control mode lock signal 40031 bit LOCK through 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 14 bit 14 1607 PARAM DONE Saves parameter value changes 41607 SAVE SAVE including those made through fieldbus control to permanent memory 1608 START COMM Inverted Start enable 1 Start 40032 bit ENABLE 1 disable through 0302 FB CMD 18 WORD 2 bit 18 1609 START COMM Inverted Start enable 2 Start 40032 bit ENABLE 2 disable through 0302 FB CMD 19 WORD 2 bit 19 LIMITS ABB DRV DCU
327. ts of the Modbus addresses 40001 40012 and 40031 40034 Modbus register Ascess Information SSCS 40001 Control Word Control word Supported only by ABB drives profile ie when 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE setting is ABB DRV LIM or ABB DRV FULL Parameter 5379 EFB PAR 19 shows a copy of the Control word in hexadecimal R W format 40002 Reference 1 R W External reference REF1 See section Fieldbus references on page 277 40003 Reference 2 R W External reference REF2 See section Fieldbus references on page 277 40004 Status Word Status word Supported only by ABB drives profile ie when 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE setting is ABB DRV LIM or ABB DRV FULL Parameter 5320 EFB PAR 20 shows a copy of the Control word in hexadecimal format 40005 Actual 1 8 Actual value 1 8 Use parameter 5370 5317 to select an actual value to be mapped to Modbus register 40012 40005 40012 0031 Control Word LSW R W 0301 FB CMD WORD 7 ie the least significant word of the DCU profile 32 bit Control word Supported only by DCU profile ie when 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE setting is DCU PROFILE 40032 Control Word MSW R W 0302 FB CMD WORD 2 ie the most significant word of the DCU profile 32 bit Control word Supported only by DCU profile ie when 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE setting is DCU PROFILE 40033 Status Word LSW 0303 FB STS WORD 1 ie the least significant word of the DCU profile 32 bit Status word Supported only by DCU profile ie when 5
328. ttings Check digital input connections Check fieldbus communication settings Check parameter 1609 START ENABLE 2 settings Check digital input connections Check fieldbus communication settings Check that it is safe to continue operation Return emergency stop push button to normal position Wait until drive indicates that motor identification is completed Check input power line fuses Check for input power supply imbalance Check fault function parameters See parameter group 37 USER LOAD CURVE Check for a closed valve on the inlet side of the pump fan Check piping for leaks See parameter group 44 PUMP PROTECTION Check piping for blocks See parameter group 44 PUMP PROTECTION 2032 PIPE FILL Pipe fill in progress See parameters 4421 4426 0309 bit 15 298 Fault tracing CODE ALARM CAUSE WHAT TO DO INLET VERY LOW _ Pressure at pump fan Check for a closed valve on the inlet 0310 bit O inlet too low side of the pump fan Check piping for leaks See parameter group 44 PUMP PROTECTION OUTLET VERY Pressure at pump fan Check piping for blocks HIGH outlet too high See parameter group 44 PUMP 0310 bit 1 PROTECTION 1 Even when the relay output is configured to indicate alarm conditions eg parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 5 ALARM or 16 FLT ALARM this alarm is not indicated by a relay output Fault tracing 299 Alarms generated by the Basic Control Panel
329. ty for the 50 0 autochange logic When the output from the PID PFC control block exceeds this limit autochange is prevented For example use this parameter to deny autochange when the pump fan system is operating near maximum capacity Autochange overview The purpose of the autochange operation is to equalize duty time between multiple motors used in a system At each autochange operation a different motor takes a turn connected to the drive output the speed regulated motor The starting order of the other motors rotates The Autochange function requires e external switch gear for changing the drive s output power connections parameter 8120 INTERLOCKS gt 0 Autochange is performed when the running time since the previous autochange reaches the time set by 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV e the PFC input is below the level set by this parameter 8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL Note The drive always coasts to stop when autochange is performed In an autochange the Autochange function does all of the following see the figure e Initiates a change when the running time since the last autochange reaches 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV and PFC input is below limit 8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL Stops the speed regulated motor e Switches off the contactor of the speed regulated motor e Increments the starting order counter to change the starting order for the motors e Identifies the next motor in line to be the speed regulated motor Swi
330. ual start up on page 59 If you have an Assistant Control Panel you can either run the Start up assistant see section How to perform a guided start up on page 62 or perform a manual start up see section How to perform a manual start up on page 59 The Start up assistant which is included in the Assistant Control Panel only guides you through all essential settings to be done In the manual start up the drive gives no guidance you go through the very basic settings by following the instructions given in section How to perform a manual start up on page 59 How to start up the drive without a control panel Apply input power and wait for a moment Check that the red LED is not lit and the green LED is lit but not blinking Start up and control with I O 59 E How to perform a manual start up For the manual start up you can use the Basic Control Panel or the Assistant Control Panel The instructions below are valid for both control panels but the displays shown are the Basic Control Panel displays unless the instruction applies to the Assistant Control Panel only Before you start ensure that you have the motor nameplate data on hand Apply input power The Basic Control Panel powers up into the Output mode The Assistant Control Panel asks if you want to EXIT run the Start up assistant If you press 7 the Start up assistant is not run and you can as described below for the Basic Control Panel
331. ult tracing on page 293 Bit O Reserved Bit 1 THERM FAIL Bit 2 3 Reserved Bit 4 CURR MEAS Bit 0 OVERCURRENT Bit 1 DC OVERVOLT Bit 3 SHORT CIRC Bit 4 Reserved g g Bit 2 DEV OVERTEMP 164 Actual signals and parameters All actual signals No Name Value Bit 5 SUPPLY PHASE Bit 6 Reserved Bit 7 OVERSPEED Bit 9 DRIVE ID Bit 10 CONFIG FILE Bit 11 SERIAL 1 ERR Bit 12 EFB CON FILE Bit 13 FORCE TRIP Bit 14 Reserved Bit 15 OUTP WIRING 0307 FAULT WORD A 16 bit data word For the possible causes and remedies 3 and fieldbus equivalents see chapter Fault tracing on page 93 it 1 EFB 2 it 3 INCOMPATIBLE SW Bit 4 USER LOAD CURVE Bit 5 UNKNOWN EXTENSION Bit 6 INLET VERY LOW Bit 7 OUTLET VERY HIGH Bit 8 INLET LOW Bit 9 OUTLET HIGH it 10 14 System error Bit 15 Parameter setting fault 0308 ALARM WORD A 16 bit data word For the possible causes and remedies 1 and fieldbus equivalents see chapter Fault tracing on page 293 An alarm can be reset by resetting the whole alarm word Write zero to the word Bit 0 OVERCURRENT Bit 1 OVERVOLTAGE Bit 2 UNDERVOLTAGE Bit 3 DIR LOCK Bit 4 O COMM Bit 5 A11 LOSS Bit 6 Al2 LOSS Bit 7 PANEL LOSS Bit 8 DEVICE OVERTEMP Bit 9 MOTOR TEMP Bit 10 Reserved U 0 0 Ss e Y vs D on O 2 o ul un o Wey H m w w wW w mw Il m Mm w w
332. underload curve 30 LOW 4 definition point Must be smaller than 3715 LOAD TORQ HIGH 4 0 600 3715 LOAD TORQ Defines the torque value of the fourth overload curve HIGH 4 definition point 0 600 oe SSCS 3716 LOAD FREQ 5 Defines the frequency value of the fifth load curve definition 500 Hz point 0 500 He 3717 LOAD TORQ Defines the torque value of the fifth underload curve 30 LOW 5 definition point Must be smaller than 3718 LOAD TORQ HIGH 5 0 600 3718 LOAD TORQ Defines the torque value of the fifth overload curve definition 300 HIGH 5 point 0 600 4001 GAIN Defines the gain for the process PID controller High gain 11 0 may cause speed oscillation 1 1 300 222 Actual signals and parameters All parameters No Name Value Description Def FbEq 0 1 100 0 Gain When value is set to 0 1 the PID controller output changes one tenth as much as the error value When value is set to 100 the PID controller output changes one hundred times as much as the error value 4002 INTEGRATION Defines the integration time for the process PID1 controller TIME The integration time defines the rate at which the controller output changes when the error value is constant The shorter the integration time the faster the continuous error value is corrected Too short an integration time makes the control unstable A Error B Error value step C Controller output with gain 1 D Controller output with gain
333. unipolar bipolar Potentiometer reference value X1A 4 Resolution Accuracy Voltage Type Frequency input Input impedance Type Max switching voltage Max switching current Max continuous current Type Max switching voltage Max switching current Frequency Resolution Accuracy Cable Termination Isolation Transfer rate Communication type Protocol Technical data 327 0 2 10 V Rin gt 312 kohm 10 10 V Rin gt 312 kohm 0 4 20 mA Rin 100 ohm 20 20 mA Rin 100 ohm 10 V 1 max 10 mA R lt 10 kohm 0 1 1 0 4 20 mA load lt 500 ohm 24 V DC 10 max 200 mA 12 24 V DC with internal or external supply PNP and NPN Pulse train 0 16 kHz X1A 16 only 2 4 kohm NO NC 250 V AC 30 V DC 0 5A 30V DC 5A 230VAC 2 Arms Transistor output PNP 30 V DC 100 mA 30 V DC short circuit protected 10 Hz 16 kHz 1 Hz 0 2 Shielded twisted pair impedance 100 150 ohm Daisy chained bus without drop lines Bus interface isolated from the drive 1 2 76 8 kbit s Serial asynchronous half duplex Modbus Approximately 95 to 98 at nominal power level depending on the drive size and options Degrees of protection IP20 cabinet installation UL open Standard enclosure The drive must be installed in a cabinet to fulfil the requirements for shielding from contact IP20 NEMA 1 Achieved with an option kit including a hood and a connection
334. up assistant or other assistants 114 Program features E Default order of the tasks Depending on the selection made in the Application task parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO the Start up assistant decides which consequent tasks it suggests The default tasks are shown in the table below Application selection Default tasks ABB STANDARD Language select Motor set up Application Option modules Speed control EXT1 Speed control EXT2 Start Stop control Timed functions Protections Output signals 3 WIRE Language select Motor set up Application Option modules Speed control EXT1 Speed control EXT2 Start Stop control Timed functions Protections Output signals ALTERNATE Language select Motor set up Application Option modules Speed control EXT1 Speed control EXT2 Start Stop control Timed functions Protections Output signals MOTOR POT Language select Motor set up Application Option modules Speed control EXT1 Speed control EXT2 Start Stop control Timed functions Protections Output signals HAND AUTO Language select Motor set up Application Option modules Speed control EXT1 Speed control EXT2 Start Stop control Timed functions Protections Output signals PID CONTROL Language select Motor set up Application Option modules PID control Speed control EXT2 Start Stop control Timed functions Protections Output signals PFC CONTROL Language select Motor set up Application Option modules Speed contr
335. ve running active Activation at drive power up Power up drive powered active TIMED FUNC 1 Activation by a timed function Timed function 1 active PID control active See parameter group 36 T MED FUNCTIONS TIMED FUNC 2 TIMED FUNC3 TIMED FUNC 4 DI1 INV Inverted digital input DI1 O active 1 inactive 1 NV 2 NV Dia INV DIS NV Defines the offset for the external PID controller output When PID controller is activated controller output starts from the offset value When PID controller is deactivated controller output is reset to the offset value Parameter 4230 TRIM MODE must be set to NOT SEL 0 0 100 0 Value in percent 1 0 1 Activates the trim function and selects between the direct and proportional trimming With trimming it is possible to combine a corrective factor to the drive reference See section Reference trimming on page 121 NOT SEL No trim function selected PROPORTION Active The trimming factor is proportional to the rom Hz L reference before trimming REF 1 DIRECT Active The trimming factor is relative to a fixed maximum limit used in the reference control loop maximum speed frequency or torque Defines the multiplier for the trimming function See section 0 0 Reference trimming on page 121 100 0 100 0 Multiplier 0 1 1 4232 CORRECTION Selects the trim reference See section Reference trimming PID2REF SRC on page 121 PID2REF PID2 reference selected by par
336. xiliary motor stop delay 8776 parameters See also section SPFC control macro on page 111 154 Program features E Settings Parameter Additional information Group 14 RELAY OUTPUTS Selections of relay outputs for starting and stopping of motors Group 18 FREQ IN amp TRAN OUT Selections of relay outputs for starting and stopping of motors transistor output can be used as an additional relay Group 44 PUMP PROTECTION Pump protection pressure monitoring settings Group 87 PFC CONTROL PFC control settings 8123 PFC SPFC enable disable E Diagnostics Actual signal Additional information 0116 Application block output signal 0162 RO 1 status TO status RO 2 4 status With option MREL 01 only PFC Autochange function active PFC I LOCK PFC interlocks active INLET LOW INLET VERY LOW Pressure at pump fan inlet too low OUTLET HIGH OUTLET VERY Pressure at pump fan outlet too high HIGH Additional information PAR PFC REF NEG 2007 lt 0 PAR PFC IO 1 Not enough relays parameterized for PFC Conflict between group 14 RELAY OUTPUTS parameter 8117 and parameter 8778 PAR PFC IO 2 Parameter 8127 does not match the PFC motors in group 14 RELAY OUTPUTS and parameter 8118 PAR PFC IO 3 Allocation of a digital input interlock for each PFC motor not possible INLET LOW INLET VERY LOW Pressure at pump fan inlet too low OUTLET HIGH OUTLET VERY Pressure at pump fan outlet too high HIGH Actual signals and param
337. zes RO R4 four holes b side mounting frame sizes RO R2 three holes one of the bottom holes is located in the clamping plate 2 Fix the screws or bolts to the marked locations 1 2 B Mechanical installation 33 3 Position the drive onto the screws on the wall 4 Tighten the screws in the wall securely On DIN rail 1 Click the drive to the rail To detach the drive press the release lever on top of the drive 1b 34 Mechanical installation E Fasten clamping plates 1 Fasten the clamping plate to the plate at the bottom of the drive with the provided screws 2 For frame sizes RO R2 fasten the I O clamping plate to the clamping plate with the provided screws Planning the electrical installation 35 Planning the electrical installation What this chapter contains The chapter contains the instructions that you must follow when checking the compatibility of the motor and drive and selecting cables protections cable routing and way of operation for the drive Note The installation must always be designed and made according to applicable local laws and regulations ABB does not assume any liability whatsoever for any installation which breaches the local laws and or other regulations Furthermore if the recommendations given by ABB a

EN / ACS310 User's Manual Rev B

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents